0% found this document useful (0 votes)

449 views

840d Programming

catalog

Uploaded by

jodaki

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

449 views

840d Programming

catalog

Uploaded by

jodaki

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 468

SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC

Programming Guide 08.99 Edition

Fundamentals

User Documentation

Overview of SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC Documentation

General Documentation
SINUMERIK SIROTEC SIMODRIVE Accessories

User Documentation

SINUMERIK
840D/810D/ FM-NC

SINUMERIK
840D/810D/ FM-NC/611

SINUMERIK
840D/810D/ FM-NC

SINUMERIK
840D/810D

SINUMERIK
840D/810D/ FM-NC

Brochure

Catalog Ordering Info NC 60.1 *) Technical Info. NC 60.2

Catalog Accessories NC-Z

AutoTurn Short Guide Programming (1) Setup (2)

Operators Guide Unit Operator Panel HPU

Diagnostics Guide *)

Operators Guide Short Guide Operators Guide *)

User Documentation

Manufacturer / Service Documentation

SINUMERIK
840D/810D/ FM-NC

SINUMERIK
840D/810D

SINUMERIK

Program. Guide Short Guide Fundamentals ) Advanced ) Cycles Measuring Cycles

Operators Guide ManualTurn Short Guide ManualTurn ShopMill Short Guide ShopMill

Description of Functions ManualTurn ShopMill

Description of Functions Synchronized Actions Wood, Glass, Ceramics

Descr. of Functions Computer Link Tool Data Information System

Configuring (HW) *) FM-NC 810D 840D

Manufacturer / Service Documentation

SINUMERIK SIMODRIVE
611D 840D/810D

SINUMERIK
840D/810D/ FM-NC

SINUMERIK
840D/810D

SINUMERIK
840D/810D/ FM-NC

Operator Components (HW) *)

Description of Description of Functions Functions Drive Functions *) Basic Machine *) Extended Functions Special Functions

Configuring Kit MMC 100/101 Configuring Syntax Development Kit

Screen Kit MMC 100/101 SW Update and Configuration

Description of Functions Tool Management

Description of Functions Operator Interface OP 030

Manufacturer / Service Documentation

SINUMERIK SIMODRIVE SIROTEC

SINUMERIK SIMODRIVE

SINUMERIK
840D

SINUMERIK SIMODRIVE

SINUMERIK SIMODRIVE 840D/810D FM-NC 611D

Lists *)

SINUMERIK SIMODRIVE 840D 611D

Description of Functions SINUMERIK Safety Integrated

Description of Functions Digitizing

Installation & Start-up Guide *) FM-NC 810D 840D/611D MMC

Description of Functions Linear Motor

Description of Functions Hydraulics Module

EMC Guidelines

Electronic Documentation
SINUMERIK SIMODRIVE 840D/810D/ FM-NC 611, Motors

Manufacturer / Service Documentation

SINUMERIK
840D/810D

DOC ON CD *) The SINUMERIK System Description of Functions ISO Dialects for SINUMERIK *) These documents are a minimum requirement for the control

Fundamental Geometrical Principles

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 A

Fundamental Principles of NC Programming

SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC Fundamentals

Positional Data

Programming Motion Commands

Path Action Programming Guide Frames

Feedrate Control and Spindle Motion

Tool Offsets

Special Functions

Valid for

Arithmetic Parameters and Program Jumps

Control Software Version SINUMERIK 840D 5 SINUMERIK 840DE (Export version) 5 SINUMERIK 810D 3 SINUMERIK 810DE (Export version) 3 SINUMERIK FM-NC 3

Subprograms and Repetition of Program Sections Tables

Appendix

08.99 Edition

Contents

08.99

SINUMERIK Documentation

Printing history Brief details of this edition and previous editions are listed below. The status of each edition is shown by the code in the "Remarks" columns.

Status code in the "Remarks" column:

A .... B .... C .... New documentation. Unrevised reprint with new Order No. Revised edition with new status. If factual changes have been made on the page since the last edition, this is indicated by a new edition coding in the header on that page. Order No. 6FC5298-2AB00-0BP0 6FC5298-4AB00-0AP0 6FC5298-3AB00-0BP0 6FC5298-3AB00-0BP1 6FC5298-4AB00-0BP0 6FC5298-4AB00-0BP1 6FC5298-5AB00-0BP0 6FC5298-5AB00-0BP1 Remarks A A C C C C C C

Edition 02.95 08.97 12.95 03.96 08.97 12.97 12.98 08.99

This manual forms part of the documentation available on CD ROM (DOCONCD) Edition Order No. Remarks 10.99 6FC5298-5CA00-0BG1 C
Trademarks SIMATIC, SIMATIC HMI, SIMATIC NET, SIROTEC, SINUMERIK and SIMODRIVE are all Siemens trademarks. Other names in this publication might be trademarks whose use by a third party for his own purposes may violate the rights of the registered holder.
Further Information is available on the Internet under: http://www.ad.siemens.de/sinumerik This publication was produced with WinWord V 7.0 and Designer V 4.0. The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents is not permitted without express written authority. Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design, are reserved. Siemens AG 1996-1999. All Rights Reserved. Order No. 6FC5298-5AB00-0BP1 Printed in the Federal Republic of Germany Other functions not described in this documentation might be executable in the control. This does not, however, represent an obligation to supply such functions with a new control or when servicing. We have checked that the contents of this publication agree with the hardware and software described herein. Nevertheless, differences might exist and therefore we cannot guarantee that they are completely identical. The information given in this publication is reviewed at regular intervals and any corrections that might be necessary are made in the subsequent printings. Suggestions for improvement are welcome at all times. Subject to changes without prior notice. Siemens Aktiengesellschaft

08.99

Contents

Contents Fundamental Geometrical Principles

1.1 Description of workpiece points.......................................................................................... 1-20 1.1.1 Workpiece coordinate systems ..................................................................................... 1-20 1.1.2 Definition of workpiece positions ................................................................................... 1-21 1.1.3 Polar coordinates .......................................................................................................... 1-23 1.1.4 Absolute dimension ....................................................................................................... 1-24 1.1.5 Incremental dimension .................................................................................................. 1-25 1.1.6 Plane designations ........................................................................................................ 1-26 1.2 Position of zero points ........................................................................................................ 1-27 1.3 Position of coordinate systems........................................................................................... 1-27 1.3.1 Overview of the various coordinate systems................................................................. 1-27 1.3.2 Machine coordinate system........................................................................................... 1-29 1.3.3 Basic coordinate system ............................................................................................... 1-31 1.3.4 Workpiece coordinate system....................................................................................... 1-32 1.3.5 Frame system ............................................................................................................... 1-32 1.3.6 Assignment of workpiece coordinate system to machine axes..................................... 1-34 1.3.7 Current workpiece coordinate system........................................................................... 1-34 1.4 Axes.................................................................................................................................... 1-35 1.4.1 Main axes/Geometry axes............................................................................................. 1-36 1.4.2 Special axes .................................................................................................................. 1-37 1.4.3 Main spindle, master spindle......................................................................................... 1-37 1.4.4 Machine axes ................................................................................................................ 1-37 1.4.5 Channel axes ................................................................................................................ 1-37 1.4.6 Path axes ...................................................................................................................... 1-38 1.4.7 Positioning axes ............................................................................................................ 1-38 1.4.8 Synchronized axes ........................................................................................................ 1-40 1.4.9 Command axes ............................................................................................................. 1-40 1.4.10 PLC axes..................................................................................................................... 1-40 1.4.11 Link axes (SW 5 and later).......................................................................................... 1-41 1.5 Coordinate systems and workpiece machining .................................................................. 1-43

Fundamental Principles of NC Programming

2.1 Structure and contents of an NC program ......................................................................... 2-46 2.2 Language elements of the programming language............................................................ 2-47 2.3 Programming a sample workpiece..................................................................................... 2-69 2.4 First programming example for milling application............................................................. 2-71 2.5 Second programming example for milling application........................................................ 2-72

0-5

Contents

08.99

2.6 Programming example for turning application .................................................................... 2-75

Positional Data
3.1 General information ............................................................................................................ 3-78 3.2 Absolute/incremental dimensions, G90/G91 ...................................................................... 3-79 3.2.1 G91 extension (SW 4.3 and higher) .............................................................................. 3-82 3.3 Absolute dimensions for rotary axes, DC, ACP, ACN ........................................................ 3-83 3.4 Metric/imperial dimensions, G70/G71/G700/G710............................................................. 3-85 3.5 Settable zero offsets, G54 to G599 .................................................................................... 3-88 3.6 Selecting the working plane, G17 to G19 ........................................................................... 3-92 3.7 Programmable working area limitation, G25/G26............................................................... 3-95 3.8 Reference point approach, G74 ......................................................................................... 3-98

Programming Motion Commands

4.1 General information .......................................................................................................... 4-102 4.2 Traversing commands with polar coordinates, G110, G111, G112, AP, RP.................... 4-104 4.3 Rapid traverse movement, G0.......................................................................................... 4-108 4.4 Linear interpolation, G1 .................................................................................................... 4-110 4.5 Circular interpolation, G2/G3, CIP .................................................................................... 4-113 4.6 Helical interpolation, G2/G3, TURN.................................................................................. 4-126 4.7 Contour definitions............................................................................................................ 4-128 4.7.1 Straight line with angle................................................................................................. 4-128 4.7.2 Two straight lines......................................................................................................... 4-129 4.7.3 Three straight lines ...................................................................................................... 4-130 4.7.4 End point programming with an angle ......................................................................... 4-131 4.8 Thread cutting with constant lead, G33 ............................................................................ 4-132 4.8.1 Programmable run-in and run-out paths (SW 5 and higher) ....................................... 4-137 4.9 Rigid tapping, G331, G332 ............................................................................................... 4-140 4.10 Tapping with compensating chuck, G63......................................................................... 4-142 4.11 Stop during thread cutting............................................................................................... 4-144 4.12 Approaching a fixed point, G75 ...................................................................................... 4-147 4.13 Travel to fixed stop ......................................................................................................... 4-149 4.14 Special turning functions................................................................................................. 4-153 4.14.1 Position of workpiece................................................................................................. 4-153 4.14.2 Dimensions for: radius, diameter............................................................................... 4-154

0-6

08.99

Contents

4.15 Chamfer, rounding.......................................................................................................... 4-156

Path Action
5.1 Exact stop, G60, G9, G601, G602, G603........................................................................ 5-162 5.2 Continuous-path mode, G64, G641 ................................................................................. 5-164 5.3 Acceleration pattern, BRISK, SOFT, DRIVE .................................................................... 5-170 5.4 Overview of the various velocity controls ......................................................................... 5-172 5.5 Traversing with feedforward control, FFWON, FFWOF................................................... 5-173 5.6 Programmable contour accuracy, CPRECON, CPRECOF.............................................. 5-174 5.7 Dwell time, G4 .................................................................................................................. 5-175 5.8 Program sequence: Internal preprocessor stop ............................................................... 5-176

Frames
6.1 General............................................................................................................................. 6-178 6.2 Frame instructions............................................................................................................ 6-179 6.3 Programmable zero offset ................................................................................................ 6-181 6.3.1 TRANS, ATRANS........................................................................................................ 6-181 6.3.2 G58, G59: Axial programmable ZO (SW 5 and later) ................................................. 6-184 6.4 Programmable rotation, ROT, AROT ............................................................................... 6-187 6.5 Programmable scale factor, SCALE, ASCALE ................................................................ 6-194 6.6 Programmable mirroring, MIRROR, AMIRROR............................................................... 6-197 6.7 Frame generation according to tool orientation, TOFRAME ............................................ 6-201 6.8 Deselecting the frame ...................................................................................................... 6-202

Feedrate Control and Spindle Motion

0-7

Contents

08.99

7.10 Percentage acceleration correction: ACC (option) ......................................................... 7-232 7.11 Feedrate optimization for curved path sections, CFTCP, CFC, CFIN ............................ 7-233 7.12 Spindle speed S, direction of spindle rotation M3, M4, M5............................................. 7-236 7.13 Constant cutting rate, G96, G97, LIMS........................................................................... 7-239 7.14 Constant grinding wheel peripheral speed, GWPSON, GWPSOF................................. 7-241 7.15 Constant workpiece speed for centerless grinding, CLGON, CLGOF ........................... 7-244 7.16 Programmable spindle speed limitation, G25, G26 ........................................................ 7-246 7.17 Several feedrates in one block: F.., FMA.. .................................................................... 7-247

Tool Offsets
8.1 General information .......................................................................................................... 8-252 8.2 List of tool types................................................................................................................ 8-255 8.3 Tool number T .................................................................................................................. 8-259 8.3.1 Turning machine with circular magazine ..................................................................... 8-260 8.3.2 Milling machine with chain magazine .......................................................................... 8-261 8.4 Tool offset number D ........................................................................................................ 8-263 8.4.1 Turning machine with circular magazine ..................................................................... 8-263 8.4.2 Milling machine with chain magazine .......................................................................... 8-266 8.5 Free D number allocation, tool edge number CE (SW 5 and higher)............................... 8-270 8.5.1 Check D number (CHKDNO) ...................................................................................... 8-271 8.5.2 Re-assigning D numbers (GETDNO, SETDNO)......................................................... 8-272 8.5.3 Determine the T number of a defined D number (GETACTTD).................................. 8-273 8.5.4 Invalidate D numbers................................................................................................... 8-274 8.6 Additive offsets (SW 5 and higher) ................................................................................... 8-275 8.6.1 Select offset (by DL number)....................................................................................... 8-275 8.6.2 Define wear and setup values ..................................................................................... 8-276 8.6.3 Delete additive offsets (DELDL) .................................................................................. 8-278 8.7 Tool offset special features (SW 5 and higher) ............................................................. 8-279 8.7.1 Mirroring of tool lengths ............................................................................................... 8-280 8.7.2 Wear sign evaluation ................................................................................................... 8-280 8.7.3 Tool length and plane change ..................................................................................... 8-282 8.8 Tools with a relevant tool point direction (SW 5 and higher) ............................................ 8-285 8.9 Tool radius compensation, G40, G41, G42 ...................................................................... 8-287 8.10 Approach and retract from contour, NORM, KONT, G450, G451 .................................. 8-295 8.11 Compensation at outside corners, G450, G451 ............................................................. 8-298 8.12 Smooth approach and retraction .................................................................................... 8-301

0-8

08.99

Contents

8.13 Collision monitoring, CDON, CDOF ............................................................................... 8-309 8.14 2 1/2 D tool offset, CUT2D, CUT2DF............................................................................. 8-311 8.15 Extension of approach/retraction strategy,G461/G462 (SW 5 and later)....................... 8-313 8.16 Tool length compensation for orientable tools, TCARR, TCOABS, TCOFR.................. 8-317 8.17 Grinding-specific tool monitoring in part program TMON, TMOF .................................. 8-320 8.18 Make active tool offset operative immediately................................................................ 8-322

Special Functions
9.1 Auxiliary function outputs.................................................................................................. 9-324 9.1.1 M functions .................................................................................................................. 9-329 9.1.2 H functions .................................................................................................................. 9-332

Arithmetic Parameters and Program Jumps

10.1 Arithmetic parameters R............................................................................................... 10-334 10.2 Unconditional program jumps....................................................................................... 10-337 10.3 Conditional program jumps .......................................................................................... 10-339

Subprograms and Repetition of Program Sections

11.1 Use of subprograms ..................................................................................................... 11-342 11.2 Subprogram, call .......................................................................................................... 11-345 11.3 Subprogram with program repetition ............................................................................ 11-347 11.4 Program section repetition (SW 4.3 and later) ............................................................. 11-348

Tables
12.1 List of statements ......................................................................................................... 12-358 12.2 List of addresses .......................................................................................................... 12-372 12.2.1 Address letters ........................................................................................................ 12-372 12.2.2 Fixed addresses ...................................................................................................... 12-373 12.2.3 Fixed addresses with axis extension....................................................................... 12-374 12.2.4 Settable addresses.................................................................................................. 12-376 12.3 List of G functions/preparatory functions...................................................................... 12-380 12.4 List of predefined subprograms.................................................................................... 12-390 12.4.1 Predefined subprogram calls .................................................................................. 12-390 12.4.2 Predefined subprogram calls in motion-synchronous actions................................. 12-400 12.4.3 Predefined functions................................................................................................ 12-401 12.4.4 Data types ............................................................................................................... 12-404

0-9

Contents

08.99

Appendix
A Abbreviations.......................................................................................................................A-407 B Terms ..................................................................................................................................A-415 C References..........................................................................................................................A-441 D Index ...................................................................................................................................A-453 E Commands, Identifiers ........................................................................................................A-461

0-10

08.99

Preface

Structure of the manual

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Preface
Overview of documentation
The SINUMERIK documentation is divided into 3 categories: General Documentation User Documentation Manufacturer/Service Documentation

Target group
This manual is aimed at machine tool users. It contains all the necessary information on how to program SINUMERIK 840D/810D or SINUMERIK FM-NC controls.

Standard scope
This Programming Guide describes the functionality of the standard delivery scope. For information on the options or changes made by machine manufacturers, please refer the manuals provided by the respective machine manufacturers. Please contact your local Siemens dealer for more detailed information on other publications relating to the SINUMERIK 840D/810D or SINUMERIK FM-NC, as well as publications valid for all SINUMERIK controls (e.g. Universal Interface, Measuring Cycles, etc.). Other functions not described in this documentation might be executable in the control. This does not, however, represent an obligation to supply such functions with a new control or when servicing.

0-11

Preface

08.99

Structure of the manual

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Validity
This Programming Guide is valid for the following controls: SINUMERIK 840D SW5 SINUMERIK 840DE (export version) SW5 SINUMERIK 810D SW3 SINUMERIK 810DE (export version) SW3 SINUMERIK FM-NC SW3 with operator panels MMC 100.2 or MMC 102/103.

Export version
The following functions are not contained in the export version: Function 5-axis machining package Transformation handling package (5 axes) Multiple-axis interpolation (> 4 axes) Helical interpolation 2D+6 Synchronized actions level 2 Measuring level 2 Adaptive control Continuous dressing Use of compiling cycles (OEM) Multi-dimensional beam sag compensation FM-NC 810DE Function not possible 1) Restricted functionality 840DE O1) O1) O1) O1) O1)

0-12

08.99

Preface

Structure of the manual

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Fundamentals This "Fundamentals" programming guide is intended for the skilled machine operator with the appropriate expertise in drilling, milling and turning operations. Simply programming examples are used to explain the commands and statements which are also known according to DIN66025. Advanced The "Advanced" programming guide is intended for technicians with in-depth, comprehensive programming knowledge. SINUMERIK 840D/810D enables programming of complex part programs using a special programming language (e.g. sculptured surfaces, channel coordination, etc.) and considerably facilitates complex programming. The commands and statements which are described in this Programming Guide are technology-independent. They can be used, for example, for: Grinding Cyclic machines (packaging, woodworking) Laser power control

0-13

Preface

08.99

Structure of the manual

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Structure of the descriptions

All cycles and programming possibilities were - in so far as relevant and feasible - described using the same inner structure. Structuring the information in different levels provides quick, direct access to the information you need.

1. A quick overview
If you want to look up a rarely used command or the meaning of a parameter, you can see at a glance how the function is programmed and find the explanations of the commands and parameters. This information is always at the beginning of the page Note: It is not possible to show all of the representations types which can be used in a programming language for the individual commands and parameters; this would be too lengthy. Therefore, we have chosen to show the most commonly encountered way of programming the commands.

Drilling cycles and drilling patterns

03.96

2.1 Drilling cycles

2.1.2 Drilling, centering CYCLE81 Programming

CYCLE81 (RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP) RTP RFP SDIS DP DPR real real real real real Retraction plane (absolute) Reference plane (absolute) Safety clearance (enter without sign) Final drilling depth (absolute) Final drilling depth relative to reference plane (enter without sign)

Function
The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed and feedrate to the programmed final drilling depth.

Operating sequence
Position reached before the beginning of the cycle: The drilling position is the position in the two axes of the selected plane. The cycle implements the following motion sequence: Approach of the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance with G0 Travel to the final drilling depth at the feedrate programmed in the calling program (G1) Retraction to retraction plane with G0

2-36

0-14

08.99

Preface

Structure of the manual

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

2. Detailed explanations
The theoretical part provides a detailed description of: What is a command needed for? What is the effect of the command? What is the sequence like? What is the effect of the parameters? What else do you have to pay attention to? The theoretic part of the manual is particularly helpful for NC beginners. Go through the manual at least once in order to gain an overview of the functionality and performance features your SINUMERIK control has to offer.

03.96

Drilling cycles and drilling patterns

2.1 Drilling cycles

Explanation of parameters
RFP and RTP Generally, the reference plane (RFP) and the retraction plane (RTP) have different values. In the cycle it is assumed that the retraction plane lies in front of the reference plane. The distance between the retraction plane and the final drilling depth is therefore greater than the distance between the reference plane and the final drilling depth. SDIS The safety clearance (SDIS) refers to the reference plane. which is brought forward by the safety clearance. The direction in which the safety clearance is active is automatically determined by the cycle. DP and DPR The drilling depth can be defined either absolute (DP) or relative (DPR) to the reference plane. If it is entered as an absolute value, the value is traversed directly in the cycle.

Z G1 G0

RTP RFP+SDIS RFP

DP=RFP-DPR

Additional notes
If a value is entered both for the DP and the DPR, the final drilling depth is derived from the DPR. If the DPR deviates from the absolute depth programmed via the DP, the message "Depth: Corresponds to value for relative depth" is output in the dialog line.

2-37

3. From theory to practice

Please refer to the programming examples for information on how to apply the commands in your specific programming context. An application example is provided for almost all of the commands after the theoretical part.

Drilling cycles and drilling patterns

03.96 08.97

2.1 Drilling cycles

If the values for the reference plane and the retraction plane are identical, a relative depth must not be programmed. The error message 61101 "Reference plane incorrectly defined" is output and the cycle is not executed. This error message is also output if the retraction plane lies behind the reference plane, i.e. the distance to the final drilling depth is smaller.

Programming example
Drilling_centering You can use this program to make 3 holes using the drilling cycle CYCLE81, whereby this cycle is called with different parameter settings. The drilling axis is always the Z axis.
Y A 120 Y A-B

30 0 B 40 90 X 35 Z 100 108

N10 G0 G90 F200 S300 M3 N20 D3 T3 Z110 N30 X40 Y120 N40 CYCLE81 (110, 100, 2, 35)

Specification of the technology values Traverse to retraction plane Traverse to first drilling position Cycle call with absolute final drilling depth, safety clearance and incomplete parameter list Traverse to next drilling position Cycle call without safety clearance Specification of the technology values Traverse to next position Cycle call with relative final drilling depth and safety clearance End of program

N50 Y30 N60 CYCLE81 (110, 102, , 35) N70 G0 G90 F180 S300 M03 N80 X90 N90 CYCLE81 (110, 100, 2, , 65) N100 M30

2-38

0-15

Preface

08.99

Structure of the manual

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Explanation of symbols Operator input sequence

Explanation

Function

Parameters

Programming example

Programming

Additional notes

Cross-references to other documentations and sections Notes and danger

Machine manufacturer (MH n)

n= Number of reference per section which can be referred by the machine manufacturer

Ordering data option

0-16

08.99

Preface

Structure of the manual

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

For your infomation Your SIEMENS 840D/810D or FM-NC had been built in accordance with state-of-the-art technology and established safety standards, practices and regulations. Additional devices Special additional devices and expansions from SIEMENS allow selective expansion of the application field of the SIEMENS controls.

Personnel Only specially trained, authorized and experienced personnel may work on the control. This applies at all times, even for short periods. It is necessary to clearly define the respective responsibilities of the personnel for setting up, operation and maintenance; it is necessary to supervise the compliance thereof.

Actions It must be ascertained that the Instruction Manuals have been read and understood by the persons working on the control before installation and start-up of the control. In addition, operation must be conducted under constant supervision regarding the overall technical state (faults and damages visible from outside, as well as changes in operation behavior) of the control. Service Only qualified personnel specifically trained for this purpose should be allowed to perform repairs, and only in accordance with the contents of the maintenance guides. Hereby, all established safety regulations have to be complied with.

0-17

Preface

08.99

Structure of the manual

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Note The following are considered not compliant with the usage to the intended purposes and are therefore excluded from all liability of the manufacturer: Every usage not complying with or going beyond the abovementioned points. If the control is not operated in a technically faultless state, if proper safety precautions are not taken, or if the instructions in the Instruction Manual are not complied with. If faults which could influence safety of operation are not remedied before installation and start-up of the control. Each change, jumpering or shut-down of devices on the control which serve for proper functioning, universal usage and active and passive safety. Unforeseen dangers can result in: Personal injury and death, damage to the control, machine and other property of the company and operator.

0-18

12.98

Fundamental Geometrical Principles

1-19

Fundamental Geometrical Principles

12.98

1.1 Description of workpiece points

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

1.1

Description of workpiece points

1.1.1 Workpiece coordinate systems

In order for the machine or control to operate with the Milling: specified positions, these data must be made in a reference system that corresponds to the direction of motion of the axis slides. A coordinate system with the axes X, Y and Z is used for this purpose. XDIN 66217 stipulates that machine tools must use right-handed, rectangular (cartesian) coordinate systems. The workpiece zero (W) is the origin of the workpiece coordinate system. Sometimes it is advisable or even necessary to work with negative positional data. Positions to the left of the origin are prefixed by a negative sign ().

Z+ Y+
90

W Y-

X+

Z-

Turning:
Y+ Z90

X+

W X-

Z+ Y-

1-20

12.98

Fundamental Geometrical Principles

1.1 Description of workpiece points

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

1.1.2 Definition of workpiece positions

To specify a position, imagine that a ruler is placed along the coordinate axes. You can now describe every point in the coordinate system by specifying the direction (X, Y and Z) and three numerical values. The workpiece zero always has the coordinates X0, Y0 and Z0. Example: For the sake of simplicity, we will only use one plane of the coordinate system in this example, i.e. the X/Y plane. Points P1 to P4 then have the following coordinates: P1 P2 P3 P4 corresponds to corresponds to corresponds to corresponds to X100 Y50 X-50 Y100 X-105 Y-115 X70 Y-75
X115 75

Y+ P2
100 50

100

P1
50

X+

105

Y-

One plane is sufficient to describe the contour on a turning machine. Example: Points P1 to P4 are defined by the following coordinates: P1 P2 P3 P4 corresponds to corresponds to corresponds to corresponds to X25 X40 X40 X60 Z-7.5 Z-15 Z-25 Z-35
35

P4 P3 P2
60 25 40 Z

7.5 15 25

1-21

Fundamental Geometrical Principles

12.98

1.1 Description of workpiece points

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Example: Points P1 and P2 are defined by the following coordinates: P1 P2 corresponds to X-20 Y-20 Z23 corresponds to X13 Y-13 Z27

X+

P2 P2 13 Y+ Z+

P1 P1

P1 13 20 23 27

The infeed depth must also be described in milling operations. To do this, we need to specify a numerical value for the third coordinate (Z in this case). Example: Points P1 to P3 are defined by the following coordinates: P1 P2 P3 corresponds to X10 Y45 Z-5 corresponds to X30 Y60 Z-20 corresponds to X45 Y20 Z-15

Y+

P2 P1 60

P1 45 P3 20

P3 X+ Z+ 5 15 20

30 45

1-22

12.98

Fundamental Geometrical Principles

1.1 Description of workpiece points

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

1.1.3 Polar coordinates

The coordinates used up to this point to specify points in the coordinate system are called "Cartesian coordinates". However, there is another way to specify coordinates, namely as "polar coordinates". Polar coordinates are used whenever a workpiece or part of a workpiece is measured with radius and angle. The point from which the measurement starts is called the "pole". Example: The points P1 and P2 can then be described with reference to the pole as follows: P1 corresponds to radius =100 plus angle =30 P2 corresponds to radius =60 plus angle =75
Y

P2 P1
60

0 10

Pole 30

X 15

1-23

Fundamental Geometrical Principles

12.98

1.1 Description of workpiece points

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

1.1.4 Absolute dimension

With absolute dimensions, all the positional parameters refer to the currently valid origin. Applied to tool movement this means: The absolute dimensions describe the position to which the tool is to travel.
P1
Y

Example for milling: The positional parameters for points P1 to P3 in absolute dimensions referring to the origin are the following: X20 Y35 P1 corresponds to X50 Y60 P2 corresponds to X70 Y20 P3 corresponds to

P3
35 20

X 20 50 70

25 40

Example for turning: The positional parameters for points P1 to P4 in absolute dimensions referring to the origin are the following: X25 Z-7,5 P1 corresponds to X40 Z-15 P2 corresponds to X40 Z-25 P3 corresponds to X60 Z-35 P4 corresponds to

P4 P3 P2
60 Z

7.5 15 25 35

1-24

12.98

Fundamental Geometrical Principles

1.1 Description of workpiece points

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

1.1.5 Incremental dimension

Production drawings are frequently encountered, however, where the dimensions refer not to the origin, but to another point on the workpiece. In order to avoid having to convert such dimensions, it is possible to specify them in incremental dimensions. Incremental dimensions refer to the positional data for the previous point. Applied to tool movement this means: The incremental dimensions describe the distance the tool is to travel. Example for milling: The positional data for points P1 to P3 in incremental dimensions are: P1 corresponds to X20 Y35 ;(with reference to the zero point) P2 corresponds to X30 Y20 ;(with reference to P1) P3 corresponds to X20 Y-35 ;(with reference to P2)
20

P1
15

X 20 30 20

Example for turning: The positional data for points P1 to P3 in incremental dimensions are: G90 P1 corresponds to X25 Z-7,5 ;(with reference to the zero point) G91 P2 corresponds to X15 Z-7,5 ;(with reference to P1) G91 P3 corresponds to Z-10 ;(with reference to P2) G91 P4 corresponds to X20 Z-10 ;(with reference to P3)

P4 P3 P2
60 25 40 Z 10 10 7.5 7.5

When DIAMOF or DIAM90 is active, the path setpoint is programmed as a radius dimension with G91.

1-25

Fundamental Geometrical Principles

12.98

1.1 Description of workpiece points

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

1.1.6 Plane designations

A plane is defined by means of two coordinate axes. Milling: The third coordinate axis is perpendicular to this plane Z and determines the infeed direction of the tool (e.g. for 2 D machining).

9 G1

When programming, it is necessary to specify the working plane in order that the control can calculate the tool offset values correctly. The plane is also relevant to certain types of circular programming and polar coordinates.

G1 8
G1 7

Turning:
Y

7 G1
G1 9
G1 8

The working planes are specified as follows in the NC program with G17, G18 and G19:

Plane X/Y Z/X Y/Z

Identifier G17 G18 G19

Infeed direction Z Y X

1-26

12.98

Fundamental Geometrical Principles

1.2 Position of zero points

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

1.2

Position of zero points

The various origins and reference positions are defined on the NC machine. They are reference points for the machine to approach and refer to programming the workpiece dimensions. They are: M = Machine zero A = Blocking point. Can coincide with the workpiece zero (turning machines only) W = Workpiece zero = Program zero B = Start point. Can be defined for each program. This is where the 1st tool begins machining. R = Reference point. Position determined by cam and measuring system. The distance to the machine zero M must be known, so that the axis position can be set to exactly this value at this position. The diagrams show the zero points and reference points for turning machines and drilling/milling machines.
M A

X R B

W1 M X

1.3

Position of coordinate systems

1.3.1 Overview of the various coordinate systems

We distinguish between the following coordinate systems: The machine coordinate system with the machine zero M The basic coordinate system (this can also be the workpiece coordinate system W) The workpiece coordinate system with the workpiece zero W The current workpiece coordinate system with the current offset workpiece zero Wa

1-27

Fundamental Geometrical Principles

12.98

1.3 Position of coordinate systems

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

In cases where various different machine coordinate systems are in use (e.g. 5-axis transformation), an internal transformation function mirrors the machine kinematics on the coordinate system currently selected for programming. The individual axis identifiers are explained in the subsection headed "Axis types" in this section.

Zm
Ym

Zw Za Yw Ya

W M
Xm

Y+ M W X+

Z+

1-28

12.98

Fundamental Geometrical Principles

1.3 Position of coordinate systems

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

1.3.2 Machine coordinate system

The machine coordinate system comprises all the physically existing machine axes. Reference points and tool and pallet changing points (fixed machine points) are defined in the machine coordinate system. Where the machine coordinate system is used for programming (this is possible with some of the G functions), the physical axes of the machine are addressed directly. No allowance is made for workpiece clamping.
Zm Ym

The location of the coordinate system relative to the machine depends on the machine type. The axis directions follow the so-called "three-finger rule" of the right hand (in accordance with DIN 66217). Standing in front of the machine, the middle finger of the right hand points away from the infeed direction of the main spindle. The following then applies: The thumb points in the +X direction The index finger points in the +Y direction The middle finger points in the +Z direction

In practice, this can look quite different on different types of machine. The following are examples of machine coordinate systems for various machines.

1-29

Fundamental Geometrical Principles

12.98

1.3 Position of coordinate systems

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

+Z -B -Y -Y C+ C+X

Y+ X+ +Z Z+

B+ B- +A -A
+Y

1-30

12.98

Fundamental Geometrical Principles

1.3 Position of coordinate systems

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

1.3.3 Basic coordinate system

The basic coordinate system is a Cartesian coordinate system, which is mirrored by kinematic transformation (for example, 5-axis transformation or by using Transmit with peripheral surfaces) onto the machine coordinate system. If there is no kinematic transformation, the basic coordinate system differs from the machine coordinate system only in terms of the axes designations. The activation of a transformation can produce deviations in the parallel orientation of the axes. The coordinate system does not have to be at a right angle. Zero offset, scaling, etc. are always executed in the basic coordinate system. The coordinates also refer to the basic coordinate system when specifying the working field limitation.
Basic coordinate system for face end Workpiece coordinate system for turning plane

Y
Basic coordinate system for peripheral surface

YMCS

YBCS

YBZS

YSZS

YWCS XWCS

WCS

Programmable FRAME EZS G54...G599 settable FRAMES XBNS XSZS

BZS Base offset (base frame)

DRF shift, external zero offset BCS Kinematic transformation MCS MCS = Machine coordinate system BZS = Basic zero system WCS = Workpiece coordinate system XMCS XBCS

BCS = Basic coordinate system SZS = Settable zero system

1-31

Fundamental Geometrical Principles

12.98

1.3 Position of coordinate systems

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

1.3.4 Workpiece coordinate system

The geometry of a workpiece is described in the workpiece coordinate system. In other words, the data in the NC program refer to the workpiece coordinate system. The workpiece coordinate system is always a Cartesian coordinate system and assigned to a specific workpiece.
Z Y

1.3.5 Frame system

The frame is a self-contained arithmetic rule that transforms one Cartesian coordinate system into another Cartesian coordinate system. It is a: Spatial description of the workpiece coordinate system The following components are available within a frame: Zero offset Rotate Mirror Scale
X0 Z1=Z2 Rotation around the Z axis Y1 Y2

Ze ro

of fs et

X1 X2

These components can be used individually or in any combination.

1-32

12.98

Fundamental Geometrical Principles

1.3 Position of coordinate systems

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Mirroring of the Z axis

X X

Z M W

Z W1 M1

Zero offset

One way of machining inclined contours is to use appropriate fixtures to align the workpiece parallel to the machine axes.

Y Z

Z Y

Another way is to generate a coordinate system which is oriented to the workpiece. The coordinate system can be moved and/or rotated with programmable frames. This enables you to Move the zero point to any position on the workpiece Align the coordinate axes parallel to the desired working plane by rotation And thus machine surface clamped in inclined positions, produce drill holes at different angles. Perform multiside machining operations.

Z0 Y1 Z1 Y0

1-33

Fundamental Geometrical Principles

12.98

1.3 Position of coordinate systems

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Working plane, tool offsets The conventions for the working plane and the tool offsets must be observed in accordance with the machine kinematics for machining operations in inclined working planes. For further information, please see Section 3.6 "Selection of working plane, G17 to G19".

1.3.6 Assignment of workpiece coordinate system to machine axes

The location of the workpiece coordinate system in relation to the basic coordinate system (or machine coordinate system) is determined by settable frames. The settable frames are activated in the NC program by means of commands such as G54.

1.3.7 Current workpiece coordinate system

Sometimes it is advisable or necessary to reposition and to rotate, mirror and/or scale the originally selected workpiece zero within a program. The programmable frames can be used to reposition (rotate, mirror and/or scale) the current zero point at a suitable point in the workpiece coordinate system. Several zero offsets are possible in the same program.
Current workpiece coordinate system Z2 Frame 2 Y1 YB Frame 1 Y2 X2

Z1 ZB XB

X1 Workpiece coordinate system

Frame 1...settable offset and rotation Frame 2...programmable offset and rotation

1-34

12.98

Fundamental Geometrical Principles

1.4 Axes

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

1.4

Axes
A distinction is made between the following types of axis when programming: Machine axes Channel axes Geometry axes Special axes Path axes Synchronized axes Positioning axes Command axes (motion-synchronized axes) PLC axes Link axes

Geometry, synchronized and positioning axes are programmed.

Geometry axes Positioning axes

Path axes traverse with feedrate F in accordance with the programmed travel commands. Synchronized axes traverse synchronously to path axes and take the same time to traverse as all path axes. Positioning axes traverse asynchronously to all other axes. These traversing movements take place independently of path and synchronized movements. Command axes traverse asynchronously to all other axes. These traversing movements take place independently of path and synchronized movements. PLC axes are controlled by the PLC and can traverse asynchronously to all other axes. The traversing movements take place independently of path and synchronized movements.

Machine axes

1-35

Fundamental Geometrical Principles

12.98

1.4 Axes

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

1.4.1 Main axes/Geometry axes

The main axes define a right-angled, right-handed coordinate system. Tool movements are programmed in this coordinate system.
Tools

Turret swivel axis

Additional spindle

In NC technology, the main axes are called geometry axes. This is the term used in this Programming Guide. For turning machines: Geometry axes X and Z are used, and sometimes Y For milling machines: Geometry axes X, Y and Z are used

Z
TailGeometry stock axes

Special axis

Main spindle (master spindle) C axis

A maximum of three geometry axes are used for programming frames and the workpiece geometry (contour). Identifiers: X, Y, Z The identifiers for geometry and channel axes can be the same, as long as mirroring is possible.

Geometry axis and channel axis names can be the same in any channel in order that the same programs can be executed. The "Switchable geometry axes" function (see Advanced) can be used to alter the geometry axes grouping configured by machine data. Here any geometry axis can be replaced by a channel axis defined as a synchronous special axis.

1-36

12.98

Fundamental Geometrical Principles

1.4 Axes

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

1.4.2 Special axes

In contrast to the geometry axes, no geometrical relationship is defined between the special axes. Example: Turret position U, tailstock V

1.4.3 Main spindle, master spindle

The machine kinematics determine which spindle is the main spindle. This spindle is declared the master spindle in the machine data. As a rule, the main spindle is declared the master spindle. This assignment can be changed with the program command SETMS (spindle number) (see Section 7). Special functions such as thread cutting apply to the master spindle. Identifiers: S or S0

1.4.4 Machine axes

The axis identifiers can be set in the machine data. Standard identifiers: X1, Y1, Z1, A1, B1, C1, U1, V1 There are also standard axis identifiers that can always be used: AX1, AX2, , AXn

1.4.5 Channel axes

All axes which traverse in a channel. Identifiers: X, Y, Z, A, B, C, U, V

1-37

Fundamental Geometrical Principles

12.98

1.4 Axes

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

1.4.6 Path axes

Path axes define the path and therefore the movement of the tool in space. The programmed feedrate is active for this path. The axes involved in this motion reach their position at the same time. As a rule, these are the geometry axes. However, default settings define which axes are the path axes and therefore determine the velocity. Path axes can be specified in the NC program with FGROUP (see Section 5).

1.4.7 Positioning axes

Positioning axes are interpolated separately, i.e. each positioning axis has its own axis interpolator and its own feedrate. A distinction is made between positioning axes with synchronization at the block end or over several blocks. POS axes: Block change occurs at the end of the block when all the path and positioning axes programmed in this block have reached their programmed end point. POSA axes: The movement of these positioning axes can extend over several blocks. POSP axes: The movement of these positioning axes for approaching the end position takes place in sections. You will find further information on POS, POSA and POSP in the section on "Traversing positioning axes, POS, POSA, POSP.

1-38

12.98

Fundamental Geometrical Principles

1.4 Axes

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Additional notes
Positioning axes become synchronized axes if they are traversed without the special POS/POSA identifier. Continuous-path mode (G64) for path axes is only possible if the positioning axes (POS) reach their final position before the path axes. Path axes that are programmed with POS/POSA are removed from the path axis grouping for the duration of this block. Positioning axes are traversed by the NC program or the PLC. If an axis is to be traversed simultaneously by the NC program and the PLC, an error message appears. Typical positioning axes are: Loaders for workpiece loading Loaders for workpiece unloading Tool magazine/turret

1-39

Fundamental Geometrical Principles

12.98

1.4 Axes

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

1.4.8 Synchronized axes

Synchronized axes traverse synchronously to the path from the start position to the programmed end position. The feedrate programmed in F applies to all the path axes programmed in the block, but does not apply to synchronized axes. Synchronized axes take the same time as the path axes to traverse. A synchronized axis can be a rotary axis which is traversed synchronously to the path interpolation.

1.4.9 Command axes

Command axes are initiated by events (commands) from synchronized actions. They can be positioned, started and stopped fully asynchronous to the part program. An axis cannot be moved from the part program and from synchronized actions simultaneously. Command axes are interpolated separately, i.e. each command axis has its own axis interpolator and its own feedrate.

1.4.10 PLC axes

PLC axes are traversed by the PLC via special function blocks in the basic program; their movements can be asynchronous to all other axes. The traversing movements take place independently of path and synchronized movements.

1-40

12.98

Fundamental Geometrical Principles

1.4 Axes

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

1.4.11 Link axes (SW 5 and later)

Link axes are axes which are physically connected to another NCU and whose position is controlled from this NCU. Link axes can be dynamically assigned to channels of a different NCU. Link axes are not local axes from the perspective of a particular NCU. The dynamic changing of an assignment to an NCU is based on the axis container concept. Axis substitution with GET and RELEASE is not available for link axes from the part program. Preconditions: The participating NCUs, NCU1 and NCU2, must be connected by means of high-speed communication via the link module. References: /PHD/, Configuring Manual NCU 571-573.2, Link Module The axis must be configured appropriately by machine data. The link axis option must be installed.
NCU 1 611D 1 NCU 2 611D 2

Channel 1

Channel 2 A2 B2

Link module (HW)

Link communication

Link module (HW)

Functionality
The position control is implemented on the NCU on which the axis is physically connected to the drive. This NCU also contains the associated axis VDI interface. The position setpoints for link axes are generated on another NCU and communicated via the NCU link.

1-41

Fundamental Geometrical Principles

12.98

1.4 Axes

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

The link communication must provide the means of interaction between the interpolators and the position controller or PLC interface. The setpoints calculated by the interpolators must be transported to the position control loop on the home NCU and, vice versa, the actual values must be returned from there back to the interpolators. For further information about link axes, please refer to References: /FB/ B3, Multiple Operator Panels and NCUs

Axis container (SW 5 and higher) An axis container is a circular buffer data structure in which local axes and/or link axes are assigned to channels. The entries in the circular buffer can be shifted cyclically. In addition to the direct reference to local axes or link axes, the link axis configuration in the logical machine axis image also allows references to axis containers. Such a reference consists of: A container number and A slot (circular buffer location within the container) The entry in a circular buffer location contains: A local axis or a link axis Axis container entries contain local machine axes or link axes from the perspective of an individual NCU. The entries in the logical machine axis image MN_AXCONF_LOGIC_MACHAX_TAB of an individual NCU are fixed. The axis container function is described in References: /FB/ B3, Multiple Operator Panels and NCUs

1-42

12.98

Fundamental Geometrical Principles

1.5 Coordinate systems and workpiece machining

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

1.5

Coordinate systems and workpiece machining

Relationship between the travel commands from workpiece coordinates and the resulting machine movements

Axis movement programmed in the workpiece coordinate system

Description of the workpiece geometry using geometry axes (e.g. X, Y, Z)
Frame calculation: Translation (TRANS) Rotation (ROT) Scaling (SCALE) Description of the tool orientation by orientation vector/Euler angle Remaining traversing instructions using special axes (e.g. C, U, V)

Contour in Cartesian coordinate system of the channel (BCS)

Tool radius compensation

Frame calculation: Translation Scaling

Movement of the tool zeropoint in the BCS

Tool length compensation Kinematic transformation (if active) Rotary axes with 5 axis transformator

Movement of the machine axes of the channel abc

Path calculations The path calculation determines the distance to be traversed in a block, taking into account all offsets and compensations. In general: Distance = setpoint - actual value + zero offset (ZO) + tool offset (TO)

T
TO Setpoint absolute position

Setpoint

absolute position

1-43

Fundamental Geometrical Principles

12.98

1.5 Coordinate systems and workpiece machining

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

If a new zero offset and a new tool offset are programmed in a new data block, the following applies: With absolute dimensioning: Distance = (absolute dimension P2 - absolute dimension P1) + (ZO P2 - ZO P1) + (TO P2 - TO P1). With incremental dimensioning: Distance = incremental dimension + (ZO P2 - ZO P1) + (TO P2 - TO P1).

ZO P2

Abs. dim. (setpoint) for P2

TC P2

ZO P1

Abs. dim. (setpoint) for P 2

TC P1

Distance

Movement

Actual value 1 Actual value 2

1-44

12.98

Fundamental Principles of NC Programming

2-45

Fundamental Principles of NC Programming

12.98

2.1 Structure and contents of an NC program

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

2.1

Structure and contents of an NC program

DIN 66025 is the guideline for designing a part program. An (NC/part) program consists of a sequence of NC blocks (see table below). Each data block represents one machining step. Instructions are written in the blocks in the form of words. The last block in the execution sequence contains a special word for the end of program: M2, M17 or M30. Block Block Block Block Block Block Word N10 N20 N30 N40 N50 Word G0 G2 G91 ... M30 Word X20 Z37 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ;End of program (last block) ;Comment ;1st block ;2nd block ;...

Program names Each program has a different name; the name can be chosen freely during program creation (except for punchtape format), taking the following conditions into account: The first two characters must be letters (or a letter with an underscore character)

Otherwise: letters or numerals _MPF100 or SHAFT or SHAFT_2

Example:

Only the first 24 characters of a program identifier are displayed on the NC.

2-46

12.98

Fundamental Principles of NC Programming

2.2 Language elements of the programming language

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Punchtape format File names: 1. File names can contain the characters 0...9, A...Z, a...z or _ and can be up to 24 characters in length. 2. 3. File names must have a 3-digit identifier Data in punchtape format can be created (_xxx). externally or modified using an editor. The name of a file which is stored internally in the NC memory begins with "_N_". A file in punchtape format begins with %<name>, "%" must appear in the first column of the first line. Examples: %_N_SHAFT123_MPF or %Flange3_MPF

= part program SHAFT123 = part program Flange3

For further information on downloading, creating and storing part programs, please refer to: /BA/, Operator's Guide, in the sections on the "Program" and "Services" user areas.

2.2

Language elements of the programming language

Character set The following characters are available for writing NC programs:

Upper case A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M, N, (O), P, Q, R, S, T, U, V, W, X, Y, Z

Please note: Take care to differentiate between the letter "O" and the numeral "0".

2-47

Fundamental Principles of NC Programming

12.98

2.2 Language elements of the programming language

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Lower case a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h, i, j, k, l, m,n, o, p, q, r, s, t, u, v, w, x, y, z Numerals 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9

No distinction is made between upper and lower case letters.

Special characters %
( ) [ ] < > : = / * + " $ _ ? ! . , ; & LF Tab character

Program start character (used only for writing programs on an external PC) For bracketing parameters or expressions For bracketing parameters or expressions For bracketing addresses or indexes For bracketing addresses or indexes Less than Greater than Main block, label suffix, chain operator Assignment, part of equation Division, block suppression Multiplication Addition Subtraction, minus sign Double quotation marks, identifier for character string Single quotation marks, identifier for special numerical values: hexadecimal, binary System variable identifiers Underscore, belonging to letters Reserved Reserved Decimal point Comma, parameter separator Comment start Format character, same effect as space character Block end Separator

Space character Separator (blank) Non-printable special characters are treated like blanks.

2-48

12.98

Fundamental Principles of NC Programming

2.2 Language elements of the programming language

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Words NC programs are made up of blocks and each block is made up of words. A word in the NC language consists of an address character and a digit or sequence of digits representing an arithmetic value.
Addr. Digits Addr. Digits Addr. Digits

Word

The address character of the word is usually a letter. The sequence of digits can contain a leading sign and decimal point. The leading sign always appears between the address letter and the sequence of digits. The positive leading sign (+) does not have to be specified. Blocks and block format An NC program consists of individual blocks. A block generally consists of (several) words. A block should contain all the data required for performing an operation step and is terminated with the character "LF" (LINE FEED = new line).

G01 X-50 S2000

Block

The "LF" character does not have to be inserted manually, it is generated automatically when you change lines.
Block length A block may contain (up to SW 3.x) a maximum of 242 characters (SW 4 and higher) a maximum of 512 characters (including the comment and end-of-block character "LF").

2-49

Fundamental Principles of NC Programming

12.98

2.2 Language elements of the programming language

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Three blocks of up to 66 characters each are normally displayed in the current block display on the screen. Comments are also displayed. Messages are displayed in a separate message window. Word sequence in blocks In order to keep the block structure as clear as possible, the words in a block should be arranged as follows: Example: N10 G X Y Z F S T D M H

Address N
10 G X,Y,Z F S T D M H

Definition
Address of block number Block number Preparatory function Positional data Feed Speed Tool Tool offset number Miscellaneous function Auxiliary function

Some addresses can be used repeatedly within a block (e.g.: G, M, H). Main block/subblock There are two types of blocks: Main blocks and Subblocks

The main block must contain all the words necessary to start the operation sequence in the program section beginning with the main block.

2-50

12.98

Fundamental Principles of NC Programming

2.2 Language elements of the programming language

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Main blocks can be contained in both main programs and subprograms. The control does not check whether a main block contains all the necessary information. The identification of a block as a main block is used when searching for a main block or performing a search after the last main block. A subblock contains all the information required for each operation step. Block number Main blocks are identified by a main block number. A main block number consists of the character ":" and a positive integer (block number). The block number always appears at the start of a block.

Main block numbers must be unique within a program to achieve an unambiguous result when searching.
Example: :10 D2 F200 S900 M3

Subblocks are identified by a subblock number. A subblock number consists of the character "N" and a positive integer (block number). The block number always appears at the start of a block. Example: N20 G1 X14 Y35 N30 X20 Y40 Subblock numbers must be unique within a program in order to achieve an unambiguous result when searching. The order of the block numbers is arbitrary, however increasing block numbers are recommended. You can also program NC blocks without block numbers.

2-51

Fundamental Principles of NC Programming

12.98

2.2 Language elements of the programming language

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Addresses Addresses are fixed or variable identifiers for axes (X, Y, ...) spindle speed (S), feed (F), circle radius (CR), etc. Example: N10 X100

Important addresses

Address A=DC(...) A=ACP(...) A=ACN(...)

ADIS B=DC(...) B=ACP(...) B=ACN(...) C=DC(...) C=ACP(...) C=ACN(...) CHR=... D... F... FA[axis]=... or FA[spindle]=... or [SPI(spindle)]=... G... H... H=QU(...) I... J... K... L... M... M=QU(...) N... OVR=... P...

Meaning (default setting)

Rotary axis

Remark
variable

Rounding clearance for path functions fixed Rotary axis variable

Rotary axis

variable

Chamfer the contour corner Tool edge number Feed Axial feed (only if spindle no. defined by variable) Preparatory function Auxiliary function Auxiliary function without read stop Interpolation parameters Interpolation parameters Interpolation parameters Subprogram call Miscellaneous function Miscellaneous fct. w/o read stop Subblock Path override Number of program passes

fixed fixed fixed fixed

fixed fixed variable variable variable fixed fixed fixed fixed fixed

Address

Meaning (default setting)

Remark

2-52

12.98

Fundamental Principles of NC Programming

2.2 Language elements of the programming language

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

POS[axis]=... POSA[axis]=... SPOS=... SPOS[n]=... SPOSA=... SPOSA[n]=... Q... R0=... to Rn=... R... RND RNDM S... T... U... V... W... X... X=AC(...) X=IC(...) Y... Y=AC(...) Y=IC(...) Z... Z=AC(...) Z=IC(...) AR+=... AP=... CR=... RP=... :...

Positioning axis Spindle position

fixed fixed

Positioning axis across block boundary fixed

Spindle position across block boundary fixed Axis Arithmetic parameter, n can be set via MD (default 0 - 99) Axis (SW 5.1 and higher) Round contour corner Round contour corner (modal) Spindle speed Tool number Axis Axis Axis Axis " " Axis absolute incremental variable variable fixed fixed fixed fixed variable variable variable variable variable fixed

Axis

variable

Aperture angle Polar angle Circle radius Polar radius Main block

variable variable variable variable fixed

"fixed": These address names are available for a specific function.

Machine manufacturer (MH2.1)

"variable": These addresses can be assigned another name via the machine data.

2-53

Fundamental Principles of NC Programming

12.98

2.2 Language elements of the programming language

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Modal/non-modal addresses Modal addresses remain valid with the programmed value (in all subsequent blocks) until a new value is programmed at the same address. Non-modal addresses only apply in the block in which they were programmed. Example: N10 G01 F500 X10 N20 X10 ;Feed is effective until a new value is entered. Addresses with axial extension In addresses with axial extension, an axis name is inserted in square brackets after the address. The axis name assigns the axis. Example: FA[U]=400;

Axis-specific feed for axis U Extended addresses Extended address notation enables a larger number of axes and spindles to be organized in a system. An extended address is composed of a numeric extension or a variable identifier enclosed in square brackets and an arithmetic expression assigned with an "=" sign. Example: X7 X4=20 CR=7.3 S1=470 M3=5

;No "=" required, 7 is a value, but the "=" ;character is also possible here ;Axis X4 ("=" required) ;2 letters ("=" required) ;Speed for 1st spindle 470 rev/min ;Spindle stop for 3rd spindle

2-54

12.98

Fundamental Principles of NC Programming

2.2 Language elements of the programming language

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

The extended address notation is only permitted for the following direct addresses: X, Y, Z, I, J, K S SPOS, SPOSA M H T F Axis addresses Interpolation parameters Spindle speed Spindle position Miscellaneous functions Auxiliary functions Tool number Feed

The number (index) in extended address notation can be substituted by a variable for M, H and S addresses and SPOS and SPOSA. The variable identifier is enclosed in square brackets. Example: S[SPINU]=470 ;Speed for the spindle whose number is stored in the variable SPINU M[SPINU]=3 ;Clockwise rotation for the spindle whose number is stored in the variable SPINU T[SPINU]=7 ;Selection of the tool for the spindle whose number is stored in the variable SPINU

Fixed addresses The following addresses are set permanently:

Address D
F G H L M N P R S T :

Meaning (default setting)

Tool edge number Feed Preparatory function Auxiliary function Subprogram call Special function Subblock Number of program passes Arithmetic parameter Spindle speed Tool number Main block

2-55

Fundamental Principles of NC Programming

12.98

2.2 Language elements of the programming language

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Example for programming: N10 G54 T9 D2 Fixed addresses with axis extension

Address AX
ACC FA FDA FL IP OVRA PO POS POSA Example:

Meaning (Default setting)

Axis value (variable axis programming) Axial acceleration Axial feed Axis feedrate for handwheel override Axial feed limit Interpolation parameter (variable axis programming) Axial override Polynomial coefficient Positioning axis Positioning axis across block boundary N10 POS[X]=100

When programming with the axis extension, the axis to be traversed is enclosed in square brackets.

You will find a complete list of all fixed addresses in the Appendix.
Settable addresses Addresses can be defined either with an address letter (with a numeric extension where appropriate) or with a freely assigned identifier.

Variable addresses must be unique within the control, i.e. the same identifier name may not be used for different address types.

2-56

12.98

Fundamental Principles of NC Programming

2.2 Language elements of the programming language

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

A distinction is made between the following address types: Axis values and end points Interpolation parameters Feeds Approximate positioning criteria Measurements Axis and spindle response

Variable address letters are: A, B, C, E, I, J, K, Q, U, V, W, X, Y, Z The user can change the names of the variable addresses in the machine data. Example: X1, Y30, U2, I25, E25, E1=90, The numeric extension has one or two digits and is always positive.

Address identifier The address notation can be expanded by adding further letters.
Example: CR XPOS

e.g. for circle radius

2-57

Fundamental Principles of NC Programming

12.98

2.2 Language elements of the programming language

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Operators/mathematical functions
+ * / DIV MOD : Sin() COS() TAN() ASIN() ACOS() ATAN2() SQRT() ABS() POT() TRUNC() ROUND() LN() EXP() Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division Caution: (Type INT)/(Type INT)=(Type REAL); e.g. 3/4 = 0.75 Division, for variable type INT and REAL Caution: (Type INT)DIV(Type INT)=(Type INT); e.g. 3 DIV 4 = 0 Modulo division (only type INT) produces remainder of INT division, e.g. 3 MOD 4=3 Chain operator (for FRAME variables) Sine Cosine Tangent Arcsine Arccosine Arctangent2 Square root Absolute number 2nd power (square) Truncate to integer Round to integer Natural logarithm Exponential function

Comparison and logic operators

== <> > < >= <= << AND OR NOT XOR Equal to Not equal to Greater than Less than Greater than or equal to Less than or equal to Concatenation of strings (not for 810D) AND OR Negation Exclusive OR

2-58

12.98

Fundamental Principles of NC Programming

2.2 Language elements of the programming language

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

In arithmetic expressions, the execution order of all the operators can be specified by parentheses, in order to override the normal priority rules. Value assignments Values can be assigned to the addresses. The method of value assignment depends on the type of address identifier. An "=" sign must be inserted between the address identifier and the value if the address identifier consists of more than one letter, or the value consists of more than one constant.

The "="-sign can be omitted if the address identifier is a single letter and the value consists of only one constant. Leading signs are allowed and separators are permitted after the address letter. Examples: X10 X1=10 FGROUP(X1, Y2) AXDATA[X1] AX[X1]=10 X=10*(5+SIN(37.5))

;Value assignment (10) to address X, "="not required ;Value assignment (10) to address (X) with numeric extension (1), "=" required ;Axis names from passed parameters ;Axis name as an index when accessing axis data ;Indirect axis programming ;Value assignment by means of a numeric expression, "=" required

A numeric extension must always be followed by one of the special characters "=", "(", "[")"]", "," or an operator in order to distinguish an address name with numeric extension from an address letter with a value.

2-59

Fundamental Principles of NC Programming

12.98

2.2 Language elements of the programming language

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Identifiers Identifiers can also be used to describe words (in compliance with DIN 66025). The identifiers have the same meaning as the words within an NC block. Identifiers must be unique. Identical identifiers must not be used for different objects. Identifiers can stand for: Variables - System variables - User variables Subprograms Vocabulary words DIN addresses with several letters Jump labels

Structure The identifiers are composed of up to 32 characters. The following characters may be used: Letters Underscores Numerals

The first two characters must be letters or underscores, separators must not be programmed between the individual characters (see the following pages). CMIRROR, CDON Example:

Reserved vocabulary words may not be used as identifiers. Separators are not permitted between the individual characters.
Only a limited number of characters can be displayed on the screen. With the standard display setting, the limits are as follows: Program names: Axis identifiers: Variable identifiers: 24 characters 3 characters 32 characters

2-60

12.98

Fundamental Principles of NC Programming

2.2 Language elements of the programming language

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Rules for allocating identifiers The following rules are provided in order to avoid identifier collisions: All identifiers which begin with "CYCLE or "_ are reserved for SIEMENS cycles. All identifiers which begin with "CCS are reserved for SIEMENS compile cycles. User compile cycles begin with "CC.

We recommend that users select identifier names which either begin with "U (User) or contain the underscore symbol, because these are not used by the system or compile cycles or SIEMENS cycles. Further reserved identifiers The identifier "RL" is reserved for conventional turning machines. All identifiers beginning with "E_ " are reserved for EASYSTEP programming. Variable identifiers In variables used by the system, the first letter is replaced by the "$" character. This character may not be used for user-defined variables. Examples (see Programming Guide "Advanced"): $P_IFRAME, $P_F Leading zeroes are ignored in variables with numeric extensions (i.e. R01 is interpreted as R1). Separators are allowed before a numeric extension.

2-61

Fundamental Principles of NC Programming

12.98

2.2 Language elements of the programming language

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Array identifiers The rules for elementary variables also apply to array identifiers. It is possible to address arithmetic variables as arrays. Example: Data types A variable can contain a numeric value (or several) or a character (or several), e.g. an address letter. The data type permitted for the variable is determined when the variable is defined. The data type for system variables and predefined variables is fixed. Elementary variable types/data types are: R[10]=

Type INT
REAL

Definition
Integers with leading sign point, LONG REAL according to IEEE)

Value range
(231 - 1)

Real numbers (fractions with decimal (10-300 10+300)

BOOL CHAR STRING

Boolean values: TRUE (1) and FALSE (0) 1 ASCII character specified by the code Character string, number of characters in [], maximum of 200 characters

1, 0 0 255 Sequence of values 0 255

AXIS FRAME

Axis names (axis addresses) only Geometrical parameters for translation, rotation, scale and mirror

Any axis identifiers in the channel

Identical elementary types can be combined in arrays. Up to two-dimensional arrays are possible.

2-62

12.98

Fundamental Principles of NC Programming

2.2 Language elements of the programming language

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Constants

Integer constants: Integer with or without leading sign, e.g. for assigning a value to an address
Examples: X100 X-100

;Assignment of the value +100 to address X ;Assignment of the value 100 to address X

Real constants: Real number, e.g. with decimal point, with or without leading sign, e.g. for assigning a value to an address
Example: X10.25 X-10.25 X0.25 X.25 X=-.1EX-3

;Assignment of the value +10.25 to address X ;Assignment of the value 10.25 to address X ;Assignment of the value +0.25 to address X ;Assignment of the value +0.25 to address X without leading "0" ;Assignment of the value 0.1*10-3 to address X

If, in an address which permits decimal point input, more decimal places are specified than actually provided for the address, then they are rounded to fit the number of places provided. X0 cannot be replaced by X. Example: G01 X0 cannot be replaced by G01 X!

2-63

Fundamental Principles of NC Programming

12.98

2.2 Language elements of the programming language

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Hexadecimal constants Constants can also be interpreted in hexadecimal format. The letters "A" to "F" stand for the digits 10 to 15. Hexadecimal constants are enclosed in single quotation marks and start with the letter "H", followed by the value in hexadecimal notation. Separators are allowed between the letters and digits. Example for machine data (see also "Advanced"): $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK='H3C7F'

;Assignment of hexadecimal ;values to machine data

The maximum number of characters is limited by the value range of the integer data type. Binary constants Constants can also be interpreted in binary format. In this case, only the digits "0" and "1" are used. Binary constants are enclosed in single quotation marks and start with the letter "B", followed by the binary value. Separators are allowed between the digits. Example for machine data (see also "Advanced"): $MN_AUXFU_GROUP_SPEC='B10000001'

;Assignment of binary constants to machine data ;Bits 0 and 7 are set

The maximum number of characters is limited by the value range of the integer data type.

2-64

12.98

Fundamental Principles of NC Programming

2.2 Language elements of the programming language

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Program section A program section consists of a main block and several subblocks. Examples: :10 D2 F200 S900 M3 N20 G1 X14 Y35 N30 X20 Y40 N40 Y-10 ... N100 M30 Skipping blocks Blocks which are not to be executed on every program pass can be skipped (e.g. positioning program). Blocks which are to be skipped are marked with an oblique "/" in front of the block number. Several consecutive blocks can also be skipped. The instructions in the skipped blocks are not executed; the program continues with the next block which is not skipped.

N10 ... /N20 ... N30 ... /N40 ... /N50 ... /N60 ... N70 ... N80 ... N90 ... N100 ... N110 ...

Program execution

Examples:

N120

N10 /N20 N30 /N40 N70 SW 5 and higher

;is executed ;skipped ;is executed ;skipped ;is executed

Up to 8 skip levels can be programmed. Only 1 skip level can be specified per NC block: / ... /0 ... /1 N010... /2 N020... ... /7 N100... ;Block is skipped (8th skip level) ;Block is skipped (1st skip level) ;Block is skipped (1st skip level) ;Block is skipped (2nd skip level) ;Block is skipped (3rd skip level)

2-65

Fundamental Principles of NC Programming

12.98

2.2 Language elements of the programming language

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Machine manufacturer (MH2.2)

The number of skip levels that can be used depends on a display MD. Block skipping is activated by an operator action (see /BA/ Operator's Guide, program control menu in Machine operating area) or by the programmable controller. System and user variables can also be used in conditional jumps in order to control program execution. Jump destinations (labels) Labels can be defined to jump within a program. You will find further information in the Programming Guide Advanced. Label names are allocated with at least 2 and up to 32 characters (letters, digits, underscore). The first two characters must be letters or underscores. The label name is followed by a colon (":"). Labels must be unique within a program. Labels always appear at the start of a block. If a program number exists, the label appears after the block number. Comments To make NC programs easier to understand for other users and programmers, it is advisable to insert meaningful comments in the program. Comments are appended to the end of a block and are separated from the program section of the NC block by a semicolon (";").

2-66

12.98

Fundamental Principles of NC Programming

2.2 Language elements of the programming language

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Examples: N10 G1 F100 X10 Y20 or N10 N20 N50

; Comments to explain the NC block ; G&S Co., order no. 12A71 ; Program written by Bob Miller, Dept. TV 4, on 21.11.94 ; Part no. 12, housing for pump type TP23A

Comments are stored and appear in the current block display when the program is running.

Programming messages Messages can be programmed to provide the user with information about the current machining situation during program execution. A message in an NC program is generated when the message text is typed after vocabulary word "MSG" in round parentheses "(") and quotation marks. A message can be cleared by programming "MSG ()". Example: N10 MSG ("Roughing the contour") N20 X Y N N90 MSG () A message text can be up to 124 characters long and is displayed in two lines (2*62 characters). Contents of variables can also be displayed in message texts. Examples: N10 R12=$AA_IW [X] N N90 MSG () ;Clear message from N20 or N20 MSG (Check position of X axis<<$AA_IW[X]<< ) ;Clear message from N10

;Activate message

;Current position of the X axis in R12 N20 MSG (Check position of X axis<<R12<< )

2-67

Fundamental Principles of NC Programming

12.98

2.2 Language elements of the programming language

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Setting alarms You can also set alarms in addition to messages in an NC program. Alarms are displayed in a separate field on the screen display. An alarm is associated with a reaction on the control which depends on the alarm category. Alarms are programmed by writing the vocabulary word "SETAL" followed by the alarm number enclosed in brackets. The valid range for alarm numbers lies between 60 000 and 69 999, whereby 60 000 to 64 999 are reserved for SIEMENS cycles and 65 000 to 69 999 are available to the user.

Alarms are always programmed in a separate block. Example: N100 SETAL (65000) You will find a list of reactions associated with specific alarms in the Installation and Start-up Guide. The alarm text must be configured in the MMC.

;Set alarm no. 65000

2-68

12.98

Fundamental Principles of NC Programming

2.3 Programming a sample workpiece

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

2.3

Programming a sample workpiece

Planning the machining sequence The actual programming of the individual operation steps in the NC language generally only represents a small proportion of the work in the development of an NC program. Programming of the actual instructions should be preceded by the planning and preparation of the operation steps. And the more accurately you consider how the NC program is to be structured and organized, the faster and easier it will be to produce a complete program which is clear and free of errors. Clearly structured programs are a particular advantage if you need to make changes at a later date. Since different parts do not all look the same, it is naturally inadvisable to develop every program according to the same method. However, certain procedures apply in most cases and these are presented on the following pages in the form of a checklist.

2-69

Fundamental Principles of NC Programming

12.98

2.3 Programming a sample workpiece

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

1. Prepare the workpiece drawing Define the workpiece zero Sketch in the coordinate system Calculate any missing coordinates 2. Define machining sequence What tools are used when and to machine which contour? In what order are the individual elements of the workpiece manufactured? Which individual elements are repeated (or also rotated) and should therefore be stored in a subprogram? Do these or similar contour sections already exist in other part programs or subprograms which could be used here? Where is it advisable or necessary to perform zero offset, rotation, mirroring or scaling (frame concept)? 3. Create a machining plan Define all the machining processes in steps, e.g.: Rapid traverse movements for positioning Tool change Tool retraction for recalibration Switching the spindle and coolant on and off Calling tool data Infeed Path correction Approach contour Retract from contour etc. 4. Translate the work steps into the programming language Enter each individual step in an NC block or blocks 5. Combine all the individual steps in a program

2-70

12.98

Fundamental Principles of NC Programming

2.4 First programming example for milling application

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

2.4

First programming example for milling application

Please proceed on the NC as described below to verify the following programming example (see Operator's Guide): Create a new part program (name) Edit part program Select part program Activate single block Start part program

Alarms can occur during program verification. These alarms have to be reset first.

Machine manufacturer (MH2.3)

The MD settings must be defined correctly before the program can run on the machine. References: /FB/ K2, "Axes, Coordinate Systems,.." Programming example _MILL1_MPF
N10 MSG(THIS IS MY NC PROGRAM)

; Sample program ; MSG = Message output in an alarm line ;Feed, spindle, tool, ;tool offset, spindle clockwise ;Rapid traverse to position ;Rectangle with feed, straight line in X ;Straight line in Y ;Straight line in X ;Straight line in Y ;Return rapid traverse movement ;End of block

:10 N20 N30 N40 N50 N60 N70 N100

F200 S900 T1 D2 M3 G0 X100 Y100 G1 X150 Y120 X100 Y100 G0 X0 Y0 M30

2-71

Fundamental Principles of NC Programming

12.98

2.5 Second programming example for milling application

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

2.5

Second programming example for milling application

This programming example contains surface and side milling, as well as drilling. The workpiece is intended for machining on a vertical milling machine. The dimensions are in inches.

Machine manufacturer (MH2.4)

The MD settings must be defined correctly before the program can run on the machine. References: /FB/ K2, "Axes, Coordinate Systems,.." Programming example %_N_RAISED_BOSS_MPF N005 N010 N015 N020 N025 N030 N035 N040 N045 N050 N055 N060 N065 N070 N075 N080 N085 N090 N095 N100 N105 MSG ("Traverse axes to tool change location") START01:SUPA G0 G70 Z0 D0 SUPA X0 Y0 MSG ("Tool change active") T1 M6 MSG () G0 G54 X-2 Y.6 S800 M3 M8 Z1 D1 G1 Z0 F50 X8 F25 G0 Y3.5 G1 X-2 SUPA G0 Z0 D0 M5 M9 T2 M6 G0 X-1 Y.25 S1200 M3 M8 Z1 D1 G1 Z-.5 F50 G42 X.5 F30 X5.5 RNDM=-.375 Y3.625 ; modal rounding. Radius=0.375 ; d = 1 inch face cutter ; d = 3 inch face cutter ; clears the message from block N020

;********************Tool change********************

MSG ("Face milling Z=0 workpiece surface")

;Tool change MSG ("Side machining")

2-72

12.98

Fundamental Principles of NC Programming

2.5 Second programming example for milling application

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

N110 N115 N120 N125 N130 N135 N140

X.5 Y.25 X=IC(.375) RNDM=0 G40 G0 Y-1 M5 M9 Z1 X-1 Y0 Z-.25 ; required for edge rounding ; rapid traverse to delete position

,********************Continue to use 1-inch mill**************** MSG ("Side Cut Top Boss") N145 N150 N155 N160 N165 N170 N175 N180 N185 N190 N195 N200 N205 N210 N215 N220 N221 N225 N230 G01 G41 X1 Y2 G2 X1.5476 Y3.375 CR=2 G3 X4.4524 CR=3 G2 Y.625 CR=2 G3 X1.5476 CR=3 G2 X1 Y2 CR=2 G0 G40 X0 SUPA G0 Z0 D0 M5 M9 SUPA X0 Y0 T3 M6 G0 X1.75 Y2 S1500 M3 M8 Z1 D1 MCALL CYCLE81 (1,0,.1,-.5,) X3 X4.25 MCALL SUPA Z0 D0 M5 M9 SUPA X0 Y0 M30 ; end of program ; Delete modal call. Z axis traverses to machine zero ; drill first hole ; drill second hole ; drill third hole ; Z approaches tool change location ; X and Y to the tool change location ; 27/64 drill ; approach first drill hole

;Tool change MSG ("Drill 3 holes")

MSG ()

2-73

Fundamental Principles of NC Programming

12.98

2.5 Second programming example for milling application

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

6.0 5.0 1.4524 1/2-13 X 1.0 DP

4.0

1.375 1.25 2.0 3.5 2.0 R 0.75 0.25 0.5 3.0 R 0.375 R 0.75 2.5

Dimensions in inches

Dimension drawing of workpiece "The Raised Boss" (not to size).

0.25 0.25

Side view Dimensions in inches

2-74

12.98

Fundamental Principles of NC Programming

2.6 Programming example for turning application

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

2.6

Programming example for turning application

The sample program contains radius programming and tool radius compensation. Programming example %_N_1001_MPF N5 N10 N15 N20 N25 N30 N35 N40 N45 N50 N55 N60 N65 N70 N75 N80 N85 N90 N95 N100 N105 N110 N115 N120 N125 N130 N135 G0 G53 X280 Z380 D0 TRANS X0 Z250 LIMS=4000 G96 S250 M3 G90 T1 D1 M8 G0 G42 X-1.5 Z1 G1 X0 Z0 F0.25 G3 X16 Z-4 I0 K-10 G1 Z-12 G2 X22 Z-15 CR=3 G1 X24 G3 X30 Z-18 I0 K-3 G1 Z-20 X35 Z-40 Z-57 G2 X41 Z-60 CR=3 G1 X46 X52 Z-63 G0 G40 G97 X100 Z50 M9 T2 D2 G96 S210 M3 G0 G42 X50 Z-60 M8 G1 Z-70 F0.12 G2 X50 Z-80 I6.245 K-5 G0 G40 X100 Z50 M9 G0 G53 X280 Z380 D0 M5 M30 ;Deselect tool radius compensation and approach tool change location ;Call up tool and select offset ;Select constant cutting speed ;Activate tool with tool radius compensation ;Rotate diameter 50 ;Rotate radius 8 ;Retract tool and deselect tool radius compensation ;Move to tool change location ;End of program ;Rotate radius 3 ;Rotate radius 3 ;Rotate radius 3 ;Rotate radius 10 ;Program name ;Start point ;Zero offset ;Speed limitation (G96) ;Select constant feed ;Select tool and offset ;Activate tool with tool radius compensation

2-75

Fundamental Principles of NC Programming

12.98

2.6 Programming example for turning application

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

45
X R8 R3 R3 R10 16 30 35 50 Z R3

4 12 15 18 20 40 57 60 62 70 80

Machine manufacturer (MH2.5)

The MD settings must be defined correctly before the program can run on the machine. References: /FB/ K2, "Axes, Coordinate Systems,.."

2-76

12.98

Positional Data

Positional Data
3.1 General information............................................................................................................ 3-78 3.2 Absolute/incremental dimensions, G90/G91 ...................................................................... 3-79 3.2.1 G91 extension (SW 4.3 and higher).............................................................................. 3-82 3.3 Absolute dimensions for rotary axes, DC, ACP, ACN ........................................................ 3-83 3.4 Metric/imperial dimensions, G70/G71/G700/G710 ............................................................ 3-85 3.5 Settable zero offsets, G54 to G599 .................................................................................... 3-88 3.6 Selecting the working plane, G17 to G19 ........................................................................... 3-92 3.7 Programmable working area limitation, G25/G26 .............................................................. 3-95 3.8 Reference point approach, G74 ......................................................................................... 3-98

3-77

Positional Data

12.98

3.1 General information

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

3.1

General information
In this section you will find a description of the commands that normally appear at the beginning of an NC program. The way in which these functions are combined is not intended to be a patent remedy. For example, the choice of working plane may be made at another point in the NC program. The real purpose of this and all the following sections is to illustrate the conventional structure of an NC program.

3-78

12.98

Positional Data

3.2 Absolute/incremental dimensions, G90/G91

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

3.2

Absolute/incremental dimensions, G90/G91 Programming

Absolute dimensioning G90 X=AC() Y=AC() Z=AC() Incremental dimensioning G91 or X=IC() Y=IC() Z=IC()

Explanation of the parameters

X Y Z =AC =IC Axis identifiers of the axes to be traversed Absolute dimensions (non-modal) Incremental dimensions (non-modal)

Function
The G90/91 commands and the non-modal dimensions AC/IC are used to define the system for describing the approach to setpoints.

Sequence
Y

Incremental dimensions, G91 The dimensions refer to the last point approached. You program how far the tool is to travel. Non-modal absolute or incremental dimensioning AC, IC When G91 is active, AC can be used to allow entry of absolute dimensions for individual axes in a specific block. When G90 is active, IC can be used to allow entry of incremental dimensions for individual axes in a specific block.

85 G90 20

Absolute dimensions, G90 The dimensions refer to the origin of the active coordinate system. You program the point to which the tool is to travel, e.g. in the workpiece coordinate system.

35 G91

X 10 50 G91 60 G90

3-79

Positional Data

12.98

3.2 Absolute/incremental dimensions, G90/G91

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Additional notes
The commands G90 and G91 generally apply to all axes programmed in subsequent NC blocks. Both commands are modal. On conventional turning machines it is standard practice to interpret incremental NC blocks in the transverse axis as radius values, while diameter dimensions are valid for absolute coordinates. This conversion for G90/G91 is performed using the commands DIAMON, DIAMOF or DIAM90. You will find further information in "Special turning functions" (Section 4.13) in this Programming Guide.

G91 25 G90 Z G91 G90 7.5 Z 5 X Y 35 25 X 20 25

Programming example
The traverse paths are entered in absolute coordinates with reference to the workpiece zero. The center point coordinates I and J for circular interpolation are specified blockwise in absolute coordinates, since the arc center is programmed independent of G90/G91 in incremental coordinates as standard.

N10 N20 N30 or N30 N40 N50

G90 G0 X45 Y60 Z2 T1 S2000 M3 G1 Z-5 F500 G2 X20 Y35 I=AC(45) J=AC(35) G2 X20 Y35 I0 J-25 G0 Z2 M30

Absolute dimensioning, rapid traverse to XYZ, tool, spindle on clockwise Tool infeed Circle center point in absolute dimensions Circle center point in incremental dimensions Retract End of block

3-80

12.98

Positional Data

3.2 Absolute/incremental dimensions, G90/G91

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

2.5

11 W 15 21 27

N5 N10 N20 N30 or N30 N40 N50

T1 D1 S2000 M3 G0 G90 X11 Z1 G1 Z-15 F0.2 G3 X11 Z-27 I=AC(-5) K=AC(-21) G3 X11 Z-27 I-8 K-6 G1 Z-40 M30

Tool, spindle on clockwise Absolute dimensioning, rapid traverse to XYZ Tool infeed Circle center point in absolute dimensions Circle center point in incremental dimensions Retract End of block

3-81

Positional Data

12.98

3.2 Absolute/incremental dimensions, G90/G91

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

3.2.1 G91 extension (SW 4.3 and higher)

Programming
Incremental dimension data input G91 or X=IC() Y=IC() Z=IC() without traversing through the active tool offset
SD 42442 TOOL_OFFSET_INCR_PROG = 0

without traversing through the active zero offset

SD 42440 FRAME_OFFSET_INCR_PROG = 0

Explanation of the parameters

SD 42440 FRAME_OFFSET_INCR_PROG = 0 SD 42442 TOOL_OFFSET_INCR_PROG = 0

The active zero offset is not traversed. The active tool offset is not traversed.

Function
For applications such as scratching, it is necessary only to traverse the path programmed in the incremental coordinates. The active zero offset or tool offset is not traversed. This can be set separately via SDs FRAME_OFFSET_INCR_PROG (zero point) and TOOL_OFFSET_INCR_PROG (tool offset).

Programming example
G54 contains an offset of 25 in X SD 42440 FRAME_OFFSET_INCR_PROG = 0 (no retraction of the active zero offset) N10 N20 N30 G90 G0 G54 X100 G1 G91 X10 G90 X50
traverse X by 10 mm, the offset is not traversed traverse to position X75, the offset is traversed

3-82

12.98

Positional Data

3.3 Absolute dimensions for rotary axes, DC, ACP, ACN

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

810D

3.3

Absolute dimensions for rotary axes, DC, ACP, ACN

Programming
A=DC() B=DC() C=DC() or A=ACP() B=ACP() C=ACP() or A=ACN() B=ACN() C=ACN()

Explanation of the parameters

A B C DC ACP ACN Axis identifier for rotary axis to be traversed Absolute dimensions, approach position directly Absolute dimensions, approach position in positive direction Absolute dimensions, approach position in negative direction

Function
With the above parameters you can define the desired approach strategy for positioning rotary axes.

Sequence
Absolute dimensioning with DC The rotary axis travels to the position programmed in absolute coordinates along the shortest direct path. The rotary axis traverses across an area of up to 180. Absolute dimensioning with ACP The rotary axis travels to the positions programmed in absolute coordinates in the positive direction of axis rotation (counterclockwise). Absolute dimensioning with ACN The rotary axis travels to the positions programmed in absolute coordinates in the negative direction of axis rotation (clockwise).

Maximum traversing range

ACN

ACP

3-83

Positional Data

12.98

3.3 Absolute dimensions for rotary axes, DC, ACP, ACN

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

The traversing range between 0 and 360 must be set in the machine data (modulo method) for positioning with directional data (ACP, ACN). G91 or IC must be programmed to traverse modulo rotary axes by more than 360 in a block. You will find more information on the previous pages. The positive direction of rotation (clockwise or counterclockwise) is set in the machine data.

Additional notes
All of the commands are modal. You can also use DC, ACP and ACN for spindle positioning from zero speed. Example: SPOS=DC(45)

Programming example
Machining on a rotary table: the tool is stationary, the table rotates through 270 in clockwise direction to produce a circular groove.
5

X 270

N10 N20 N30 N40

SPOS=0 G90 G0 X-20 Y0 Z2 T1 G1 Z-5 F500 C=ACP(270)

Spindle in position control Absolute, infeed in rapid traverse Reduce feed The table rotates through 270 in clockwise direction, the tool mills a circular groove Lift, end of program

N50

G0 Z2 M30

3-84

12.98

Positional Data

3.4 Metric/imperial dimensions, G70/G71/G700/G710

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

810D

3.4

Metric/imperial dimensions, G70/G71/G700/G710 Programming

Call G70 or G71 G700 or G710 SW 5 and later

Explanation of the commands

G70 G71 G700 G710 Imperial measurements (length [inches]) Metric measurements (length [mm]) Imperial measurements (length [inch]; feedrate [inch/min] Metric measurements (length [mm]; feed [mm/min])

Function
Depending on the dimensions in the production drawing, you can program workpiece geometries alternately in metric measurements and inches. In SW 5 and higher, the functionality of G70/G71 has been extended with G700/G710. In addition to the geometrical parameters, the technological parameters, such as feed F, are interpreted during part program execution in the system of units set in G700/G710.

Sequence
G70 or G71 You can instruct the control to convert the following geometrical dimensions (with necessary deviations) into the system of units not set and then enter them directly (see examples): Positional data X, Y, Z, Intermediate point coordinates I1, J1, K1 Interpolation parameters I, J, K and circle radius CR for circle programming Thread lead Programmable zero offset (TRANS) Polar radius RP

3-85

Positional Data

12.98

3.4 Metric/imperial dimensions, G70/G71/G700/G710

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

810D

All other parameters such as feedrates, tool offsets or settable zero offsets are interpreted (when using G70/G71) in the default system of units (MD 10240: SCALING_SYSTEM_IS_METRIC).
The representation of system variables and machine data is also independent of the G70/G71 context. G700 or G710 In SW 5 and higher, the controller interprets all feedrates used with G700/G710 in the programmed system of units, unlike G70/G71. The G700/G710 codes are contained in the same group as G70/G71. For information about the action of G70/G71 and G700/G710 on NC addresses, please refer to Section 12.2. List of addresses. The programmed feedrate value is modal and thus does not change automatically on subsequent G70/G71/G700/G710 selections. If the feedrate in the G70/G71/G/700/G710 context is to be activated, a new F value must be programmed explicitly.

All length-related NC data, machine data and setting data for G700/G710 are always read and written in the programmed context of G700/G710. References: /FB, G2/, Sect. 2.2 Metric/Imperial dimension system"

3-86

12.98

Positional Data

3.4 Metric/imperial dimensions, G70/G71/G700/G710

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

810D

Synchronized actions If positioning tasks are performed in synchronized actions and no G70/G71/G700/G710 command is programmed in the synchronized action itself, the G70/G71/G700/G710 context active at the time of execution determines which system of units is used. References: /PGA/ Section 10, Motion-synchronous actions

Programming example
Change between metric and imperial input with basic setting metric (G70/G71).

Y G70

G71 3.54" 3.22"

G70

G71 X 20 1.18" 2.75" 90

N10 N20 N30 N40

G0 G90 X20 Y30 Z2 S2000 M3 T1 G1 Z-5 F500 X90 G70 X2.75 Y3.22

Initial setting metric At feed in Z [mm/min] Enter destination positions in inches, G70 is active until deselected by G71 or end of program Enter positions in mm Retract in rapid traverse, end of program

N50 N60 N70

X1.18 Y3.54 G71 X 20 Y30 G0 Z2 M30

3-87

Positional Data

12.98

3.5 Settable zero offsets, G54 to G599

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

3.5

Settable zero offsets, G54 to G599 Programming

Call G54 or G55 or G56 or G57 or G505 G599 Deactivate G53 or G500 or SUPA or G153

Explanation of the commands

G53 G54, G55, G56, G57 G153 G500 SUPA G505 ... G599 Non-modal deactivation, including programmed offsets Call the first to fourth settable zero offset Suppress current frame including base frame Deactivate G54 to G599 until the next call if G500 is initialized with 0. Otherwise G500 is written with the base offset. Non-modal deactivation, including programmed offsets, handwheel offsets (DRF), external zero offset and PRESET offset. Call the 5th to the 99th settable zero offset

Function
The settable zero offset relates the workpiece zero on all axes to the origin of the basic coordinate system. It is therefore possible to call up cross-program zero points for different fixtures with a G command.

Milling:
Z Y Y

G54

X X

3-88

12.98

Positional Data

3.5 Settable zero offsets, G54 to G599

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

For turning, e.g. the offset value for tightening the chuck is entered in G54.

Turning:

Z M W

G54

Sequence
Setting the offset values On the operator panel or universal interface, enter the following values in the internal control zero offset table: Coordinates for the offset Angle for rotated clamping and Scale factors if necessary

Y Scale
Y

Rotate

Please see the Operators Guide for the procedure.

Offset

3-89

Positional Data

12.98

3.5 Settable zero offsets, G54 to G599

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Activating the zero offset In the NC program, the zero offset is moved from the machine coordinate system to the workpiece coordinate system by executing commands G54 to G57. In the next NC block with a programmed movement, all of the positional parameters and thus the tool movements refer to the workpiece zero which is now valid. The four available zero offsets can be used, e.g. for multiple machining operations, to describe four workpiece clamping positions simultaneously and execute them in the program. Other settable zero offsets, G505 to G599 Command numbers G505 to G599 are available for this purpose. This enables you to create up to 100 settable zero offsets in total, in addition to the four default zero offsets G54 to G57, by using the machine data. They are stored in the zero point memory. Please refer to Section 4 for further information. Deactivating a zero offset The command G500 deactivates the settable zero offset including the base offset. G53, G153 or the command SUPA are used for blockwise suppression of the programmable and settable offsets. You will find more information on programmable zero offsets in Section 6 (frames).

Y
Y

Additional notes
The basic setting at program start, e.g. G54 or G500, can be set with machine data.

3-90

12.98

Positional Data

3.5 Settable zero offsets, G54 to G599

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Programming example
In this example, three workpieces, arranged on a pallet according to the zero offset values G54 to G56, are machined successively. The machining sequence is programmed in subprogram L47.
Y M Y

X Y Y

G5 6

G55
TRANS X10 M0

N10 N20 N30 N40 N50 N60 N70 N80

G0 G90 X10 Y10 F500 T1 G54 S1000 M3 L47 G55 G0 Z200 L47 G56 L47 G53 X200 Y300 M30

Approach Call the first zero offset, spindle clockwise Run program, in this case as a subprogram Call the second zero offset Z via obstacle Run program as subprogram Call third zero offset Run program as subprogram Suppress zero offset, program end

3-91

Positional Data

12.98

3.6 Selecting the working plane, G17 to G19

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

3.6

Selecting the working plane, G17 to G19 Programming

Call G17 or G18 or G19 Explanation of the commands G17 G18 G19 Working plane X/Y Working plane Z/X Working plane Y/Z Milling:
Z Infeed

Infeed direction Z Infeed direction Y Infeed direction X

Function
The specification of the working plane, in which the contour is to be machined also defines the following functions: The plane for tool radius compensation The infeed direction for tool length compensation depending on the tool type The plane for circular interpolation.

Y X

fee

In f

Sequence
It is advisable to define the working plane at the beginning of the program. The working plane must be specified when the tool path compensation G41/G42 (see Section "Tool offsets) is called so that the control can correct the tool length and radius. In the initial setting, G17 (X/Y plane) is defined for milling and G18 (Z/X plane) is defined for turning.

Turning:
Y

7 G1

9
G1 8

3-92

12.98

Positional Data

3.6 Selecting the working plane, G17 to G19

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Machining on inclined planes Rotate the coordinate system with ROT (see Section "Coordinate system offset) to position the coordinate axes on the inclined surface. The working planes rotate accordingly.

Tool length compensation in inclined planes The tool length compensation generally always refers to the fixed, non-rotated working plane.

Note
The tool length components can be calculated according to the rotated working planes with the functions for "Tool length compensation for orientable tools". For more information on this calculation type, please refer to the section "Tool Offset". The offset plane is selected with CUT2D, CUT2DF. For more information see the Section "Tool offsets.

Additional notes
The control provides convenient coordinate transformation functions for the spatial definition of the working plane. For further information, please refer to Section "Coordinate system offset".

3-93

Positional Data

12.98

3.6 Selecting the working plane, G17 to G19

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Programming example
The "conventional" approach: Define the working plane, call up the tool type and tool offset values, activate the path compensation, program the traversing movements.

Example for milling tool: N10 G17 T5 D8

G17 call working plane, in this case X/Y T, D tool number. The length compensation is performed in the Z direction. The radius compensation is performed in the X/Y plane. Circular interpolation and tool radius compensation in the X/Y plane.

N20

G1 G41 X10 Y30 Z-5 F500

N30

G2 X22.5 Y40 I50 J40

3-94

12.98

Positional Data

3.7 Programmable working area limitation, G25/G26

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

3.7

Programmable working area limitation, G25/G26 Programming

G25 G26 WALIMON, WALIMOF XYZ XYZ (Programming in a separate NC block) (Programming in a separate NC block)

Explanation of the commands

G25 X Y Z G26 X Y Z WALIMON WALIMOF Lower working area limitation, value assignment in the channel axes* Upper working area limitation, value assignment in the channel axes* Activate working area limitation Deactivate working area limitation

* Value assignments in the basic coordinate system

Function
G25/G26 limits the working area in which the tool is to traverse in all channel axes. This allows you to set up protection zones in the working area which are out of bounds for tool movements.
Y Protection zone Working area

3-95

Positional Data

12.98

3.7 Programmable working area limitation, G25/G26

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Sequence
Reference points on the tool When tool length compensation is active, the reference point is the tip of the tool, otherwise it is the toolholder reference point. If the tool is positioned outside the specified area or leaves this area, the program stops executing. Programmable working area limitation, G25/G26 An upper (G26) and lower (G25) working area limit is defined for each axis. These values apply immediately and are not lost on Reset and when the control is switched on again. The tool (milling tool) radius can be changed in the channel-specific machine data $MC_WORKAREA_WITH_TOOL_RADIUS (see "Advanced").

Z Y
G2 6Z G2 5Y

5X G2 G2 5Z
G2 5Y

G2 6Y

The coordinates for the individual axes apply in the basic coordinate system!

Basic coordinate system

6X G2
X

Activate/deactivate working area limitation The command WALIMON activates working area limitation for all axes with the values programmed in G25/G26. WALIMON is the default setting. It therefore only has to be programmed if working area limitation has been disabled. The command WALIMOF is used to deactivate working area limitation for all of the axes. The axial setting data define the axes for which the working area limitation is valid.

3-96

12.98

Positional Data

3.7 Programmable working area limitation, G25/G26

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Additional notes
G25/G26 can also be used to program limits for spindle speeds at the address S. For further information, please refer to Section "Feed control and spindle motion"

Programming example
X

Protection zone B

A protection zone is defined in the working area of a turning machine. This protects the surrounding equipment such as turrets, measuring stations, etc. against damage. Default setting: WALIMON

X+ Working area

80 X-

300

N10 N20 N30 N40 N50 N60 N70 N80 N90 N100 N110

G0 G90 F0.5 T1 G25 X-80 Z30 G26 X80 Z330 L22 G0 G90 Z102 T2 X0 WALIMOF G1 Z-2 F0.5 G0 Z200 WALIMON X70 M30 Deactivate working area limitation Boring Back Activate working area limitation End of program Define the lower limit for the individual coordinate axes Define the upper limit Cutting program To tool change location

3-97

Positional Data

12.98

3.8 Reference point approach, G74

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

3.8

Reference point approach, G74 Programming

G74 X1=0 Y1=0 Z1=0 A1=0 (programmed in a separate NC block)

Explanation of the commands

G74 X1=0 Y1=0 Reference point approach The specified machine axis address X1, Y1 approaches the reference point.

Function
When the machine has been powered up (where incremental position measurement systems are used), all of the axis slides must approach their reference point. Only then can traversing movements be programmed. The reference point can be approached in the NC program with G74.

Sequence
The speed at which the axis slide travels is defined in the machine data and cannot be programmed. The control detects the traversing direction automatically. The machine axis addresses are programmed (X1, Y1, Z1, etc.)! A transformation should not be programmed for an axis which is to approach the reference point with G74. Deactivate transformation with the command TRAFOOF.

3-98

12.98

Positional Data

3.8 Reference point approach, G74

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Programming example
When the measurement system is changed, the reference point is approached and the workpiece zero is initialized.

N10 N20 N30 N40 N50

SPOS=0 G74 X1=0 Y1=0 Z1=0 C1=0 G54 L47 M30

Position control Reference point approach for linear axes and rotary axes Zero offset Cutting program End of program

3-99

Positional Data

12.98

3.8 Reference point approach, G74

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Notes

3-100

12.98

Programming Motion Commands

4.1 General information.......................................................................................................... 4-102 4.2 Traversing commands with polar coordinates, G110, G111, G112, AP, RP ................... 4-104 4.3 Rapid traverse movement, G0 ......................................................................................... 4-108 4.4 Linear interpolation, G1 .................................................................................................... 4-110 4.5 Circular interpolation, G2/G3, CIP .................................................................................... 4-113 4.6 Helical interpolation, G2/G3, TURN ................................................................................. 4-126 4.7 Contour definitions............................................................................................................ 4-128 4.7.1 Straight line with angle ................................................................................................ 4-128 4.7.2 Two straight lines ........................................................................................................ 4-129 4.7.3 Three straight lines...................................................................................................... 4-130 4.7.4 End point programming with an angle......................................................................... 4-131 4.8 Thread cutting with constant lead, G33............................................................................ 4-132 4.8.1 Programmable run-in and run-out paths (SW 5 and higher)....................................... 4-137 4.9 Rigid tapping, G331, G332 ............................................................................................... 4-140 4.10 Tapping with compensating chuck, G63 ........................................................................ 4-142 4.11 Stop during thread cutting .............................................................................................. 4-144 4.12 Approaching a fixed point, G75 ...................................................................................... 4-147 4.13 Travel to fixed stop ......................................................................................................... 4-149 4.14 Special turning functions ................................................................................................ 4-153 4.14.1 Position of workpiece ................................................................................................ 4-153 4.14.2 Dimensions for: radius, diameter .............................................................................. 4-154 4.15 Chamfer, rounding.......................................................................................................... 4-156

4-101

Programming Motion Commands

12.98

4.1 General information

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

4.1

General information
Motion commands programming In this section you will find a description of all the travel commands you can use to machine workpiece contours. You can program straight lines and arcs of a circle. A helix can be produced by combining these two elements. Executed in succession, these contour elements produce the workpiece contour. Before a machining process is started, you need to position the tool in such a way as to avoid any damage to the tool or workpiece. Start point - destination point The traversing movement always runs from the last approached position to the programmed destination position. This destination position is also the start position for the next travel command. Number of axis values Depending on the control configuration, you can program up to 8 axes per set of movements. These may include path axes, synchronized axes, positioning axes and spindle oscillation mode. Milling:

6 2 1

4-102

12.98

Programming Motion Commands

4.1 General information

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Turning:

5 4 3 2 1

An axis address can only be programmed once in each block.

These commands can be programmed in Cartesian or polar coordinates.

4-103

Programming Motion Commands

12.98

4.2 Traversing commands with polar coordinates,

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

4.2

Traversing commands with polar coordinates, G110, G111, G112, AP, RP Programming
Define pole: G110, G111, G112 X Y Z G110, G111, G112 AP= RP= Traversing commands with polar coordinates: G0 AP= RP= G1 AP= RP= G2 AP= RP= G3 AP= RP=

The new end point is defined in relation to a pole.

Explanation of the commands and parameters

G110 G111 G112 AP= RP= Pole parameter, with reference to the last approached position Pole parameter, absolute in the workpiece coordinate system Pole parameter, with reference to the last valid pole Polar angle, value range 0360, angle refers to horizontal axis of the working plane Polar radius in mm or inches

All the commands relating to pole input must be programmed in a separate NC block

Function
A workpiece is frequently dimensioned with a central point as origin; the dimensions are given in terms of angles and radii, e.g. in drilling patterns.
162

Y 90

Polar coordinates can be used to program these dimensions directly in accordance with the drawing.

234 m

306

4-104

12.98

Programming Motion Commands

4.2 Traversing commands with polar coordinates,

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Sequence
Traversing commands The positions specified by polar coordinates can be traversed with G0, G1, G2 and G3. Working plane The polar coordinates are valid in the working plane selected with G17 to G19. Cylindrical coordinates The 3rd geometry axis, which lies perpendicular to the working plane, can also be specified in Cartesian coordinates. This enables spatial parameters to be programmed in cylindrical coordinates. Example: G17 G0 AP RP Z
RP

Defining the pole G110, G111, G112 The pole can be specified in Cartesian or polar coordinates. G commands G110 to G112 are used to provide a unique definition of the reference point for dimensions. Absolute or incremental dimensioning (AC/IC) therefore have no effect on the systematics specified in the G command.

If no pole is specified, the origin of the active workpiece coordinate system applies.
Polar angle AP Value range 0360. With absolute input, the angle refers to the horizontal axis of the working plane, e.g. X axis with G17. The positive direction of rotation runs counterclockwise.

4-105

Programming Motion Commands

12.98

4.2 Traversing commands with polar coordinates,

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

When incremental coordinates are entered (AP=IC), the last angle programmed is taken as the reference. The polar angle is stored until a new pole is defined or the working plane is changed. Polar radius RP The polar radius is specified in mm or inches in absolute positive values. RP is stored until a new value is input. The following general rule applies: You must not program Cartesian coordinates, such as interpolation parameters or axis addresses, for the selected working plane in NC blocks with polar end position coordinates.

Additional notes
In the NC program you can switch between polar and Cartesian coordinates, block by block.

4-106

12.98

Programming Motion Commands

4.2 Traversing commands with polar coordinates,

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Programming example
Making a hole pattern: the positions of the holes are specified in polar coordinates. Each hole is machined with the same production sequence: predrill, drill to size, ream etc. The machining sequence is stored in a subprogram.

N10 N20 N30 N40 N50

G17 G54 G111 X43 Y38 G0 RP=30 AP=18 Z5 L10 G91 AP=72

Working plane X/Y, workpiece zero Define pole Approach starting point, position in cylindrical coordinates Subprogram call Approach next position in rapid traverse, polar angle in incremental dimensions, polar radius from block N30 is still stored and does not need to be specified Subprogram call Retract tool, end of program

N60 N70 N80 N90 N100 N110 N120 N130

L10 AP=IC(72) L10 AP=IC(72) L10 AP=IC(72) L10 G0 X300 Y200 Z100 M30

4-107

Programming Motion Commands

12.98

4.3 Rapid traverse movement, G0

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

4.3

Rapid traverse movement, G0 Programming

G0 G0 X Y Z AP= RP=

Explanation of the parameters

X Y Z AP= RP= End point in Cartesian coordinates End point in polar coordinates, in this case the polar angle End point in polar coordinates, in this case the polar radius

Function
You can use the rapid traverse movements to position the tool rapidly, to travel round the workpiece or to approach tool change locations.

This function is not suitable for workpiece machining!

Sequence
The tool movement programmed with G0 is executed at the highest possible speed (rapid traverse). The rapid traverse speed is defined separately for each axis in machine data. If the rapid traverse movement is executed simultaneously on several axes, the rapid traverse speed is determined by the axis which requires the greatest time for its section of the path.

Additional notes
G0 is modal.

4-108

12.98

Programming Motion Commands

4.3 Rapid traverse movement, G0

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Programming example
G0 is used for approaching starting positions or tool change locations, retracting the tool, etc.

Milling:
Y

N6 0

0 N2

65 20

X 30 80

N10 N20 N30 N40 N50 N60

G90 S400 M3 G0 X30 Y20 Z2 G1 Z-5 F1000 X80 Y65 G0 Z2 G0 X-20 Y100 Z100 M30

Absolute dimensioning, spindle clockwise Approach start position Tool infeed Travel on straight line Retract tool, end of program Turning:
X

N80
N2 0

60 7.5 35 50 Z

N10 N20 N30 N40 N50

G90 S400 M3 G0 X25 Z5 G1 G94 Z0 F1000 G95 Z-7.5 F0.2 X60 Z-35

Absolute dimensioning, spindle clockwise Approach start position Tool infeed Travel on straight line

4-109

Programming Motion Commands

12.98

4.4 Linear interpolation, G1

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

N60 N70 N80 N90

Z-50 G0 X62 G0 X80 Z20 M30 Retract tool End of program

G0 cannot be replaced by G.

4.4

Linear interpolation, G1 Programming

G1 G1 X Y Z F AP= RP= F

Explanation of the parameters

X Y Z AP= RP= F End point in Cartesian coordinates End point in polar coordinates, in this case polar angle End point in polar coordinates, in this case polar radius Feedrate in mm/min

Function
With G1, the tool travels along straight lines that are parallel to the axis, inclined or in any orientation in space. The straight line interpolation enables machining of 3D surfaces, grooves, etc.

4-110

12.98

Programming Motion Commands

4.4 Linear interpolation, G1

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Sequence
The tool travels at feedrate F along a straight line from the current starting point to the programmed destination point. The workpiece is machined along this path. You can enter the destination point in Cartesian or polar coordinates. Example: G1 G94 X100 Y20 Z30 A40 F100 The end point on X, Y, Z is approached at a feedrate of 100 mm/min; the rotary axis A is traversed as a synchronized axis in order that all four movements are completed at the same time.

Additional notes
G1 is modal. The spindle speed S and the direction of spindle rotation M3/M4 must be specified for machining. FGROUP can be used to define groups of axes to which the path feed F applies. You will find more information in section 5.

4-111

Programming Motion Commands

12.98

4.4 Linear interpolation, G1

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Programming example
Machining of a groove: the tool travels from the starting point to the end point in the X/Y direction. Infeed takes place simultaneously in the Z direction.

Milling:
Y Y

20 Z 20 80 15 X

N10 N20 N30 N40 N50

G17 S400 M3 G0 X20 Y20 Z2 G1 Z-2 F40 X80 Y80 Z-15 G0 Z100 M30

Select working plane, spindle clockwise Approach start position Tool infeed Travel along inclined straight line Retract to tool change location Turning:
X+

X+

Y+

Y-

Z+

6 20 XX-

N10 N20 N30 N40 N50

G17 S400 M3 G0 X40 Y-6 Z2 G1 Z-3 F40 X12 Y-20 G0 Z100 M30

Select working plane, spindle clockwise Approach start position Tool infeed Travel along inclined straight line Retract to tool change location

4-112

12.98

Programming Motion Commands

4.5 Circular interpolation, G2/G3, CIP

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

4.5

Circular interpolation, G2/G3, CIP Programming

G2/G3 G2/G3 G2/G3 G2/G3 G2/G3 CIP CT X Y Z I J K AP= RP= X Y Z CR= AR= I J K AR= X Y Z X Y Z I1= J1= K1= X Y Z

Explanation of the commands and parameters

G2 G3 CIP CT X Y Z I J K AP= RP= CR= AR= I1= J1= K1= Travel on a circular path in clockwise direction Travel on a circular path in counterclockwise direction Circular interpolation through intermediate point Circle with tangential transition End point in Cartesian coordinates Circle center point in Cartesian coordinates (in X, Y, Z direction) End point in polar coordinates, in this case the polar angle End point in polar coordinates, in this case polar radius corresponding to circle radius Circle radius Arc angle Intermediate points in Cartesian coordinates (in X, Y, Z direction)

There is no practical limitation on the maximum size of the programmable radius.

Function
Circular interpolation enables machining of full circles or arcs.

4-113

Programming Motion Commands

12.98

4.5 Circular interpolation, G2/G3, CIP

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Sequence
Z

Indication of working plane The control needs the working plane parameter (G17 to G19) in order to calculate the direction of rotation for the circle G2 is clockwise/G3 is counterclockwise. It is generally advisable to specify the working plane. Exception: You can also machine circles outside the selected working plane (not with arc angle and helix parameters). In this case, the axis addresses that you specify as an end point determine the circle plane.

Y X G3 G2

G2 G3 G3 G2

Additional notes
G2/G3 are modal. You can use FGROUP to specify which axes are to be traversed with a programmed feedrate. You will find more information in Section 5. The control provides a range of different ways to program circular movements, This allows you to implement almost any type of drawing dimension directly. For detailed descriptions please refer to the following pages. Programming a circle with center point and end point The circular movement is described by: the end point in Cartesian coordinates X, Y, Z and the circle center point at addresses I, J, K. The identifiers have the following meanings: I: Coordinate of the circle center point in the X direction J: Coordinate of the circle center point in the Y direction K: Coordinate of the circle center point in the Z direction If the circle is programmed with a center point but no end point, the result is a full circle.

7 G1

G1 9
G1 8

4-114

12.98

Programming Motion Commands

4.5 Circular interpolation, G2/G3, CIP

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Input in absolute and incremental dimensions The defaults G90/G91 absolute or incremental coordinates are valid only for the circle end point. The center point coordinates I, J, K are normally entered in incremental dimensions with reference to the circle starting point. You program the absolute center point non-modally with reference to the workpiece zero with: I=AC(), J=AC(), K=AC() Example for incremental dimensions: N10 G0 X67.5 Y80.211 N20 G3 X17.203 Y38.029 I17.5 J30.211 F500 Example for absolute dimensions: N10 G0 X67.5 Y80.211 N20 G3 X17.203 Y38.029 I=AC(50) J=AC(50)

Milling:
Y
Circle starting point

J = AC(...)

I
50.000 38.029 Circle end point .

50.000

17.203

17.500

I = AC(...)

An interpolation parameter I, J, K with value 0 can be omitted but the second associated parameter must always be specified. Example for incremental dimensions: N120 G0 X12 Z0 N125 G1 X40 Z-25 F0.2 N130 G3 X70 Z-75 I-3.335 K-29.25 N135 G1 Z-95 Example for absolute dimensions: N120 G0 X12 Z0 N125 G1 X40 Z-25 F0.2 N130 G3 X70 Z-75 I=AC(33.33) K=AC(-54.25) N135 G1 Z-95 Turning:

-K -I Z 54.25 75 95 70 25 12 33.33 40

4-115

30.211

Programming Motion Commands

12.98

4.5 Circular interpolation, G2/G3, CIP

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Programming a circle with radius and end point The circular movement is described by: the circle radius CR= and the end point in Cartesian coordinates X, Y, Z. In addition to the circle radius, you must also specify the leading sign +/ to indicate whether the traversing angle is to be greater than or less than 180. A positive leading sign can be omitted. The identifiers have the following meanings: CR=+: Angle less than or equal to 180 CR=: Angle greater than 180 Example: N10 G0 X67.5 Y80.211 N20 G3 X17.203 Y38.029 CR=34.913 F500 You dont need to specify the center point with this procedure. Full circles (traversing angle 360) cannot be programmed with CR=, but must be programmed using the circle end point and interpolation parameters. Example: N125 G1 X40 Z-25 F0.2 N130 G3 X70 Z-75 CR=30 N135 G1 Z-95

Milling:
Y
CR = -...

C
80.511

R= 34 .9 13

38.029

CR = +...

X
17.203 67.500

Turning:

75 95

4-116

30
Z 25

12.98

Programming Motion Commands

4.5 Circular interpolation, G2/G3, CIP

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Programming a circle with arc angle and center point or end point The circular movement is described by: the arc angle AR = and the end point in Cartesian coordinates X, Y, Z or the circle center point at addresses I, J, K The identifiers have the following meanings: AR=: arc angle, value range 0 to 360 Milling: Please refer to the preceding pages for the meanings of I, J, K. Full circles (traversing angle 360) cannot be programmed with AR=, but must be programmed using the circle end point and interpolation parameters. Example: N10 G0 X67.5 Y80.211 N20 G3 X17.203 Y38.029 AR=140.134 F500 or N20 G3 I17.5 J30.211 AR=140.134 F500
50.000 38.029
Circle start point

Y
14 0. 13 4

I
Arc angle

X
17.203 50.000 17.500

Example: N125 G1 X40 Z-25 F0.2 N130 G3 X70 Z-75 AR=135.944 or N130 G3 I-3.335 K-29.25 AR=135.944 or N130 G3 I=AC(33.33) K=AC(-54.25) AR=135.944 N135 G1 Z-95

Turning:

5 .9 44

30.211

Z 54.25 75 95 70 25 33.33 40

4-117

Programming Motion Commands

12.98

4.5 Circular interpolation, G2/G3, CIP

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Programming a circle with polar coordinates The circular movement is described by: the polar angle AP= and the polar radius RP=

Milling:
Y
14 0. 13 4
Circle start point

The following rule applies: The pole lies at the circle center point. The polar radius corresponds to the circle radius. Example: N10 G0 X67.5 Y80.211 N20 G111 X50 Y50 N30 G3 RP=34.913 AP=200.052 F500

I
50.000 38.029 Arc angle

X
17.203 50.000 17.500

Example: N125 G1 X40 Z-25 F0.2 N130 G111 X33.33 Z-54.25 N135 G3 RP=30 AP=142.326 N140 G1 Z-95

Turning:

5 .9 44

30.211

Z 54.25 75 95 70 25 33.33 40

4-118

12.98

Programming Motion Commands

4.5 Circular interpolation, G2/G3, CIP

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Programming example
The following program lines contain an example for each circular programming possibility. The necessary dimensions are shown in the opposite production drawing.

Milling:

Y
. 00

80.511

50.000

G 11 1

RP =3 4.9 13

052

A P=

X
50.000 67.500

N10 N20 N30 or N30 or N30 or N30 or N30 N40

G0 G90 X133 Y44.48 S800 M3 G17 G1 Z-5 F1000 G2 X115 Y113.3 I-43 J25.52

Approach starting point Tool infeed Circle end point, center point in incremental dimensions Circle end point, center point in absolute dimensions Circle end point, circle radius Arc angle, center point in incremental dimensions Arc angle, circle end point End of program

G2 X115 Y113.3 I=AC(90) J=AC(70)

G2 X115 Y113.3 CR=-50 G2 AR=269.31 I-43 J25.52

G2 AR=269.31 X115 Y113.3 M30

4-119

Programming Motion Commands

12.98

4.5 Circular interpolation, G2/G3, CIP

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Turning:

2 .3 26 5 . 94 4 13

30
Z 54,25 75 95 40 70 25 12 33.33

N.. N120 N125 N130 or N130 or N130 or N130 or N130 or N130 or N130 N135 N140 N..

... G0 X12 Z0 G1 X40 Z-25 F0.2 G3 X70 Y-75 I-3.335 K-29.25 Circle end point, center point in incremental dimensions Circle end point, center point in absolute dimensions Circle end point, circle radius Arc angle, circle end point Arc angle, center point in incremental dimensions Arc angle, center point in absolute dimensions Polar coordinates Polar coordinates

G3 X70 Y-75 I=AC(33.33) K=AC(-54.25) G3 X70 Z-75 CR=30 G3 X70 Z-75 AR=135.944 G3 I-3.335 K-29.25 AR=135.944

G3 I=AC(33.33) K=AC(-54.25) AR=135.944 G111 X33.33 Z-54.25 G3 RP=30 AP=142.326 G1 Z-95 ...

4-120

12.98

Programming Motion Commands

4.5 Circular interpolation, G2/G3, CIP

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Programming a circle with intermediate and end points You can use CIP to program arcs. These arcs can also be inclined in space. In this case, you describe the intermediate and end points with three coordinates. The circular movement is described by: The intermediate point at addresses I1=, J1=, K1= and the end point in Cartesian coordinates X, Y, Z. The identifiers have the following meanings: I1=: Coordinate of the interm. point in the X direction J1=:Coordinate of the interm. point in the Y direction K1=:Coordinate of the interm. point in the Z direction Input in absolute and incremental dimensions The G90/G91 defaults for absolute or incremental dimensions are valid for the intermediate and circle end points. With G91, the circle starting point is used as the reference for the intermediate point and end point.

CIP is modal. The traversing direction is determined by the order of the starting point, intermediate point and end point.

4-121

Programming Motion Commands

12.98

4.5 Circular interpolation, G2/G3, CIP

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Programming example for CIP

In order to machine an inclined circular groove, a circle is described by specifying the intermediate point with 3 interpolation parameters, and the end point with 3 coordinates.

Milling:
Y Y

85.35

120

X 80 130 6 10

35.35

Z 2

N10 G0 G90 X130 Y60 S800 M3 N20 G17 G1 Z-2 F100 N30 CIP X80 Y120 Z-10 I1= IC(-85.35) J1=IC(-35.35) K1=-6 N40 M30

Approach starting point Tool infeed Circle end point and intermediate point: Coordinates for all three geometry axes End of program Turning:

93.33 Z

25 54.25 75 95

N125 G1 X40 Z-25 F0.2 N130 CIP X70 Z-75 I1=IC(26.665) K1=IC(-29.25) or N130 CIP X70 Z-75 I1=93.33 K1=-54.25 N135 G1 Z-95

4-122

12.98

Programming Motion Commands

4.5 Circular interpolation, G2/G3, CIP

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Programming a circle with tangential transition The Tangential transition function is an expansion of the circle programming. The circle is defined by the start and end point and the tangent direction at the start point. The G code CT produces an arc that lies at a tangent to the contour element programmed previously.

Arc S-E at a tangent to the straight line 1-2

Arcs that lie at a tangent depend on the previous contour element

CT is modal. As a rule, the direction of the tangent, as well as the start and end point of the circle are uniquely defined. Position of the circle plane The position of the circle plane depends on the active plane (G17-G19). If the tangents of the previous block do not lie in the active plane, their projection in the active plane is used. If the start and end points do not have the same position components perpendicular to the active plane, a helix is produced instead of a circle. Specifying TURN=... enables you to program circles with more than one full rotation.

4-123

Programming Motion Commands

12.98

4.5 Circular interpolation, G2/G3, CIP

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Determining the direction of the tangent The direction of tangent at the start point of a CT block is determined from the end tangent of the programmed contour of the previous block with a traversing movement. Any number of blocks without traversing information may lie between this block and the current block. In the case of splines, the tangential direction is defined by the straight line through the last two points. This direction is generally not the same as the direction at the end point of the splines for A and C splines with active ENAT or EAUTO. The transition of B splines is always tangential, the tangent direction is defined as for A or C splines and active ETAN. Frame change If a frame change takes place between the block defining the tangent and the CT block, the tangent is also subjected to this change. Limit case If the extension of the start tangent runs through the end point, a straight line is produced instead of a circle (limit case: circle with infinite radius). In this special case, TURN must either not be programmed or the value must be TURN=0.

Additional notes
When the values tend towards this limit case, circles with an unlimited radius are produced and machining with TURN unequal 0 is generally aborted with an alarm due to violation of the software limits.

4-124

12.98

Programming Motion Commands

4.5 Circular interpolation, G2/G3, CIP

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Programming example for CT

Mill a circular arc following a straight line:

Milling:
Y with TRC

30 15

X 30 50 60 70 80

N10 G0 X0 Y0 Z0 G90 T1 D1 N20 G41 X30 Y30 G1 F1000 N30 CT X50 Y15 N40 X60 Y-5 N50 G1 X70 N60 G0 G40 X80 Y0 Z20 N70 M30

Activate tool radius compensation Program circle with tangential transition

Turning:

Z 23.293 58.146 40 42 70 30

N110 G1 X23.293 Z0 F10 N115 X40 Z-30 F0.2 N120 CT X58.146 Z-42 N125 G1 X70 Program circle with tangential transition

4-125

Programming Motion Commands

12.98

4.6 Helical interpolation, G2/G3, TURN

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

4.6

Helical interpolation, G2/G3, TURN Programming

G2/G3 G2/G3 G2/G3 G2/G3 G2/G3 G2/G3 X Y Z I J K TURN= X Y Z I J K TURN= X Y Z CR= TURN= AR= I J K TURN= AR= X Y Z TURN= AP RP= TURN=

Explanation of the commands and parameters

G2 G3 X Y Z I J K CR= AR TURN= AP= RP= Travel along circular path in clockwise direction Travel along circular path in counterclockwise direction End point in Cartesian coordinates Circle center point in Cartesian coordinates Circle radius Arc angle Number of additional circle passes within the range 0 to 999 Polar angle Polar radius

Function
Helical interpolation can be used to manufacture threads and oil grooves, for example.

Sequence
In helical interpolation, two movements are superimposed and executed in parallel: A horizontal circular movement on which a vertical linear movement is superimposed. The circular movement is performed on the axes specified by the working plane. Example: working plane G17, axes for circular interpolation X and Y. The infeed movement is performed on the perpendicular infeed axis, in this case Z.

4-126

12.98

Programming Motion Commands

4.6 Helical interpolation, G2/G3, TURN

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Sequence of motions 1. Approach starting point 2. With TURN= execute the full circles programmed 3. Approach the circle end point, e.g. as a partial revolution 4. Execute steps 2 and 3 across the infeed depth. The lead with which the helix is to be machined is calculated from the number of full circles plus the programmed end point - executed across the infeed depth. Programming the end point for helical interpolation Please refer to circular interpolation for a detailed description of the interpolation parameters.

Additional notes
For helical interpolation, it is advisable to specify a programmed feedrate override (CFC). You will find more information in section 5.

Programming example
Helical interpolation

N10 G17 G0 X27.5 Y32.99 Z3 N20 G1 Z-5 F50 N30 G3 X20 Y5 Z-20 I=AC(20) J=AC (20) TURN=2

Approach start position Tool infeed Helix with following parameters: Execute 2 full circles from start position, then approach end point End of program

N40 M30

4-127

Programming Motion Commands

12.98

4.7 Contour definitions

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

4.7

Contour definitions

4.7.1 Straight line with angle Programming

X2 A

Explanation of the commands and parameters

X2 or Z2 A End point in Cartesian coordinates X or Z Angle

Function
The end point is defined by specifying the angle A and one of the two coordinates X2 or Z2.
X

X2, Z2

X1, Z1 Z

4-128

12.98

Programming Motion Commands

4.7 Contour definitions

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

4.7.2 Two straight lines Programming

A1 X3 Z3 A2 or X1 Z1 X3 Z3

Explanation of the commands and parameters

A1 A2 X1, Z1 X2, Z2 X3, Z3 Angle of the first straight line Angle of the second straigt line Start coordinates Intersection of the two straight lines End point of the second straight line

Function
X

The intersection of the two straight lines can be designed as a corner, curve or chamfer. The end point of the first of the two straight lines can be programmed by defining the coordinates or specifying the angle.

X3, Z3 A2

Can also be radius or chamfer X2, Z2 A1

X1, Z1 Z

4-129

Programming Motion Commands

12.98

4.7 Contour definitions

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

4.7.3 Three straight lines Programming

X2 X3 X4 or A1 X3 X4 Z2 Z3 Z4

Z3 A2 Z4

Explanation of the commands and parameters

A1 A2 X1, Z1 X2, Z2 X3, Z3 X4, Z4 Angle of the first straight line relative to the abscissa Angle of the second straight line relative to the abscissa Start coordinates of the first straight line Endpoint coordinates of the first straight line or start point of the second straight line Endpoint coordinates of the second straight line or start point of the first straight line Endpoint coordinates of the third straight line

Function
The intersection of the straight lines can be designed as a corner, a curve or a chamfer. The end-point of the third straight line must always be programmed as Cartesian.
X Can also be radius or chamfer X3, Z3

X2, Z2 X4, Z4 A1

X1, Z1 Z

4-130

12.98

Programming Motion Commands

4.7 Contour definitions

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

4.7.4 End point programming with an angle Function

If the address letter A appears in an NC block, either none, one or both of the axes in the active plane may also be programmed. If none of the axes in the active plane is programmed, the block is either the first or second block of a contour consisting of two blocks. If it is the second block of such a contour, this means that the start and end points in the active plane are identical. The contour is then merely a movement vertical to the active plane. If exactly one axis of the active plane is programmed, either it is a single straight line with an end point uniquely defined by the angle and the programmed coordinates, or the second block of a contour that consists of two blocks. In the latter case, the missing coordinate is taken as the last (modal) position reached. If two axes are programmed in the current plane, it is the second block of a contour that consists of two blocks. If the current block was not preceded by a block with angle programming and no programmed axes in the current plane, the block in question is not permissible. Angle A must only be programmed for linear or spline interpolation.

4-131

Programming Motion Commands

12.98

4.8 Thread cutting with constant lead, G33

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

4.8

Thread cutting with constant lead, G33 Programming example for turning machine with longitudinal axis Z and transverse axis X
Cylindrical thread G33 Z K SF=* Taper thread G33 X Z K SF=* G33 X Z I SF=* Face thread G33 X I SF=* * SF= only needs to be programmed for multiple threads (K for taper angle <45) (I for taper angle >45)

Explanation of the parameters

X Z I K SF= End point in Cartesian coordinates Thread lead (in direction X, Z) Starting point offset, only needed for multiple threads

Function
The following types of thread can be machined with G33: Cylindrical, taper or face threads, single or multiple threads, right or left-handed threads. Equipment required: speed-controlled spindle with position measurement system.

Sequence
Operating principle The control calculates the required feedrate from the programmed spindle speed and the thread lead. The turning tool traverses across the length of the thread in the longitudinal and/or facing direction at this feedrate. The feedrate F is not considered for G33, the limitation to maximum axis speed (rapid traverse) is monitored by the control.
Siemens AG 1999 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC Programming Guide Fundamentals (PG) - 08.99 Edition

4-132

12.98

Programming Motion Commands

4.8 Thread cutting with constant lead, G33

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Cylinder thread A cylinder thread is described by the thread length and thread lead. The thread length is entered in absolute or incremental dimensions with one of the Cartesian coordinates X, Y or Z. The Z direction is used preferentially on turning machines. Allowance must also be made for the run-in and run-out paths across which the feed is accelerated or decelerated. The thread lead is entered at addresses I, J, K, on turning machines preferentially with K. The identifiers have the following meanings: I Thread lead in X direction J K Thread lead in Y direction Thread lead in Z direction

Run-out path

Z K

Run-in path

Example: K4 means 4 mm lead per revolution Value range of lead: 0.001 to 2000.00 mm/revolution Face thread The face thread is described by Thread diameter, preferentially in X direction and Thread lead, preferentially with I. Otherwise, the procedure is the same as for cylindrical threads.

Taper thread The taper thread is described by the end point in the longitudinal and facing direction (taper contour) and the thread lead. The taper contour is entered in Cartesian coordinates X, Y, Z in absolute or incremental dimensions - preferentially in the X and Z direction for machining on turning machines. Allowance must also be made for the run-in and run-out distances across which the feed is accelerated or decelerated.

4-133

Programming Motion Commands

12.98

4.8 Thread cutting with constant lead, G33

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

The thread lead is entered at addresses I, J, K. Please see the cylindrical thread for the meaning of I, J, K. The parameter for the lead is based on the taper angle (calculated from the longitudinal axis to the outside of the taper). For taper angles <45: lead in longitudinal direction, e.g. K For taper angles >45: lead in facing direction, e.g. I For taper angles = 45 you can specify I or K. Start point offset SF - machining of multiple threads Threads with offset cuts are programmed by specifying starting point offsets in the G33 block. The start point offset is specified as an absolute angular position at address SF=. The associated setting data is changed accordingly. Example: SF=45 Meaning: Start offset 45 Value range: 0.0000 to 359.999 degrees If no starting point offset is specified, the "starting angle for thread" defined in the setting data is used. Right-hand/left-hand thread Right-hand or left-hand threads are set according to the spindle direction: M3: Clockwise M4: Counterclockwise In addition, the desired speed is programmed at the address S.

4-134

12.98

Programming Motion Commands

4.8 Thread cutting with constant lead, G33

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

The spindle speed override switch must not be changed during thread cutting with G33 (dynamic speed change). The feed override switch has no function in the G33 block. Using a position-controlled spindle The SPCON command can be used before G33 to produce a thread in position-control mode. You will find more information on SPCON in Section 7. Thread chaining By programming several G33 blocks consecutively, you can align several sets of threads in a sequence. With G64 continuous-path mode, the blocks are interconnected in a look ahead velocity control so that no speed jumps are produced. You will find more information on G64 in Section 7.

3r wi d blo th G3 ck 3

2nd blo c with G3 k 1st block 3 with G33

Programming example
Machining a taper thread

110 Z 60

N10 N20 N30

G1 X50 Z0 S500 F100 M3 G33 X110 Z-60 K4 G0 Z0 M30

Approach starting point, activate spindle Taper thread: end point on Z and X, lead K in Z direction, since angle <45 Retraction, end of program

4-135

Programming Motion Commands

12.98

4.8 Thread cutting with constant lead, G33

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Programming example
Machining a double cylindrical thread in offset steps with starting point offset 180.
X Start point 0

Start point 180 100

N10 N20 N30 N40 N50 N60 N70 N80 N90

G1 G54 X99 Z10 S500 F100 M3 G33 Z-100 K4 G0 X102 G0 Z10 G1 X99 G33 Z-100 K4 SF=180 G0 X110 G0 Z10 M30

Zero offset, approach start point, spindle on Cylindrical thread: end point in Z Retract to starting position

2nd cut: starting point offset 180 Retract tool End of program

4-136

12.98

Programming Motion Commands

4.8 Thread cutting with constant lead, G33

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

4.8.1 Programmable run-in and run-out paths (SW 5 and higher) Programming
DITS=value DITE=value

Explanation of the parameters

DITS DITE Value Thread run-in path Thread run-out path Specification of the run-in and run-out path: -1,0,...n

Function
The commands DITS (Displacement Thread Start) and DITE (Displacement Thread End) can be used to define the path ramp for acceleration and deceleration, in order to modify the feedrate if the tool run-in and run-out paths are too short:
x

z
Run-in or run-out path acc. to machining directions

Run-in path too short: The band at the thread run-in provides insufficient space for the tool start ramp - a shorter ramp must therefore be defined with DITS. Run-out path too short: The band at the thread run-out provides insufficient space for the tool deceleration ramp, giving rise to danger of collision between the workpiece and the tool edge. A shorter tool deceleration ramp can be defined with DITE; however a collision can still occur. Remedy: Program a shorter thread, reduce the spindle speed. Only paths, not positions, are programmed with DITS and DITE.

4-137

Programming Motion Commands

12.98

4.8 Thread cutting with constant lead, G33

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Machine manufacturer (MH4.1)

The commands DITS and DITE correspond to setting data THREAD_RAMP_DISP[0,1], in which the programmed paths are written: see /FB/ V1 Feeds. If the run-in and/or run-out path is very short, the acceleration of the thread axis is higher than the configured value. This causes an acceleration overload on the axis. In this case, alarm 22280 "Programmed run-in path too short" is output for the thread run-in (if configured in MD 11411 ENABLE_ALARM_MASK). The alarm is purely for information and has no effect on part program execution.

Additional notes
DITE acts at the end of the thread as an approximate distance. This achieves a smooth change in the axis movement. When a block with the command DITS and/or DITE is loaded into the interpolator, the path programmed in DITS is copied into SD 42010 THREAD_RAMP_DISP[0] and the path programmed in DITE is copied into SD 42010 THREAD_RAMP_DISP[1]. The programmed run-in path is handled according to the current setting (inches, metric).

Machine manufacturer (MH4.2)

If no run-in/deceleration path is programmed before or in the first thread block, the value is determined by the setting in SD 42010; see References: /FB/ V1 Feeds. On an NC Reset, the corresponding SD for DITS and DITE are set to -1 and SF is set to 0 (default settings).

4-138

12.98

Programming Motion Commands

4.8 Thread cutting with constant lead, G33

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Programming example
N... N40 N50 N60 N... G90 G33 G0 Z50 Z100 K5 X10 SF=180 SOFT M3 S500 DITE=3 ;Start of corner rounding with Z=53 DITS=1

G0 X20

4-139

Programming Motion Commands

12.98

4.9 Rigid tapping, G331, G332

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

4.9

Rigid tapping, G331, G332 Programming

G331 G332 X Y Z I J K X Y Z I J K (Tapping) (Tapping retraction)

Explanation of the parameters

X Y Z I J K Drilling depth (end point) in a Cartesian coordinate Thread lead (in X, Y, Z direction)

Function
G331/G332 enables rigid tapping. Equipment required: position-controlled spindle with position measurement system

Sequence
The spindle must be prepared for tapping with SPOS/SPOSA. You will find more information in section 7. G331: Tapping Tapping is described by the drilling depth (end point of the thread) and the lead. G332: Retraction movement This movement is described with the same lead as the G331 movement. The reversal in the direction of the spindle is performed automatically. Drilling depth, thread lead Drilling in X direction, thread lead I Drilling in Y direction, thread lead J Drilling in Z direction, thread lead K Value range of lead: 0.001 to 2000.00 mm/revolution

4-140

12.98

Programming Motion Commands

4.9 Rigid tapping, G331, G332

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Right-hand/left-hand threads Right-hand or left-hand threads are defined in axis mode by the sign qualifying the lead: Positive lead, clockwise (same as M3) Negative lead, counterclockwise (same as M4) The desired speed is also programmed at address S.

Additional notes
Both functions are modal. The spindle does not operate in axis mode but as a position-controlled spindle. You will find more information on handling of the position-controlled spindle in Section 5.

Programming example
After G332 (retraction), the next thread can be tapped with G331. N10 N20 N30 SPOS[n]=0 G0 X0 Y0 Z2 G331 Z-50 K-4 S200 Prepare tapping Approach starting point Tapping, drilling depth 50, lead K negative = direction of spindle rotation counterclockwise Retract, automatic reversal of direction Spindle reverts to operation in spindle mode End of program

N40 N50 N60

G332 Z3 K-4 G1 F1000 X100 Y100 Z100 S300 M3 M30

4-141

Programming Motion Commands

12.98

4.10 Tapping with compensating chuck, G63

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

4.10

Tapping with compensating chuck, G63 Programming

G63 X Y Z

Explanation of the parameters

X Y Z Drilling depth (end point, specified in Cartesian coordinates)

Function
You can use G63 to tap threads with compensating chuck. The chuck compensates for any deviations occurring in the path.

Sequence
Tapping The following are programmed Drilling depth in Cartesian coordinates Spindle speed and direction Feed Retraction movement Also programmed with G63, but with the reverse direction of spindle rotation. Feedrate The programmed feed must match the ratio of the speed to the thread lead of the tap. Thumb rule: Feed F in mm/min = spindle speed S in rpm x thread lead in mm/rev Both the feed and the spindle speed override switch are set to 100% with G63.

4-142

12.98

Programming Motion Commands

4.10 Tapping with compensating chuck, G63

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Additional notes
G63 is modal. The last programmed interpolation command G0, G1, G2, is reactivated after a block with programmed G63.

Programming example
Tapping with compensating chuck: In this example, an M5 thread is to be drilled. The lead of an M5 thread is 0.8 (specified in table). With a selected speed of 200 rpm, the feed F is 160 mm/min. N10 N20 N30 N40 G1 X0 Y0 Z2 S200 F1000 M3 G63 Z-50 F160 G63 Z3 M4 M30 Approach starting point, activate spindle Tap, drilling depth 50 Retract, programmed reversal of direction End of program

4-143

Programming Motion Commands

12.98

4.11 Stop during thread cutting

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

4.11

Stop during thread cutting Programming

LFON LFOF DILF

Explanation of the parameters

LFON LFOF DILF Enable fast retraction for thread cutting (G33) Disable fast retraction for thread cutting (G33) Determine retraction path (length)

Function
The function guarantees a nondestructive interruption with thread cutting (G33). The function cannot be used with tapping (G33). With mixed use of both G33 functions, the response can be parameterized for NC Stop/NC Reset via the machine data. Trigger criteria for retraction Fast inputs, programmable with SETINT LIFTFAST (if option LIFTFAST enabled) NC Stop/NC Reset If fast retraction is enabled with LFON, it is active for every retraction movement Retraction path (DILF) The retraction path can be defined in the machine data or by programming. After NC Reset, the value in MD 21200: LIFTFAST_DIST is still active. Retraction direction (up to SW 4.2) The retraction direction is determined within the threading. Retraction is always perpendicular to the direction of machining. ALF is not active.

4-144

12.98

Programming Motion Commands

4.11 Stop during thread cutting

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Retraction direction (SW 4.3 and higher) The retraction direction in connection with ALF is controlled using the following keywords: LFTXT The plane in which the fast retraction is executed is calculated from the path tangent and the tool direction (default setting). LFWP The plane in which the fast retraction is executed is the active working plane. The direction is programmed as before in discrete steps of 45 degrees with ALF in the plane of the retraction motion. With LFTXT, the retraction is defined in the tool direction for ALF=1. With LFWP, the direction in the working plane is assigned as follows: G17: X/Y plane ALF=1 Retraction in X direction ALF=3 Retraction in Y direction G18: Z/X plane ALF=1 Retraction in Z direction ALF=3 Retraction in X direction G19: Y/Z plane ALF=1 Retraction in Y direction ALF=3 Retraction in Z direction Retraction speed Retraction with maximum axis speed. Can be configured via machine data. The maximum permissible acceleration / jerk values are used for traversing; they are configured via the machine data.

Additional notes
Default setting for NC Reset and/or NC Start in MD 20150: GCODE_RESET_VALUES LFON or LFOF can always be programmed, they are evaluated only during thread cutting (G33).

4-145

Programming Motion Commands

12.98

4.11 Stop during thread cutting

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Programming examples
Example 1 N55 M3 S500 G90 G18 ... N65 MSG ("Thread cutting") MM_THREAD: N67 $AC_LIFTFAST=0 N68 N68 N70

Active machining plane

Reset before beginning of thread

N71 N72 N69

G0 Z5 X10 G33 Z30 K5 LFON DILF=10 LFWP ALF=3 Enable fast retraction for thread cutting Retraction path =10mm Return plane Z/X (due to G18) Retraction direction -X (with ALF=3 ; retraction direction +X) G33 Z55 X15 G1 Deactivate thread cutting IF $AC_LIFTFAST GOTOB MM_THREAD If thread cutting was interrupted

N90 MSG("") ... N70 M30 Example 2 N55 M3 S500 G90 G0 X0 Z0 ... N87 MSG ("Tapping") N88 LFOF N89 CYCLE... N90 ... N99 MSG ("") M30

Deactivate fast retraction before tapping. Thread drilling cycle with G33

4-146

12.98

Programming Motion Commands

4.12 Approaching a fixed point, G75

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

4.12

Approaching a fixed point, G75 Programming

G75 FP= X1=0 Y1=0 Z1=0 U1=0

Explanation of the parameters

FP= X1= Y1= Z1= Number of fixed point to be approached Machine axes to be traversed to the fixed point

Function
G75 can be used to approach fixed points, such as tool change locations, loading points, pallet changing points, etc. The positions of the individual points are specified in the machine coordinate system and stored in the machine parameters. You can approach these positions from any NC program, irrespective of the current tool or workpiece position.

Sequence
The fixed point approach is described by a fixed point and axes which are to be traversed to the fixed point FP. Number of the fixed point FP= If no fixed point number is specified, fixed point 1 is automatically approached. Two fixed point positions per machine axis can be specified in the machine parameters. Machine axis addresses X1, Y1 Here, you specify with value 0 the axes with which the point is to be approached simultaneously. Each axis traverses at the maximum axial velocity.

4-147

Programming Motion Commands

12.98

4.12 Approaching a fixed point, G75

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Additional notes
G75 is modal. Kinematic transformation must be deselected before fixed point approach is performed.

Programming example
The tool change location is a fixed point which is defined in the machine data. This point can be approached in any NC program with G75. N10 N20 N30 G75 FP=2 X1=0 Y1=0 Z1=0 G75 X1=0 M30 Retract from fixed point 2 on X, Y and Z, e.g. for tool change Approach fixed point X1 End of program

4-148

12.98

Programming Motion Commands

4.13 Travel to fixed stop

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

4.13

Travel to fixed stop Programming

FXS[axis]= FXST[axis]= FXSW[axis]=

Explanation
FXS FXST FXSW [axis] Activate/deactivate function "Travel to fixed stop" 1 = select; 0 = deselect Setting clamping torque Specification in % of maximum drive torque, parameter optional Window width for fixed stop monitoring in mm, inches or degrees; parameter optional Machine axis name

Function
The "Travel to fixed stop" function (FXS = Fixed Stop) enables generation of a defined power for clamping workpieces as is required, for example, for tailstocks, quills and grippers. Mechanical reference points can also be approached with this function. With sufficiently reduced torque, it is also possible to perform simple measurement operations without connecting a probe. The "Travel to fixed stop" function can be used for axes and spindles operated as axes.
Progr. end position Actual position after "Travel to fixed stop"

Starting position

Fixed stop monitoring window

Sequence
The commands are modal. Addresses FXST and FXSW are optional: if no parameter is specified, the last programmed value or the value set in the machine data apply.

Machine manufacturer (MH4.3)

Machine axes (X1, Y1, Z1 etc.) are programmed. (see machine manufacturer's specifications)

4-149

Programming Motion Commands

12.98

4.13 Travel to fixed stop

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Activate travel to fixed stop FXS=1 The movement to the destination point can be described as a path or positioning axis movement. With positioning axes, the function can be performed across block boundaries. Travel to fixed stop can be performed simultaneously for several axes and parallel to the movement of other axes. The fixed stop must be located between the start and end positions. Example: X250 Y100 F100 FXS[X1]=1 FXST[X1]=12.3 FXSW[X1]=2 Meaning: Axis X1 travels with feed F100 (parameter optional) to destination position X=250 mm. The clamping torque is 12.3% of the maximum drive torque. Monitoring is performed in a 2-mm wide window.

From the moment the "Travel to fixed point" function is activated for an axis/spindle, you may no longer program a new position for this axis. Spindles must be switched to position-controlled mode before the function is selected.
When the fixed stop has been reached: The distance-to-go is deleted and the position setpoint is manipulated, The drive torque increases to the programmed limit value FXSW and then remains constant, Fixed stop monitoring is activated within the specified window width. Deactivate function FXS=0 Deselection of the function triggers a preprocessor stop. Traversing movements may and should be programmed in a block with FXS=0.

4-150

12.98

Programming Motion Commands

4.13 Travel to fixed stop

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Example: X200 Y400 G01 G94 F2000 FXS[X1] = 0 Meaning: Axis X1 is retracted from the fixed stop to position X= 200 mm. All other parameters are optional.

The traversing movement to the retraction position must move away from the fixed stop, otherwise damage to the stop or to the machine may result.
The block change takes place when the retraction position has been reached. If no retraction position is specified, the block change takes place immediately the torque limit has been deactivated. Clamping torque FXST, monitoring window FXSW A programmed torque limit FXST is effective from the start of the block, i.e. the fixed stop is also approached with reduced torque.

The window must be selected such that only a breakaway from the fixed stop causes the fixed stop monitoring to be addressed.
FXST and FXSW can be programmed or changed at any time in the part program. Example: FXST[X1]=34.57 FXST[X1]=34.57 FXSW[X1]=5 FXSW[X1]=5

The changes take effect before traversing movements in the same block. Programming of a new fixed stop monitoring window causes a change not only in the window width but also in the reference point for the center of the window if the axis has moved prior to reprogramming. The actual position of the machine axis when the window is changed is the new window center point.

4-151

Programming Motion Commands

12.98

4.13 Travel to fixed stop

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Additional notes
Combination "Measure and delete distance-to-go" ("MEAS" command) and "Travel to fixed stop" cannot be programmed in the same block. Exception: One function acts on a path axis and the other on a positioning axis or both act on positioning axes. Contour monitoring Contour monitoring is not performed while "Travel to fixed stop" is active. Positioning axes With "Travel to fixed stop" with POSA axes, the block change takes place independently of the fixed stop movement. Restrictions Travel to fixed stop cannot be programmed for vertical axes, (function can be used with SW 2.2. and later on 840D with 611D) gantry axes, for concurrent positioning axes which are controlled exclusively by the PLC (FXS must be selected from the NC program).

4-152

12.98

Programming Motion Commands

4.14 Special turning functions

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

4.14

Special turning functions

4.14.1 Position of workpiece

Coordinate system
Transverse axis M

The two mutually perpendicular geometry axes are usually designated as follows: Longitudinal axis Transverse axis = Z axis (abscissa) = X axis (ordinate)

The dimensions for the facing axis are generally specified as diameter measurements (double path dimension as compared to other axes). The geometry axis to be used as a transverse axis is defined in machine data.

W D1 D2 Z

Longitudinal axis

Zero points Both the machine zero and the workpiece zero are positioned on the center of rotation. The settable offset on the X axis is thus zero. While the machine zero is fixed, you can choose the position for the workpiece zero on the longitudinal axis. The workpiece zero is generally located on the front or rear side of the workpiece. The position of the workpiece zero is called with commands G54 to G599 or TRANS.

X Machine

X Workpiece W Z Workpiece

Workpiece zero front

G54 ... G599 or TRANS X Machine X Workpiece

Workpiece zero rear

M Z Z Workpiece

G54 ... G599 or TRANS

4-153

Programming Motion Commands

12.98 05.98

4.14 Special turning functions

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

4.14.2 Dimensions for: radius, diameter Programming

DIAMON DIAMOF DIAM90 (SW 4.4 and later)

Explanation
Absolute dimensioning (G90)
DIAMOF DIAMON DIAM90 Radius (for default, see machine manufacturer) Diameter Diameter

Incremental dimensioning (G91)

Radius Diameter Radius

Function
The free choice of diameter or radius dimensions allows you to program the dimensions straight from the engineering drawing without conversion. After activating DIAMON/DIAM90, diameter dimensions are defined for the specified transverse axis. Diameter values apply to the following data: Actual-value display of transverse axis in the workpiece coordinate system JOG mode: Increments for incremental dimension and travel with handwheel Programming: End positions, independent of G90/G91 interpolation parameters for G2/G3, if these are programmed with AC absolute Read actual values in workpiece coordinate system for MEAS, MEAW, $P_EP[X], $AA_IW[X] (see Advanced) By programming DIAMOF you can switch at any time to radius as dimension.

DIAMON

DIAMOF

R15

W D30 D20 Z

R10

W Z

4-154

12.98 05.98

Programming Motion Commands

4.14 Special turning functions

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Additional notes
In SW 4.4 and higher, the command DIAM90 sets diameter programming for G90 and radius programming for G91. After DIAM90 is activated, the actual value of the transverse axis is always displayed as a diameter, irrespective of the type of traversing (G90/G91). This also applies to reading of actual values in the workpiece coordinate system with MEAS, MEAW, $P_EP[x] and $AA_IW[x].

Programming example
N10 G0 X0 Z0 N20 DIAMOF N30 G1 X30 S2000 M03 F0.7 Approach starting point Diameter input off X axis = transverse axis; radius dimensions active Traverse to radius position X30 Diameter dimensions active Traverse to diameter position X70 and Z20 Diameter programming for absolute dimensions and radius programming for incremental dimensions Incremental dimensions Absolute dimensions End of program

N40 DIAMON N50 G1 X70 Z-20 N60 Z-30 N70 DIAM90

N80 G91 X10 Z-20 N90 G90 X10 N100 M30

4-155

Programming Motion Commands

12.98

4.15 Chamfer, rounding

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

4.15

Chamfer, rounding Programming

CHF= CHR= RND= RNDM= FRC= FRCM=

Explanation of the commands

CHF= CHR= Chamfer the contour corner Value = Length of the chamfer (unit of measurement according to G70/G71) Chamfer the contour corner (SW 3.5 and higher). Programming the chamfer in the original direction of movement. Value = length of chamfer in direction of motion (unit of measurement as above) Round the contour corner Value = Radius of the rounding (unit of measurement according to G70/G71) Modal rounding: Rounding several consecutive contour corners in the same way. Value = radius of roundings (unit of measurement according to G70/G71) 0: Deactivate modal rounding Non-modal feedrate for chamfer/rounding Value = feedrate in mm/min (G94) or mm/rev (G95); FRC > 0 Modal feedrate for chamfer/rounding Value = feedrate in mm/min (G94) or mm/rev (G95) 0: Feedrate programmed at F for chamfer/rounding active

RND= RNDM=

FRC= FRCM=

Function
You can insert the following elements at a contour corner: Chamfer or Rounding If you wish to round several contour corners sequentially by the same method, use command RNDM "Modal rounding". You can program the feedrate for the chamfer/rounding with FRC (non-modal) or FRCM (modal). If FRC/FRCM is not programmed, then the normal path feedrate F is applicable.

4-156

12.98

Programming Motion Commands

4.15 Chamfer, rounding

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Sequence
Chamfer, CHF/CHR For the chamfer insert another linear part, the chamfer, between the linear and the circle contours in any combination. The chamfer is inserted after the block in which it is programmed. The chamfer is always in the plane activated with G17 to G19. Example: N30 G1 X Z F CHR=2 N40 G1 X Z or N30 G1 X Z F CHF=2(cos 2) N40 G1 X Z
e.g. G18: Z

CHR
CH F

Chamfer
1 G

Bisector

Rounding, RND A circle contour element can be inserted with tangential link between the linear and the circle contours in any combination. The rounding is always in the plane activated with G17 to G19. The figure to the right shows the rounding between two straight lines. N30 G1 X Z F RND=2 Example: Here, the figure shows the rounding between a straight line and a circle. N30 G1 X Z F RND=2 N40 G3 X Z I K Modal rounding, RNDM This address is for inserting a rounding between linear and circle contours after each traversing block. This is, for example, for deburring sharp workpiece edges. Example: N30 G1 X Z F RNDM=2

Rounding is deactivated with RNDM=0.

4-157

Programming Motion Commands

12.98

4.15 Chamfer, rounding

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Feed FRC (non-modal), FRCM (modal) To optimize surface quality, it is possible to program a separate feedrate for the chamfer/rounding contour elements. FRC is non-modal in this instance, FRCM is modal. See below for examples

Additional info about chamfer/rounding

If the programmed values for chamfer (CHF/CHR) or rounding (RND/RNDM) are too large for the associated contour elements, then the chamfer or rounding are automatically reduced to a suitable value. No chamfer/rounding is inserted, if no straight or circle is available in the plane, a movement is taking place outside the plane, a plane change is taking place, or the number of blocks - which is specified in the machine data - not containing information for traversing (e.g. only command output), is exceeded.

Additional info about FRC/FRCM

FRC/FRCM has no effect if a chamfer is being machined with G0; the command can be programmed according to the F value without error message. The reference to the blocks in which chamfer and rounding are programmed and to the technology is set in machine data. FRC is operative only if a chamfer/rounding is programmed in the same block or if RNDM has been activated.

4-158

12.98

Programming Motion Commands

4.15 Chamfer, rounding

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

FRC overwrites the F or FRCM value in the current block. The feedrate programmed under FRC must be greater than zero. FRCM=0 activates the feed programmed in F for the chamfer/rounding. If FRCM is programmed, the FRCM value must be re-programmed, analogous to F, on changeover G94 - G95 etc. If only a new F value is programmed, and if FRCM > 0 before the feed type changes, error message 10860 (No feed programmed) will be activated.

Examples
Example 1: MD CHFRND_MODE_MASK Bit 0 = 0: Accept technology from next block (default) N10 G0 X0 Y0 G17 F100 G94 N20 G1 X10 CHF=2 N30 Y10 CHF=4 N40 X20 CHF=3 FRC=200 N50 RNDM=2 FRCM=50 N60 Y20 N70 X30 N80 Y30 CHF=3 FRC=100 N90 X40 N100 Y40 FRCM=0 N110 S1000 M3 N120 X50 G95 F3 FRC=1 ... M02 ; Modal rounding N60-N70 with FRCM=50 mm/min ; Modal rounding N70-N80 with FRCM=100 mm/min ; Chamfer N80-N90 with FRC=50 mm/min (modal) ; Modal rounding N90-N100 with F=100 mm/min (deselect FRCM) ; Modal rounding N100-N120 with G95 FRC=1 mm/rev ; Chamfer N20-N30 with F=100 mm/min ; Chamfer N30-N40 with FRC=200 mm/min ; Chamfer N40-N60 with FRCM=50 mm/min

4-159

Programming Motion Commands

12.98

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Example 2: MD CHFRND_MODE_MASK Bit 0 = 1: Accept technology from preceding block (recommended) N10 G0 X0 Y0 G17 F100 G94 N20 G1 X10 CHF=2 N30 Y10 CHF=4 FRC=120 N40 X20 CHF=3 FRC=200 N50 RNDM=2 FRCM=50 N60 Y20 N70 X30 N80 Y30 CHF=3 FRC=100 N90 X40 N100 Y40 FRCM=0 N110 S1000 M3 N120 X50 CHF=4 G95 F3 FRC=1 N130 Y50 N140 X60 ... M02 ; Chamfer N120-N130 with G95 FRC= 1 mm/rev ; Modal rounding N130-N140 with F=3 mm/rev ; Modal rounding N60-N70 with FRCM=50 mm/min ; Modal rounding N70-N80 with FRCM=50 mm/min ; Chamfer N80-N90 with FRC=100 mm/min ; Modal rounding N90-N100 with FRCM=50 mm/min ; Modal rounding N100-N120 with F=100 mm/min ; Chamfer N20-N30 with F=100 mm/min ; Chamfer N30-N40 with FRC=120 mm/min ; Chamfer N40-N60 with FRCM=200 mm/min

4-160

12.98

Path Action

5-161

Path Action

12.98

5.1 Exact stop, G60, G9, G601, G602, G603

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

5.1

Exact stop, G60, G9, G601, G602, G603 Explanation of the commands
G60 G9 G601 G602 G603 Exact stop, modal Exact stop, non-modal Step enable if positioning window fine reached Step enable if positioning window coarse reached Step enable if setpoint (end of interpolation) reached

Function
The exact positioning stop functions are used to machine sharp outside corners or for finishing inside corners to size.

Sequence
Exact stop, G60, G9 G9 generates the exact stop in the current block. G60 generates the exact stop in the current block and all subsequent blocks. G60 is deactivated by the continuous-path mode functions G64 or G641.Positioning window. G601/G602 The movement is decelerated and stopped briefly at the corner point. With the exact stop criteria G601 and G602, you determine how accurately the corner point is approached and when the change to the next block takes place. Exact stops fine and coarse can be defined for each axis in machine data.

Block step enable G601 G602

5-162

12.98

Path Action

5.1 Exact stop, G60, G9, G601, G602, G603

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Note: Set the exact stop limits no tighter than you require. The tighter the limits, the longer it takes to position and approach the target position. End of interpolation, G603 The block change is initiated when the control has calculated a set speed of zero for the axes involved. At this point, the actual value lags behind by a proportionate factor depending on the dynamic response of the axes and the path velocity. The workpiece corners can now be rounded. Command output In all three cases the following applies: The auxiliary functions programmed in the NC block are enabled after the end of the movement.

Block change

Programmed path

Traversed path with F1 Traversed path with F2 F1 < F2

G601, G602 and G603 are only effective if G60 or G9 are active.
Example: N10 G601 N50 G1 G60 X Y

5-163

Path Action

12.98

5.2 Continuous-path mode, G64, G641

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

5.2

Continuous-path mode, G64, G641 Programming

G64 G641 ADIS= G641 ADISPOS=

Explanation of the commands

G64 G641 ADIS= ADISPOS= Continuous-path mode Continuous-path mode with programmable transition rounding Approximate distance for path functions G1, G2, G3 Approximate distance for rapid traverse G0

Function
In continuous-path mode, the contour is machined with as constant a path velocity as possible. The uniform velocity also establishes better cutting conditions, improves the surface quality and reduces the machining time.

In continuous-path mode, travel does not take place exactly to the programmed contour transitions. You can generate sharp corners with G60 or G09. The continuous-path mode is interrupted by text outputs with "MSG" and blocks that implicitly trigger a preprocessor stop (e.g. access to certain machine status data ($A...)). The same applies to auxiliary function outputs; see Section 9 Special Functions.

5-164

12.98

Path Action

5.2 Continuous-path mode, G64, G641

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Sequence
C st on

Continuous-path mode, G64 In continuous-path mode, the tool travels across tangential contour transitions with as constant a path velocity as possible (no deceleration at block boundaries). Look Ahead deceleration takes place before corners (G09) and blocks with exact stop (Look Ahead, see following pages). Corners are also traversed at a constant velocity. In order to minimize the contour error, the velocity is reduced according to an acceleration limit and an overload factor, see References: /FB/ B1 Continuous-path mode The overload factor can be set in machine data 32310 (see /FB/ B1, Continuous-path mode). The extent of smoothing of the contour transitions depends on the feedrate and the overload factor. With G641 you can specify the desired rounding area explicitly (see following pages). Rounding cannot and should not replace the functions for defined smoothing: RND, RNDM, ASPLINE, BSPLINE, CSPLINE. Continuous-path mode with programmable transition rounding, G641 With G641, the control inserts transition elements at contour transitions. With ADIS= or ADISPOS= you can specify the extent to which the corners are rounded. The effect of G641 is similar to RNDM, however it is not restricted to the axes of the working plane. Example: N10 G641 ADIS=0.5 G1 X Y

t an ty ci lo ve

max. 0.5 mm

Programmed contour end ADIS/ADISPOS max. 0.5 mm

The approximate positioning block can begin 0.5 mm before the programmed end of block at the earliest and must be finished 0.5 mm after the end of the block.

5-165

Path Action

12.98

5.2 Continuous-path mode, G64, G641

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

This setting remains modal. G641 also operates with Look Ahead speed control (see following pages). Corner rounding blocks with a high degree of curvature are approached at reduced velocity.

Additional notes
Rounding cannot be used as a substitute for smoothing (RND). The user should not make any assumptions with respect to the appearance of the contour within the rounding area. The type of rounding can depend on dynamic conditions, e.g. on the tool path velocity. Rounding on the contour is therefore only practical with small ADIS values. RND must be used if a defined contour is to be followed at the corner in all circumstances. ADISPOS is used between G0 blocks. This enables the axis movement to be smoothed substantially and the traversing time to be reduced during positioning. If ADIS/ADISPOS is not programmed, the value zero is valid and therefore the same traverse behavior as of G64. With shorter paths, the approximate distance is reduced automatically (up to max. 36%). Continuous-path mode G64/G641 over more than one block The following points should be noted, in order to prevent an undesired stop in the path motion (backing off): Auxiliary function outputs trigger a stop (exception: high-speed auxiliary functions and auxiliary functions during movements) Intermediate blocks which contain only comments, calculation blocks or subprogram calls do not affect the movement. No rounding block No rounding block is inserted in the following three situations: 1. A halt is made between the two blocks. This occurs when ...

5-166

12.98

Path Action

5.2 Continuous-path mode, G64, G641

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

The following block contains an auxiliary function output before the movement. The following block does not contain a path movement. An axis is traversed for the first time as a path axis for the following block and it was previously a positioning axis. An axis is traversed for the first time as a positioning axis for the following block and it was previously a path axis. The previous block traverses geo axes and the following block does not (this is no longer the case in SW 4 and higher). Prior to thread cutting: The following block has G33 as a preparatory function and the previous block does not. A changeover between BRISK and SOFT occurs. Axes involved in the transformation are not completely assigned to the path motion (e.g. for oscillation, positioning axes). 2. The rounding block would slow down part program execution. This occurs when ... A rounding block is inserted between very short blocks. Since each block requires at least one interpolation cycle, the added intermediate block would double the machining time. A block transition G64 (continuous-path mode without rounding) can be traversed without speed reduction. Rounding would increase the machining time. 3. Rounding is not parameterized. This occurs when ... ADISPOS == 0 in G0 blocks (default!) ADIS == 0 in non-G0 blocks (default!) For transition from G0 to non-G0 or non-G0 to G0, the smaller value of ADISPOS and ADIS applies.

5-167

Path Action

12.98

5.2 Continuous-path mode, G64, G641

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Positioning axes Positioning axes always traverse according to the exact stop principle, positioning window fine (as for G601). If an NC block has to wait for positioning axes, continuous-path mode is interrupted on the path axes. Command outputs Auxiliary functions which are enabled after the end of the movement or before the next movement interrupt continuous-path mode. Look Ahead velocity control, Look Ahead In continuous-path mode with G64 or G641, the control automatically detects the velocity control in advance for several NC blocks. This enables acceleration and deceleration across multiple blocks with almost tangential transitions. Look Ahead is particularly suitable for the machining of movement sequences comprising short traverse paths with high path feedrates. The number of NC blocks included in the Look Ahead calculation can be defined in machine data.

Velocity pattern with G60/G64

v G64 with Look Ahead Programmed feed e.g. G64 with insufficient Look Ahead G60, G603

N1 N2 N3

N5 N6

N7 N8

Look Ahead across more than one block is an option. Continuous-path mode in rapid traverse G0 One of the functions G60/G9 or G64/G641 must also be specified for rapid traverse. Otherwise, the default in the machine data is used.

5-168

12.98

Path Action

5.2 Continuous-path mode, G64, G641

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Programming example
With this workpiece, the two outside corners at the groove are approached exactly. All other machining takes place in continuous-path mode.
Y Exact stop fine Y

70 50 40
10

10 60 80 100

X 7

N05 N10 N20 N30 N40 N50 N60 N70 N80 N90 N100 N110 N120 N130

DIAMOF G17 T1 G41 G0 X10 Y10 Z2 S300 M3 G1 Z-7 F8000 G641 ADIS=0.5 Y40 X60 Y70 G60 G601 Y50 X80 Y70 G641 ADIS=0.5 X100 Y40 X80 Y 10 X10 G40 G0 X-20 Z10 M30

Radius as dimension Approach starting position, activate spindle, path compensation Tool infeed Contour transitions are smoothed Approach exact position with exact stop fine

Contour transitions are smoothed

Deactivate path compensation Retract tool, end of program

5-169

Path Action

12.98

5.3 Acceleration pattern, BRISK, SOFT, DRIVE

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

5.3

Acceleration pattern, BRISK, SOFT, DRIVE Explanation of the commands

BRISK BRISKA(axis 1, axis 2,) SOFT SOFTA(axis1,axis2,) DRIVE Brisk acceleration of path axes Switch on brisk axis acceleration for the programmed axes Soft acceleration of path axes Switch on soft axis acceleration for the programmed axes Reduction of acceleration above a speed for path axes that can be set in $MA_ACCEL_REDUCTION_SPEED_POINT (only applicable for FM-NC) Reduction of acceleration above a speed for programmed axes that can be set in $MA_ACCEL_REDUCTION_SPEED_POINT (only applicable for FM-NC) The acceleration behavior set in machine data $MA_POS_AND JOG_JERK_ENABLE or $MA_ACCEL_TYPE_DRIVE is active for the programmed axes

DRIVEA(axis1,axis2,)

JERKA(axis1,axis2,)

Function
BRISK, BRISKA The axis slides travel with maximum acceleration until the feedrate is reached. BRISK enables timeoptimized machining, but with jumps in the acceleration curve. SOFT, SOFTA The axis slides travel with constant acceleration until the feedrate is reached. Soft acceleration enables higher path accuracy and less wear and tear on the machine. Example: N10 G1 X Y F900 SOFT N20 BRISKA(AX5,AX6)
Path veloctity

Setpoint

BRISK (time-optimized)

SOFT (reduced wear on mechanical equipment)

Time

5-170

12.98

Path Action

5.3 Acceleration pattern, BRISK, SOFT, DRIVE

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Additional notes
A change between BRISK and SOFT causes a stop at the block transition. The acceleration response for the path axes can be defined in machine data.

Function
DRIVE, DRIVEA The axis slides traverse at the maximum acceleration rate up to the speed limit set in the machine data. The acceleration rate is then reduced according to machine data until the feedrate speed is reached. This function allows the acceleration characteristic to be optimally adapted to a specific motor characteristic, for example, for stepper motor applications. Example: N05 DRIVE N10 G1 X Y F1000 N20 DRIVEA (AX4, AX6)
Setpoint
Limit of constant acceleration

Path velocity
Time

5-171

Path Action

12.98

5.4 Overview of the various velocity controls

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

5.4

Overview of the various velocity controls

X Contour curve N1, G1 N5, G2 N6, G1 N2, G3 N4, G3 N3, G1 N7, G0

VPath = Path velocity

G60 G601

(Wait time with G60)

t N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7

VPath

G60 G603

(Without wait time)

t N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7

VPath

G64 BRISK

t N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7

VPath G64 SOFT Rapid traverse

t N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7

5-172

12.98

Path Action

5.5 Traversing with feedforward control, FFWON, FFWOF

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

5.5

Traversing with feedforward control, FFWON, FFWOF Explanation of the commands

FFWON FFWOF Activate feedforward control Deactivate feedforward control

Function
Feedforward control reduces the speed-dependent overtravel when contouring towards zero. Traversing with feedforward control permits higher path accuracy and thus improved machining results. Example: N10 FFWON N20 G1 X Y F900 SOFT

Additional notes
The type of feedforward control and which path axes feedforward traversing is to be applied to are determined via machine data. Default: Optional: Velocity-dependent feedforward control Acceleration-dependent feedforward control (not possible with FM-NC, 810D)

5-173

Path Action

12.98

5.6 Programmable contour accuracy, CPRECON, CPRECOF

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

5.6

Programmable contour accuracy, CPRECON, CPRECOF Explanation of the commands

CPRECON CPRECOF Activate programmable contour accuracy Deactivate programmable contour accuracy

Function
In machining operations without feedforward control (FFWON), errors may occur on curved contours as the result of speed-related differences between setpoint and actual positions. The programmable contour accuracy function CPRECON makes it possible to store a maximum permissible contour error in the NC program. The magnitude of the contour error is specified with setting data $SC_CONTPREC. On the basis of this data and the servo gain factor (speed / following error ratio) of the path axes concerned, the control calculates the maximum path speed at which the contour error produced by the overtravel does not exceed the minimum value stored in the setting data. The Look Ahead function allows the entire path to be traversed with the programmed contour accuracy.

Example:
N10 X0 Y0 G0 N20 CPRECON N30 F10000 G1 G64 X100 N40 G3 Y20 J10 N50 X0 ;Activate contour accuracy ;Machine contour at 10 m/min in continuous-path mode ;Automatic feed limitation in circle block ;Feed without limitation to 10m/min

Additional notes
A minimum velocity can be defined in the setting data $SC_MINFEED; the feed must not be less than this value.

5-174

12.98

Path Action

5.7 Dwell time, G4

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

5.7

Dwell time, G4 Programming

G4 F G4 S (Programmed in a separate NC block)

Explanation of the commands

G4 F S Activate dwell time Time specified in seconds Time specified in revolutions of the master spindle

Function
You can use G4 to interrupt workpiece machining between two NC blocks for the programmed length of time, e.g. for relief cutting.

Sequence
Example: N10 G1 F200 Z-5 S300 M3 ;Feed F, spindle speed S N20 G4 F3 ;Dwell time 3s N30 X40 Y10 N40 G4 S30 ;Dwell for 30 revolutions of spindle, with S=300 rpm and 100% speed override, equals: t=0.1min N40 X... ;Feed and spindle speed still active

The words with F... and S... are used for time specifications in the block with G4 only. Any previously programmed feed F and spindle speed S remain valid.

5-175

Path Action

12.98

5.8 Program sequence: Internal preprocessor stop

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

5.8

Program sequence: Internal preprocessor stop Function

The control generates an internal preprocessor stop on access to machine status data ($A). If a command which generates an implicit preprocessor stop is read in the following block, the following block is not executed until all previously prepared and stored blocks have been processed completely. The previous block is halted with an exact stop (like G9). Example: N40 POSA[X]=100 N50 IF $AA_IM[X]==R100 GOTOF MARKE1 N60 G0 Y100 N70 WAITP(X) N80 MARKE1: Machining stops in block N50.

; Access to machine status data ($A), the control generates an internal preprocessor stop

5-176

12.98

Frames

6-177

Frames

12.98

6.1 General

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

6.1

General
What is a frame? Frame is the conventional term for a geometrical expression that describes an arithmetic rule, such as translation or rotation. Frames are used to describe the position of a destination coordinate system by specifying coordinates or angles starting from the current workpiece coordinate system. Possible frames Basic frame (basic offset) Settable frames (G54...G599) Programmable frames References: /PG/, Programming Guide Advanced

Machine manufacturer (MH6.1)

Settable frames: See machine manufacturer's specifications Milling: Frame components A frame can consist of the following arithmetic rules: Translation, TRANS, ATRANS Rotation, ROT, AROT Scale, SCALE, ASCALE Mirroring, MIRROR, AMIRROR
Y Y

X TRANS, ATRANS ROT AROT Y

The above frame instructions are programmed in separate NC blocks and executed in the programmed order.
SCALE, ASCALE

X MIRROR,AMIRROR

6-178

12.98

Frames

6.2 Frame instructions

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Turning:
X X

Z TRANS, ATRANS ROT AROT X

Z SCALE, ASCALE MIRROR,AMIRROR

6.2

Frame instructions
Basic frame (basic offset) The basic frame describes the coordinate transformation from the Basic Coordinate System (BCS) to the Basic Zero System (BZS) and has the same effect as for settable frames. Settable instructions Settable instructions are the zero offsets which can be called from any NC program with the commands G54 to G599. The offset values are predefined by the user and stored in the zero offset memory on the control. This is used to define the Workpiece Coordinate System (WCS). Programmable instructions Programmable instructions (TRANS, ROT, ) are valid in the current NC program and refer to the settable instructions. The programmable frame is used to define the Workpiece Coordinate System (WCS). Substituting instructions TRANS, ROT, SCALE and MIRROR are substituting instructions.

6-179

Frames

12.98

6.2 Frame instructions

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

This means that each of these instructions cancels all other previously programmed frame instructions.
The last called settable zero offset G54 to G599 is used as the reference. Additive instructions ATRANS, AROT, ASCALE and AMIRROR are additive instructions. The currently set zero point or the last workpiece zero to be programmed with frame instructions is used as the reference. The above instructions are added to existing frames. Note: Additive instructions are frequently used in subprograms. The basic functions defined in the main program are not lost after the end of the subprogram if the subprogram has been programmed with the SAVE attribute.

6-180

12.98

Frames

6.3 Programmable zero offset

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

6.3

Programmable zero offset

6.3.1 TRANS, ATRANS Programming

TRANS X Y Z (programmed in a separate NC block) ATRANS X Y Z (programmed in a separate NC block)

Explanation of the commands and parameters

TRANS ATRANS X Y Z Absolute zero offset, with reference to the currently valid workpiece zero set with G54 to G599 as TRANS, but with additive zero offset Offset value in the direction of the specified geometry axis Milling:
Z ZM YM Y

Function
TRANS/ATRANS can be used to program translations for all path and positioning axes in the direction of the specified axis. This allows you to work with different zero points, for example when performing recurring machining processes at different workpiece positions.

TRAN S

X
G 54

6-181

Frames

12.98

6.3 Programmable zero offset

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Turning:

Z
M W

G54

TRANS

Sequence
Substituting instruction, TRANS X Y Z Translation through the offset values programmed in the specified axis directions (path, synchronized axes and positioning axes). The last specified settable zero offset (G54 to G599) is used as a reference.

The TRANS command cancels all frame components of the previously activated programmable frame.
You can use ATRANS to program a translation which is to be added to existing frames. Additive instruction, ATRANS X Y Z Translation through the offset values programmed in the specified axis directions. The currently set or last programmed zero point is used as the reference. Deactivate programmable zero offset For all axes: TRANS (without axis parameter) 1 Here, all previously programmed frames are canceled. The settable zero offset remains programmed.

6-182

12.98

Frames

6.3 Programmable zero offset

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Programming example:
With this workpiece, the illustrated shapes recur several times in the same program. The machining sequence for this shape is stored in a subprogram. You use the translation to set only those workpiece zeroes and then call up the subprogram.

Milling:

X 10

G 54

X 10 50

N10 N20 N30 N40 N50 N60 N70

G1 G54 G0 X0 Y0 Z2 TRANS X10 Y10 L10 TRANS X50 Y10 L10 M30

Working plane X/Y, workpiece zero Approach starting point Absolute offset Subprogram call Absolute offset Subprogram call End of program Turning:
X

Z
M W

130 140 150

6-183

Frames

12.98

6.3 Programmable zero offset

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

N.. N10 N15 N20 N25 N30 N35 N..

... TRANS X0 Z150 L20 TRANS X0 Z140 (or ATRANS Z-10) L20 TRANS X0 Z130 (or ATRANS Z-10) L20 ... Absolute offset Subprogram call Absolute offset Subprogram call Absolute offset Subprogram call

6.3.2 G58, G59: Axial programmable ZO (SW 5 and later) Programming

G58 X Y Z A (programmed in a separate NC block) G59 X Y Z A (programmed in a separate NC block)

Explanation of the commands and parameters

G58 Replaces the absolute translation component of the programmable zero offset 58 : 1 961/ 10 - 9 .;: : 1 685 8-3310 -00 : 1 5 91: 813- 49 -2 0, (in relation to the workpiece zero set with G54 to G599) Replaces the absolute translation component of the programmable zero offset 58 : 1 961/ 10 - 9 .;: : 1 685 8-3310 -.952;:1 5 91: 813- 49
-2 0

G59

X Y Z

Offset value in the direction of the specified geometry axis

6-184

12.98

Frames

6.3 Programmable zero offset

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Function
G58 and G59 allow translation components of the programmable zero offset (frame) to be replaced for specific axes. The translation function comprises the absolute component (G58, coarse offset) additive component (G59, fine offset) These functions can only be used when the fine offset is configured. If G58 or G59 is used without a configured fine offset, alarm "18312 channel %1 block %2 frame: Fine offset not configured" is output.

Machine manufacturer (MH6.2)

The fine offset must be configured via MD for this function.
& : 1 -.952;:1 :8-492-: 54 /5365414: 9 350 1 5225 &$ &$ % 4 % /533-409 10 .

$P_PFRAME[X,TR]
& : 1 -00 : 1 5225 &$ &$ % 1 :8-492-: 54 /5365414: 9 350 4 % /533-409 10 .

$P_PFRAME[X,FI] The table below describes the effect of various program commands on the absolute and additive offsets.

6-185

Frames

12.98

6.3 Programmable zero offset

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Effect of the additive/absolute offset:

Command TRANS X10 G58 X10 ATRANS X10 G59 X10 $P_PFRAME[X,FI] = 10 CTRANS(X,10) CTRANS() CFINE(X,10) Rough or absolute Fine or additive Comment offset offset 10 Unchanged Absolute offset for X 10 Unchanged Unchanged Unchanged 10 0 0 Unchanged Unchanged Fine (old) + 10 10 10 0 0 10 Overwrites absolute offset for X Prog. offset in X Additive offset for X Overwrites additive offset for X Prog. fine offset in X offset for X Deselection of offset (including fine offset component) Fine offset in X

$P_PFRAME[X,TR] = 10 10

Programming example:
N... N50 TRANS X10 Y10 Z10 N60 ATRANS X5 Y5 N70 G58 X20 N80 G59 X10 Y10

; absolute translation component X10 Y10 Z10 additive translation component X5 Y5

:5:-2 5 91:

absolute translation component X20 + addit. X5 Y5

:5:-2 5 91:

additive translation component X10 Y10 + absolute. X20 Y 10

:5:-2 5 91:

N...

6-186

12.98

Frames

6.4 Programmable rotation, ROT, AROT

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

6.4

Programmable rotation, ROT, AROT Programming

ROT X Y Z ROT RPL= AROTX Y Z AROT RPL= Each instruction must be programmed in a separate NC block. Explanation of the commands and parameters ROT AROT X Y Z RPL Absolute rotation with reference to the currently valid workpiece zero set with G54 to G599 Additive rotation with reference to the currently valid set or programmed zero point Rotation in space: geometry axes around which the rotation takes place Rotation in the plane: Angle through which the coordinate system is rotated (plane set with G17-G19)

Function
ROT/AROT can be used to rotate the workpiece coordinate system around each of the geometry axes X, Y, Z or through an angle RPL in the selected working plane G17 to G19 (or around the perpendicular infeed axis). This allows inclined surfaces or several workpiece sides to be machined in one setting.

6-187

Frames

12.98

6.4 Programmable rotation, ROT, AROT

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Sequence: Rotation in space

Substituting instruction, ROT X Y Z The coordinate system is rotated through the programmed angle around the specified axes. The center of rotation is the last specified settable zero offset (G54 to G599).

The ROT command cancels all frame components of the previously activated programmable frame.
A new rotation based on existing frames is programmed with AROT.

Additive instruction, AROT X Y Z Rotation through the angle values programmed in the axis direction parameters. The center of rotation is the currently set or last programmed zero point.

ROT

OT AR
X

Note
For both instructions, please note the order and direction of rotation in which the rotations are performed (see next page).

6-188

12.98

Frames

6.4 Programmable rotation, ROT, AROT

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Direction of rotation The following is defined as the positive direction of rotation: The view in the direction of the positive coordinate axis and clockwise rotation.

Order of rotation You can rotate up to three geometry axes simultaneously in one NC block. The order of the RPY notation (= Roll, Pitch, Yaw) or Euler angle through which the rotations are performed can be defined in machine parameters. RPY notation is the default setting. This defines the order of rotation as follows: 1. Rotation around the 3rd geometry axis (Z) 2. Rotation around the 2nd geometry axis (Y) 3. Rotation around the 1st geometry axis (X) This order applies if the geometry axes are programmed in a single block. It also applies irrespective of the input sequence. If only two axes are to be rotated, the parameter for the 3rd axis (value zero) can be omitted. Value range Rotation around 1st geometry axis: 180 to +180 Rotation around 2nd geometry axis: 89.999 to +90 Rotation around 3rd geometry axis: 180 to +180 All possible rotations can be represented with this value range. Values outside the range are normalized by the control into the above range. This value range applies to all frame variables.

6-189

Frames

12.98

6.4 Programmable rotation, ROT, AROT

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

If you want to define the order of the rotations individually, program the desired rotation successively for each axis with AROT. The working plane also rotates The working plane defined with G17, G18 or G19 rotates with the spatial rotation. Example: Working plane G17 X/Y, the workpiece coordinate system is positioned on the top surface of the workpiece. Translation and rotation is used to move the coordinate system to one of the side surfaces. Working plane G17 also rotates. This feature can be used to program plane destination positions in X/Y coordinates and the infeed in the Z direction. Precondition: The tool must be positioned perpendicular to the working plane. The positive direction of the infeed axis points in the direction of the toolholder. Specifying CUT2DF activates the tool radius compensation in the rotated plane. For more information please refer to Section "2 1/2 D Tool Compensation, CUT2D CUT2DF.

Sequence: Rotation in the plane

The coordinate system is rotated in the plane selected with G17 to G19. Substituting instruction, ROT RPL Additive instruction, AROT RPL The coordinate system is rotated through the angle programmed with RPL= in the current plane. See Rotation in space for more information.
ROT
Y Y

7 G1

9 G1

G1 7

G1 9

G1 8
X Z

Z Z

8 G1

6-190

12.98

Frames

6.4 Programmable rotation, ROT, AROT

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Change of plane If you program a change of plane (G17 to G19) after a rotation, the angles of rotation programmed for the axes are retained and continue to apply in the new working plane. It is therefore advisable to deactivate the rotation before a change of plane. Deactivate rotation For all axes: ROT (without axis parameter)

In both cases, all frame components of the previously programmed frame are reset.

Programming example: Rotation in the plane

With this workpiece, the illustrated shapes recur several times in the same program. Rotations have to be performed in addition to the translation, because the shapes are not arranged parallel to the axes. N10 G17 G54 N20 N30 N40 N50 N60 N70 N80 N90 N100 N110 TRANS X20 Y10 L10 TRANS X55 Y35 AROT RPL=45 L10 TRANS X20 Y40 AROT RPL=60 L10 G0 X100 Y100 M30

Working plane X/Y, workpiece zero Absolute offset Subprogram call Absolute offset Rotation of the coordinate system through 45 Subprogram call Absolute offset (cancels all previous offsets) Additive rotation through 60 Subprogram call Retraction End of program

6-191

Frames

12.98

6.4 Programmable rotation, ROT, AROT

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Programming example: 3D rotation

In this example, paraxial and inclined workpiece surfaces are to be machined in one setting. Precondition: The tool must be aligned perpendicular to the inclined surface in the rotated Z direction. N10 N20 N30 N40 N50 N60 N70 N80 G17 G54 TRANS X10 Y10 L10 ATRANS X35 AROT Y30 ATRANS X5 L10 G0 X300 Y100 M30 Working plane X/Y, workpiece zero Absolute offset Subprogram call Additive offset Rotation through the Y axis Additive offset Subprogram call Retraction, end of program

6-192

12.98

Frames

6.4 Programmable rotation, ROT, AROT

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Programming example: Multi-face machining

In this example, identical shapes on two perpendicular workpiece surfaces are machined by using subprograms. The set-up of the infeed direction, working plane and zero point in the new coordinate system on the righthand workpiece surface matches that of the top surface. The conditions required for subprogram execution apply as before: working plane G17, coordinate plane X/Y, infeed direction Z. N10 N20 N30 G17 G54 L10 TRANS X100 Z-100 Working plane X/Y, workpiece zero Subprogram call Absolute offset
Z Y

100
X Z Y

S AN TR

-100

N40

AROT Y90

Rotation of the coordinate system through Y

Z Y Y

AROT Y90
X Z

N50

AROT Z90

Rotation of the coordinate system through Z

Y X Y

AROT Z90
Z Z

N60 N70

L10 G0 X300 Y100 M30

Subprogram call Retraction, end of program

6-193

Frames

12.98

6.5 Programmable scale factor, SCALE, ASCALE

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

6.5

Programmable scale factor, SCALE, ASCALE Programming

SCALE X Y Z (programmed in a separate NC block) ASCALE X Y Z (programmed in a separate NC block)

Explanation of the commands and parameters

SCALE ASCALE X Y Z Absolute enlargement/reduction with reference to the currently valid coordinate system set with G54 to G599 Additive enlargement/reduction with reference to the currently valid set or programmed coordinate system Scale factor in the direction of the specified geometry axis

Function
SCALE/ASCALE enables you to program scaling factors in the direction of the axis specified for all path, synchronous and positioning axes. This enables the size of a shape to be changed. You can thus program similar geometrical shapes in different sizes.

Sequence
Substituting instruction, SCALE X Y Z You can specify an individual scale factor for each axes, by which the shape is to be reduced or enlarged. The scale refers to the workpiece coordinate system set with G54 to G57.

The SCALE command cancels all frame components of the previously activated programmable frame.

6-194

12.98

Frames

6.5 Programmable scale factor, SCALE, ASCALE

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Additive instruction, ASCALE X Y Z You can program scale changes which are to be added to existing frames by using the ASCALE command. In this case, the last valid scale factor is multiplied by the new one. The currently set or last programmed coordinate system is used as the reference for the scale change. Deactivate scaling factor For all axes: SCALE (without axis parameter) All frame components of the previously programmed frame are reset.

AS CA

AROT TRANS

Additional notes
If you program an offset with ATRANS after SCALE, the offset values are also scaled.

Please take great care when using different scale factors! Example: circular interpolations can only be scaled using identical factors.
You can, however, use different scale factors to program distorted circles, for example.

6-195

Frames

12.98

6.5 Programmable scale factor, SCALE, ASCALE

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Programming example:
With this workpiece, the two pockets occur twice, but in different sizes and at different angles to each other. The machining sequence is stored in a subprogram. Use translation and rotation to set each of the workpiece zeroes, reduce the contour with a scale and then call the subprogram up again. N10 N20 N30 N40 N50 N60 N70 N80 G17 G54 TRANS X15 Y15 L10 TRANS X40 Y20 AROT RPL=35 ASCALE X0.7 Y0.7 L10 G0 X300 Y100 M30 Working plane X/Y, workpiece zero Absolute offset Machine large pocket Absolute offset Rotation in the plane through 35 Scale factor for the small pocket Machine small pocket Retraction, end of program

6-196

12.98

Frames

6.6 Programmable mirroring, MIRROR, AMIRROR

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

6.6

Programmable mirroring, MIRROR, AMIRROR Programming

MIRROR X0 Y0 Z0 AMIRROR X0 Y0 Z0 (programmed in a separate NC block) (programmed in a separate NC block)

Explanation of the commands and parameters

MIRROR AMIRROR X Y Z Absolute mirror image with reference to the currently valid coordinate system set with G54 to G599 Additive mirror image with reference to the currently valid set or programmed coordinate system Geometry axis whose direction is to be changed. The value specified here can be chosen freely, e.g. X0 Y0 Z0

Function
MIRROR/AMIRROR can be used to mirror workpiece shapes on coordinate axes. All traversing movements which are programmed after the mirror call, e.g. in the subprogram, are executed in the mirror image.

Sequence
Substituting instruction, MIRROR X Y Z The mirror is programmed by means of an axial change of direction in the selected working plane. Example: working plane G17 X/Y The mirror (on the Y axis) requires a change of direction on X and is subsequently programmed with MIRROR X0. The contour is then mirrored on the opposite side of the mirror axis Y.

6-197

Frames

12.98

6.6 Programmable mirroring, MIRROR, AMIRROR

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

The mirror image refers to the coordinate axes set with G54 to G57.

The MIRROR command cancels all previously set programmable frames.

Additive instruction, AMIRROR X Y Z A mirror image which is to be added to an existing transformation is programmed with AMIRROR. The currently set or last programmed coordinate system is used as the reference. Deactivate mirroring For all axes: MIRROR (without axis parameter) All frame components of the previously programmed frame are reset.

Additional notes
The mirror command causes the control to automatically change the path compensation commands (G41/G42 or G42/G41) according to the new machining direction. The same applies to the direction of circle rotation (G2/G3 or G3/G2).
Y

G03

G02

If you program an additive rotation with AROT after MIRROR, you may have to work with reversed directions of rotation (positive/negative or negative/positive). Mirrors on the geometry axes are converted automatically by the control into rotations and, where appropriate, mirrors on the mirror axis specified in the machine data. This also applies to settable zero offsets.

G41

G42

MIRROR X

6-198

12.98

Frames

6.6 Programmable mirroring, MIRROR, AMIRROR

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Machine manufacturer (MH 6.3)

SW 5 and higher You can set the axis around which mirroring is performed via MD. MD10610 = 0: Mirroring is performed in relation to the programmed axis (negation of values). MD10610 = 1 or 2 or 3: Depending on the data setting, mirroring is performed in relation to a specific reference axis (1=X axis; 2=Y axis; 3=Z axis) and rotations of two other geometry axes. $$!$+&! /-4 .1 ;910 :5
01 41 : -: : 1 685 : 8-3310 -2;19 -81 -2 : - 9 1 -2;-:10 : 1 -2;1 5 -9 9 01-/: 1 $$!$ : : 9

9 3 8858 4

-:10 -40

-2;19 45: 17;-2 :5 : 45: 1: 3 885810

9 9 3 885810

Programming example:
Program the contour shown here once as a subprogram and generate the three other contours with a mirror operation. The workpiece zero is located at the center of the contours.

Milling:
Y Y

2 X

1 X

X 3 4

N10 N20 N30 N40 N50 N60

G17 G54 L10 MIRROR X0 L10 AMIRROR Y0 L10

Working plane X/Y, workpiece zero Machine first contour, top right. Mirror X axis (the direction is changed in X). Machine second contour, top left. Mirror Y axis (the direction is changed in Y). Machine third contour, bottom left

6-199

Frames

12.98

6.6 Programmable mirroring, MIRROR, AMIRROR

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

N70

MIRROR Y0

MIRROR cancels previous frames. Mirror Y axis (the direction is changed in Y). Machine fourth contour, bottom right. Deactivate mirroring. Retraction, end of program

N80 N90 N100

L10 MIRROR G0 X300 Y100 M30

Turning:
Spindle 1 Spindle 2

Z M W

Z W1 M1

140 600

120

N10 N.. N30 N40 N50 N..

TRANS X0 Z140 ... TRANS X0 Z600 AMIRROR Z0 ATRANS Z120 ...

Zero offset to W Machine first side with spindle 1 Zero offset to spindle 2 Mirroring of the Z axis Zero offset to W1 Machine second side with spindle 2

6-200

12.98

Frames

6.7 Frame generation according to tool orientation, TOFRAME

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

6.7

Frame generation according to tool orientation, TOFRAME Programming

TOFRAME

Explanation
The new frame, whose Z axis is pointing in the tool direction, is applicable after the block containing TOFRAME.

Function
TOFRAME generates a rectangular frame whose Z axis coincides with the current tool orientation. You can use this function to retract the tool after a tool breakage in a 5-axis program without collision simply by retracting the Z axis. The resulting frame describing the orientation is written in the system variable for the programmable frame $P_PFRAME.
X
Basic

Tool re traction alon g Z axis Z

Basic

Y Basic

YBasic

G en erated frame

X''

The position of the two other axes can be defined in MD21110: X_AXES_IN_OLD_X_Z_PLANE; X is rotated around Z in the previous X/Z plane. Example: N100 G0 G53 X100 Z100 D0 N120 TOFRAME N140 G91 Z20 N160 X50 ...

M odified in MD 2 11 10: X'' is aga in located in th e previous X -Z p la ne

; Frame TOFRAME is included; all programmed geometry axis movements refer to TOFRAME

Additional notes
After tool orientation has been programmed with TOFRAME, all the programmed geometry axis movements refer to the frame generated by this programming.

6-201

Frames

12.98

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

6.8

Deselecting the frame

Deactivate coordinate transformation A distinction must be made here between non-modal deactivation and modal deactivation.

Explanation of the commands

G500 DRFOF G53 G153 SUPA TRAFOOF Deactivate all settable frames if G500 does not contain a value Deactivate (clear) the handwheel offsets (DRF) Non-modal deactivation of all programmable and settable frames Non-modal deactivation of all programmable, settable and basic frames Non-modal deactivation of all programmable, settable frames, handwheel offsets (DRF), external zero offsets and preset offset Deactivate transformation

Additional notes
The programmable frames are cleared by specifying the TRANS, ROT, SCALE, MIRROR component without an axis. You will find more information in the corresponding subsection in this section. For more information about TRAFOOF see /PGA/ Programming Guide Advanced, Section 7 "5-Axis Transformation".

6-202

12.98

Feedrate Control and Spindle Motion

7.1 Feedrate ........................................................................................................................... 7-204 7.2 Traverse positioning axes, POS, POSA, POSP............................................................... 7-212 7.3 Position-controlled spindle operation, SPCON, SPCOF .................................................. 7-215 7.4 Positioning spindles for position-controlled axis operation, SPOS, SPOSA .................... 7-216 7.5 Milling on turned parts: TRANSMIT.................................................................................. 7-221 7.6 Cylinder surface transformation: TRACYL ....................................................................... 7-223 7.7 Feedrate for positioning axes and spindles...................................................................... 7-225 7.8 Percentage feedrate override, OVR, OVRA..................................................................... 7-228 7.9 Feedrate with handwheel override, FD, FDA ................................................................... 7-229 7.10 Percentage acceleration correction: ACC (option) ......................................................... 7-232 7.11 Feedrate optimization for curved path sections, CFTCP, CFC, CFIN............................ 7-233 7.12 Spindle speed S, direction of spindle rotation M3, M4, M5 ............................................ 7-236 7.13 Constant cutting rate, G96, G97, LIMS .......................................................................... 7-239 7.14 Constant grinding wheel peripheral speed, GWPSON, GWPSOF ................................ 7-241 7.15 Constant workpiece speed for centerless grinding, CLGON, CLGOF ........................... 7-244 7.16 Programmable spindle speed limitation, G25, G26........................................................ 7-246 7.17 Several feedrates in one block: F.., FMA.. .................................................................... 7-247

7-203

Feedrate Control and Spindle Motion

12.98

7.1 Feedrate

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

7.1

Feedrate Programming
G93 or G94 or G95 F FGROUP(X, Y, Z, A, B, ) FL[axis]= FGREF[axis name]=reference radius (SW 5 and higher)

Explanation of the commands

G93 G94 G95 F FGROUP FGREF FL Axis Inverse-time feedrate in rev/min (for 840D NCU 572/573 and 810D CCU2 only) Feedrate in mm/min or inches/min or in deg/min Feedrate in mm/rev or inches/rev Feedrate value in unit defined by G93, G94, G95 Feedrate value F valid for all axes specified in FGROUP Effective radius (reference radius) for the rotary axes entered in FGROUP (SW 5 and higher) Limit speed for synchronized axes; the unit set with G94 applies (max. rapid traverse) Channel axes or geometry axes

Function
You can use the above commands to set the feedrates in the NC program for all axes participating in the machining sequence. The path feed is generally composed of the individual speed components of all geometry axes participating in the movement and refers to the center point of the cutter or the tip of the turning tool.

Movement on Y

X Movement on X

7-204

12.98

Feedrate Control and Spindle Motion

7.1 Feedrate

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Sequence
Units of measurement for feedrate F You can use the following G commands to define the units of measurement for the feed input. All of the commands are modal. Input is in mm or inches, according to the default setting in the machine data. Feed parameters are not affected by G70/G71. With G700/G710 in SW 5 and higher, feed values F are interpreted like geometrical parameters in the system of units set by G function (G700: [inch/min]; G710: [mm/min]). Feedrate G93 Unit rev/min. The inverse-time feedrate specifies the time required to execute the motion commands in a block. Example: N10 G93 G01 X100 F2 means: the programmed path is traversed in 0.5 min.

Note: If the path lengths vary greatly from block to block, a new F value should be specified in each block with G93. The feed can also be specified in deg/rev when machining with rotary axes.

G93 X... F2 X

0.5 min

Feedrate G94 mm/min or inches/min and deg/min Feedrate G95 mm/rev or inches/rev with reference to the speed of the master spindle generally the cutting spindle or the main spindle on the turning machine.

7-205

Feedrate Control and Spindle Motion

12.98

7.1 Feedrate

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

If the G feedrate command is switched between G93, G94 or G95 the path feedrate must be reprogrammed. The feed can also be specified in deg/rev when machining with rotary axes. Feedrate F for path axes The feedrate is specified with address F. One F value can be programmed per NC block. The unit for the feedrate is defined in one of the above G commands. The feed F acts only on path axes and remains active until a new feedrate is programmed. Separators are permitted after address F. Example: F100 or F 100 or F.5 or F=2*FEED Feedrate for synchronized axes The feed F programmed at address F applies to all the path axes programmed in the block, but not to synchronized axes. The synchronized axes are controlled such that they require the same time for their path as the path axes, and all axes reach their end point at the same time. Traverse synchronized axes with path velocity F, FGROUP With FGROUP, you define whether a path axis is to be traversed with path feed or as a synchronized axis. In helical interpolation, for example, you can define that only two geometry axes, X and Y, are to be traversed at the programmed feedrate. The infeed axis Z is the synchronized axis in this case. Example: N10 FGROUP(X, Y)

7-206

12.98

Feedrate Control and Spindle Motion

7.1 Feedrate

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Change FGROUP 1. By reprogramming another FGROUP instruction. FGROUP(X, Y, Z) Example: 2. With FGROUP () without axis parameter Afterwards, the initial setting in the machine data applies the geometry axes again traverse in the path axis grouping. You must program channel axis names with FGROUP.

Machine manufacturer (MH7.1)

See machine manufacturer's specifications

Unit of measurement for rotary and linear axes For linear and rotary axes which are combined with FGROUP and traverse a path together, the feed is interpreted in the unit of measurement of the linear axes. Depending on the default for G94/G95: mm/min or inch/min and mm/rev or inch/rev.
D

The tangential velocity of the rotary axis in mm/min or inch/min is calculated according to the following formula: F'[degrees/min] * * D[mm]

F[mm/min] =

360 [degrees] F: F': : D: Tangential velocity Angular velocity Circle constant Diameter

7-207

Feedrate Control and Spindle Motion

12.98

7.1 Feedrate

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Traverse rotary axes with path velocity F, FGREF (SW 5 and higher) For machining operations in which the tool or the workpiece or both are moved by a rotary axis, the effective machining feedrate is to be interpreted as a path feed in the usual way by reference to the F value. This requires the specification of an effective radius (reference radius) FGREF for each of the rotary axes involved. The unit of the reference radius depends on the G70/G71/G700/G710 setting. All axes involved must be included in the FGROUP command, as before, in order to be evaluated in the calculation of the path feed. In order to maintain compatibility with the behavior without FGREF programming, the following setting is activated after system power-up and on RESET: 1 degree = 1mm. This corresponds to a reference radius of FGREF=360 mm/(2)=57.296 mm. This default setting is independent of the active basic system MD 10240: SCALING_SYSTEM_IS_METRIC and of the currently active inch/metric G code. Special situations: With the following programming: N100 FGROUP(X,Y,Z,A) N110 G1 G91 A10 F100 N120 G1 G91 A10 X0.0001 F100 the F value programmed in N110 is evaluated as a rotary axis feedrate in deg/min, while the feedrate weighting in N120 is either 100 inch/min or 100 mm/min depending on the currently active inch/metric setting.

7-208

12.98

Feedrate Control and Spindle Motion

7.1 Feedrate

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

The FGREF evaluation is also effective if only rotary axes are programmed in the block. In this case, the usual F value interpretation as deg/min is only valid if the radius reference in accordance with the FGREF default is: G71/G710: FGREF[A]=57.296 G70/G700: FGREF[A]=57.296/25.4
The following example illustrates the effect of FGROUP on the path and the path feedrate. The variable $AC_TIME contains the time from the start of the block in seconds. It can only be used in synchronized actions. Example N100 G0 X0 A0 N110 FGROUP(X,A) N120 G91 G1 G710 F100 N130 DO $R1=$AC_TIME N140 X10 N150 DO $R2=$AC_TIME N160 X10 A10 N170 DO $R3=$AC_TIME N180 A10 N190 DO $R4=$AC_TIME N200 X0.001 A10 N210 G700 F100 N220 DO $R5=$AC_TIME N230 X10 N240 DO $R6=$AC_TIME N250 X10 A10 N260 DO $R7=$AC_TIME N270 A10 N280 DO $R8=$AC_TIME N290 X0.001 A10
Feed=2540 mm/min 0.288 s Path=10 mm R8=approx. Feed=100 deg/min Path=10 degrees R7=approx. 6 s Feed=2540 mm/min Path=254.2 mm R6=approx. 6 s Feed=100 mm/min Path=10 mm R4=approx. 6 s Feed=100 degrees/min Path=10 degrees R3=approx. 6 s Feed=100 mm/min Path=14.14 mm R2=approx. 8 s Feed=100 mm/min or 100 deg/min Feed=100 mm/min Path=10 mm R1=approx. 6 s

Feed=2540 mm/min or 100 deg/min Feed=2540 mm/min Path=254 mm R5=approx. 6 s

N300 FGREF[A9]=360/(2*$PI) N310 DO $R9=$AC_TIME N320 X0.001 A10 N330 M30

Set 1 degree=1 inch via the effective radius Feed=2540 mm/min Path=254 mm R9=approx. 6 s

7-209

Feedrate Control and Spindle Motion

12.98

7.1 Feedrate

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Traverse synchronized axes with limit speed FL With this command, synchronized axes are traversed at their limit speed FL. The path velocity of the path axes is reduced if the synchronized axis reaches the limit speed. Example, Z is a synchronized axis: N10 G0 X0 Y0 N20 FGROUP(X) N30 G1 X1000 Y1000 G94 F1000 FL[Y]=500 N40 Z-50 One FL value can be programmed per axis. The axis identifiers of the basic coordinate system must be used (channel axes or geometry axes). The unit of measurement set for F using the G command is also valid for FL. If no FL is programmed, the rapid traverse velocity applies. FL is deselected by assignment to MD $MA_AX_VELO_LIMIT.

7-210

12.98

Feedrate Control and Spindle Motion

7.1 Feedrate

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Programming example:
Y Y

Helical interpolation. Path axes X and Y traverse with the programmed feedrate, the infeed axis Z is a synchronized axis.

10 25

N10 G17 G94 G1 Z0 F500 N20 X10 Y20 N25 FGROUP(X, Y) N30 G2 X10 Y20 Z-15 I15 J0 F1000 FL[Z]=200

Tool infeed Approach start position Axes X/Y are path axes, Z is a synchronized axis On the circular path, the feed is 1000 mm/min. Traversing in the Z direction is synchronized. The limit velocity is deselected when the velocity value is read from the MD. End of program

... N100 FL=$MA_AX_VELO_LIMIT[0,Z] N110 M30

7-211

Feedrate Control and Spindle Motion

12.98

7.2 Traverse positioning axes, POS, POSA, POSP

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

7.2

Traverse positioning axes, POS, POSA, POSP Programming

POS[axis]= POSA[axis]= POSP[axis]=(,,) FA[axis]= WAITP(axis)=

(programmed in a separate NC block)

Explanation of the commands

POS [axis]= POSA [axis]= POSP [axis]=(,,) Position the axis; the next NC block is not enabled until the position has been reached Position the axis; the next NC block is enabled, even if the position has not been reached Approach end position in sections. The first value indicates the end position; the second the length of the section. Approaching the end position is defined in the third value with 0 or 1 Feedrate for the positioning axis, up to 5 per NC block Wait for the axis to finish traversing; WAITP must be programmed in a separate NC block Channel axes or geometry axes

FA[axis]= WAITP(axis) Axis

Function
Positioning axes are traversed independently of the path axes at a separate, axis-specific feedrate. There are no interpolation commands. Example for positioning axes: Pallet feeding mechanisms, measuring stations, etc.

Sequence
With the POS/POSA/POSP commands, the positioning axes are traversed and the sequence of motions coordinated at the same time. Traveling with POSA[]= The axis indicated in brackets is traversed to the end position. The block step enable or program execution is not affected by POSA. The movement to the end position can be performed during execution of subsequent blocks.

7-212

12.98

Feedrate Control and Spindle Motion

7.2 Traverse positioning axes, POS, POSA, POSP

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Internal preprocessor stop If a command which generates an implicit preprocessor stop is read in the following block, the following block is not executed until all previously prepared and stored blocks have been executed completely. The previous block is halted with an exact stop (like G9). Example: N40 POSA[X]=100 N50 IF $AA_IM[X]==R100 GOTOF MARKE1

; On accessing status data of the machine ($A), the control generates an internal preprocessing stop, processing is halted until all previously prepared and stored blocks have been executed in full.

N60 G0 Y100 N70 WAITP(X) N80 MARKE1: N.. Traveling with POS[]= The next block is only executed when all axes programmed under POS have reached their end positions. Traveling with POSP[]= POSP is used specifically for programming oscillating movements (see /PGA/ Programming Guide Advanced, Chapter 11). Wait for end of travel with WAITP() WAITP can be used for: Identifying a position in the NC program where the program is to wait until an axis programmed with POSA in a previous NC block has reached its end position. Making an axis available as a reciprocating axis. Making an axis available for traversing as a concurrent positioning axis (by PLC).

7-213

Feedrate Control and Spindle Motion

12.98

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

After WAITP, assignment of the axis to the NC program is no longer valid; this applies until the axis is programmed again. This axis can then be operated as a positioning axis through the PLC, or as a reciprocating axis from the NC program/PLC or MMC.

Programming example:
Axis U: Pallet store, transporting the pallet to the working area Axis V: Transfer line to a measuring station, where sampling controls are carried out. N10 FA[U]=100 FA[V]=100 N20 POSA[V]=90 POSA[U]=100 G0 X50 Y70 N50 WAITP(U) Axis-specific feed functions for each positioning axis U and V Traverse positioning and path axes Execution of the program is only continued when axis U has reached the end position programmed in N20.

N60

7-214

12.98

Feedrate Control and Spindle Motion

7.3 Position-controlled spindle operation, SPCON, SPCOF

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

7.3

Position-controlled spindle operation, SPCON, SPCOF Programming

SPCONor SPCON(n) SPCOF or SPCOF(n)

Explanation of the commands

SPCON SPCON(n) SPCOF SPCOF(n) SPCON SPCON(n, m, 0) SPCOF SPCOF(n, m, 0) n m Switch master spindle or spindle number n from speed control to position control Switch master spindle or spindle number n back from position control to speed control SW 3.5 and higher: several spindles with number n can be switched from closed-loop speed control to position control in one block SW 3.5 and higher: several spindles with number n can be switched back from position control to closed-loop speed control in one block Integers from 1 ... n Integers from 1 ... m

Function
In certain cases, it is practical to operate the spindle in position control mode. For example, improved quality can be achieved with thread cutting with G33 and a large pitch. Note The command requires up to 3 interpolation cycles.

Sequence
The speed is specified with S . M3, M4 and M5 apply to the directions of rotation and spindle stop. SPCON is modal and remains active until SPCOF.

Additional notes
With synchronized spindle setpoint value linkage, the master spindle must be operated in position control mode.

7-215

Feedrate Control and Spindle Motion

12.98

7.4 Positioning spindles for position-controlled axis operation,

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

7.4

Positioning spindles for position-controlled axis operation, SPOS, SPOSA Programming

SPOS= or SPOS[n]= M70 or Mn=70 SPOSA= or SPOSA[n]= WAITS or WAITS(n,m)

(programmed in a separate NC block)

Explanation of the commands

SPOS= SPOS[n]= M70 Mn=70 SPOSA= SPOSA[n]= WAITS WAITS(n,m) n m Position master spindle (SPOS) or spindle number n (SPOS[n]); the next NC block is not enabled until the position has been reached Switch over master spindle (M70) or spindle number n (Mn=70) to axis operation. No defined position is approached. The NC block is enabled after the switchover has been performed. Position master spindle with SPOSA or spindle number n (SPOSA[n]). The next NC block is enabled, even if the position has not been reached Wait for spindle position to be reached. WAITS applies to the master spindle or the specified spindle numbers Integers from 1 ... n Integers from 1 ... m

7-216

12.98

Feedrate Control and Spindle Motion

7.4 Positioning spindles for position-controlled axis operation,

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Function
SPOS and SPOSA can be used to position spindles at specific angle locations, e.g. for tool change. The spindle can also be operated as a path axis, synchronized axis or positioning axis at the address defined in the machine data. When the axis identifier is specified, the spindle is in axis mode. M70 switches the spindle directly to axis mode.

Angular position

N10 ... N90

M3 S500 SPOS[2]=0 or Position control on, spindle 2 positioned to 0, axis mode can be used in the next block Spindle 2 is switched to axis mode Spindle 2 (C axis) is traversed with linear interpolation synchronous to X. Spindle 2 is positioned to 90 degrees.

M2=70 N100 N110 X50 C180 Z20 SPOS[2]=90

Sequence
Precondition The spindle must be capable of operation in position control mode. Position with SPOSA=, SPOSA[n]= The block step enable or program execution is not affected by SPOSA. The spindle positioning can be performed during execution of subsequent blocks.

7-217

Feedrate Control and Spindle Motion

12.98

7.4 Positioning spindles for position-controlled axis operation,

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

If a command which implicitly causes a preprocessor stop is read in a subsequent block, execution of this block is delayed until all positioning spindles are stationary. Position with SPOS=, SPOS[n]= The next block is not executed until the spindle has reached the programmed position. Speed of the movements The speed or delay response for positioning is stored in the machine data and can be programmed. Specify spindle position The spindle position is specified in degrees. Since the commands G90/G91 do not apply here, the following explicit references apply: AC() Absolute dimensions IC() Incremental dimensions DC() Approach absolute value directly ACN() Absolute dimensions, approach in negative direction ACP() Absolute dimensions, approach in positive direction With IC, spindle positioning can take place over several revolutions.

AC (250)

250 0

DC (250)

Example: Position spindle 2 at 250 in negative direction of rotation. N10 SPOSA[2]=ACN(250) The spindle decelerates if necessary and accelerates in the opposite direction to the positioning movement (SW 4 and higher) If nothing is specified, traversing automatically takes place as for DC. Three spindle positions are possible for each NC block. Value range Absolute dimensions AC: 0359.9999 degrees Incremental dimensions IC: 099 999.999 degrees

7-218

12.98

Feedrate Control and Spindle Motion

7.4 Positioning spindles for position-controlled axis operation,

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Deactivate SPOS and SPOSA cause a temporary changeover to position-control mode until the next M3 or M4 or M5 or M41 to M45. If the position control was activated with SPCON prior to SPOS, then this remains active until SPCOF is issued. Synchronize spindle movements, WAITS, WAITS(n,m) WAITS can be used to identify a point at which the NC program waits until one or more spindles programmed with SPOSA in a previous NC block have reached their positions. Example: N10 SPOSA[2]=180 SPOSA[3]=0 N20N30 N40 WAITS(2,3)

The block waits until spindles 2 and 3 have reached the positions specified in block N10. Position spindle from rotation (M3/M4) When M3 or M4 active, the spindle comes to a standstill at the programmed value. There is no difference between DC and AC dimensioning. In both cases, rotation continues in the direction selected by M3/M4 until the absolute end position is reached. With ACN and ACP, deceleration takes place if necessary, and the appropriate approach direction is followed. With IC, the spindle rotates additionally to the specified value starting at the current spindle position. When M3 or M4 is active, the spindle decelerates if necessary, and accelerates in the programmed direction of rotation. Position a spindle from standstill (M5) The exact programmed distance is traversed from standstill (M5).

Direction of rotation

DC = AC

DC = AC Programmed angle Programmed angle

7-219

Feedrate Control and Spindle Motion

12.98

7.4 Positioning spindles for position-controlled axis operation,

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

If the spindle has not yet been synchronized with synchronization marks, the positive direction of rotation is taken from the machine data (state on delivery).

Programming example:
Cross holes are to be drilled in this turned part. The running drive spindle (master spindle) is stopped at zero degrees and then successively turned through 90, stopped and so on.

....
N110 N120 N125 N130 N135 N140 N145 N150 N155 N160 N165 N170 N175 N180 N185 ... S2=1000 M2=3 SPOSA=DC(0) G0 X34 Z-35 WAITS G1 G94 X10 F250 G0 X34 SPOS=IC(90) G1 X10 G0 X34 SPOS=AC(180) G1 X10 G0 X34 SPOS=IC(90) G1 X10 G0 X50 ; the spindle turns in a positive direction through 90 from the absolute 180 position, ending up in the absolute 270 position ; the spindle is positioned at 180 with respect to the spindle zero point ; the spindle is positioned through 90 with read halt in a positive direction ; switch on cross drilling attachment ; position main spindle directly at 0, the program will advance to the next block immediately ; switch on the drill while the spindle is being positioned ; wait until the main spindle reaches its position ; feedrate in mm/min (G96 is suitable only for the multi-edge turning tool and synchronous spindle, but not for power tools on the cross slide)

7-220

12.98

Feedrate Control and Spindle Motion

7.5 Milling on turned parts: TRANSMIT

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

7.5

Milling on turned parts: TRANSMIT Programming

TRANSMIT or TRANSMIT(n) TRAFOOF Explanation of the commands TRANSMIT TRANSMIT(n) TRAFOOF Activates the first declared TRANSMIT function Activates the nth declared TRANSMIT function; n can be up to 2 (TRANSMIT(1) is the same as TRANSMIT). Deactivates an active transformation

An active TRANSMIT transformation is likewise deactivated if one of the other transformations is activated in the relevant channel (e.g. TRACYL, TRAANG, TRAORI). The TRANSMIT function enables the following: Face machining on turned parts in the turning clamp (drill-holes, contours). A Cartesian coordinate system can be used to program these operations. The control maps the programmed traversing movements of the Cartesian coordinate system onto the traversing movements of the real machine axes (standard situation): Rotary axis Infeed axis perpendicular to the axis of rotation Longitudinal axis parallel to the axis of rotation The linear axes are perpendicular to each other. A tool center offset relative to the turning center is permitted. The velocity control makes allowance for the limits defined for the rotations.

7-221

Feedrate Control and Spindle Motion

12.98

7.5 Milling on turned parts: TRANSMIT

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Programming example:
Y

N10 T1 D1 G54 G17 G90 F5000 G94 N20 G0 X20 Z10 SPOS=45 N30 TRANSMIT N40 ROT RPL=45 N50 ATRANS X2 Y10 N60 G1 X10 Y10 G41 N70 X10 N80 Y10 N90 X10 N100 Y10 N110 ...

Tool selection Approach start position Activate TRANSMIT function Set frame Four-edge roughing

References
/PGA/ Programming Guide Advanced, Section "Transformations"

7-222

12.98

Feedrate Control and Spindle Motion

7.6 Cylinder surface transformation: TRACYL

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

7.6

Cylinder surface transformation: TRACYL Programming

TRACYL(d) or TRACYL(d,t) TRAFOOF Explanation of the commands TRACYL(d) TRACYL(d,n) d TRAFOOF Activates the first declared TRACYL function Activates the nth declared TRACYL function. N can be up to 2, TRACYL(d,1) is the same as TRACYL(d). Value for the current diameter of the cylinder to be machined. Transformation off

An active TRACYL transformation is likewise deactivated if one of the other transformations is activated in the relevant channel (e.g. TRANSMIT, TRAANG, TRAORI).

Function
Cylinder surface transformation TRACYL The TRACYL cylinder surface transformation function can be used to: Machine longitudinal grooves on cylindrical bodies, transverse grooves on cylindrical bodies, grooves with any path on cylindrical bodies. The path of the grooves is programmed with reference to the unwrapped, level surface of the cylinder.
Workpiece coordinate system
Y

7-223

Feedrate Control and Spindle Motion

12.98

7.6 Cylinder surface transformation: TRACYL

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Programming example:

N10 T1 D1 G54 G90 F5000 G94 N20 SPOS=0 N30 G0 X25 Y0 Z105 C=200 N40 TRACYL (40) N50 G19 N60 G1 X20 N70 G1 Z50 N80 G1 Y10 N90 ...

Tool selection, clamping compensation Approach start position Activate cylinder surface transformation Plane selection Infeed tool to groove base Groove section parallel to cylinder axis Groove section parallel to periphery

References
/PGA/ Programming Guide Advanced, Section "Transformations"

7-224

12.98

Feedrate Control and Spindle Motion

7.7 Feedrate for positioning axes and spindles

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

810D

7.7

Feedrate for positioning axes and spindles Programming

FA[axis]= FA[SPI(spindle)]= or FA[S]= FPR (rotary axis)or FPR(SPI(spindle))or FPR(S) FPRAON (axis,rotary axis)or FPRAON(axis,SPI(spindle))or FPRAON(axis,S)or FPRAON(SPI(spindle),rotary axis)or FPRAON(S,rotary axis)or FPRAON(SPI(spindle),SPI(spindle))or FPRAON(S,S)or FPRAOF(axis,SPI(spindle),)or FPRAOF(axis,S,)

Explanation of the commands

FA[axis] FA[SPI(spindle)] FA[S] FPR Feedrate for the specified positioning axis in mm/min or inch/min or deg/min Positioning velocity (axial feed) for the specified spindles in deg/min Identification of the rotary axis or spindle whose revolutional feedrate programmed in G95 is to be used as the basis for the revolutional feedrate of the path and synchronized axes. Activate revolutional feedrate for positioning axes and spindles axially. The first command identifies the positioning axis/spindle that is to be traversed at a revolutional feedrate. The second command identifies the rotary axis/spindle from which the feedrate is to be derived. Deactivate revolutional feedrate. Specification of axis or spindle that is to stop traversing at a revolutional feedrate. Converts the spindle number into an axis identifier; the transfer parameter must contain a valid spindle number. SPI is used for the indirect definition of a spindle number. Positioning axes or geometry axes

FPRAON

FPRAOF SPI

Axis

Function
Positioning axes, such as workpiece transport systems, tool turrets and end supports, are traversed independently of the path and synchronized axes. A separate feed is therefore defined for each positioning axis. FA[A1]=500 Example:

7-225

Feedrate Control and Spindle Motion

12.98

7.7 Feedrate for positioning axes and spindles

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

810D

With synchronous spindle link, the positioning speed of the following spindle can be programmed independently of the master spindle for example, for positioning operations. FA[S2]=100 Example: The spindle identifiers SPI() and S are identical in terms of function.

Sequence
Feed FA[] The programmed feed is modal. The feed is always G94. When G70/G71 is active, the unit of measurement is metric/inches according to the default setting in the machine data. G700/G710 can be used to modify the unit of measurement in the program.

If no FA is programmed, the value defined in the machine data applies.

Up to 5 feeds for positioning axes or spindles can be programmed in each NC block. Value range 0.001999 999.999 mm/min, deg/min 0.00139 999.9999 inch/min Feedrate FPR() As an extension of the G95 command (revolutional feedrate referring to the master spindle), FPR allows the revolutional feedrate to be derived from any chosen spindle or rotary axis. G95 FPR(...) is valid for path and synchronized axes. If the rotary axis/spindle specified in the FPR command is operating on position control, then the setpoint linkage is active. Otherwise the actual-value linkage is effective. The derived feedrate is calculated according to the following formula: Derived feedrate = programmed feedrate * Absolute master feedrate

7-226

12.98

Feedrate Control and Spindle Motion

7.7 Feedrate for positioning axes and spindles

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

810D

Example: Path axes X, Y must be traversed at the revolutional feedrate derived from rotary axis A. N40 FPR(A) N50 G95 X50 Y50 F500 Feedrate FPRAON(,), FPRAOF(,) The FPRAON command makes it possible to derive the revolutional feedrate for specific positioning axes and spindles from the current feedrate of another rotary axis or spindle. The first command identifies the axis/spindle that must be traversed at a revolutional feedrate. The second command identifies the rotary axis/spindle that is to supply the feedrate. The command need not be specified a second time. If it is not, the feedrate is derived from the master spindle. The revolutional feedrate can be deactivated for one or several axes/spindles simultaneously with the FPRAOF command. The feedrate is calculated in the same way as for FPR(). Examples: The revolutional feedrate for master spindle 1 must be derived from spindle 2. N30 FPRAON(S1,S2) N40 SPOS=150 N50 FPRAOF(S1) The revolutional feedrate for positioning axis X must be derived from the master spindle. The positioning axis is traversing at 500 mm/revolution of the master spindle. N30 FPRAON (X) N40 POS[X]=50 FA[X]=500 N50 FPRAOF(S1)

7-227

Feedrate Control and Spindle Motion

12.98

7.8 Percentage feedrate override, OVR, OVRA

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

7.8

Percentage feedrate override, OVR, OVRA Programming

OVR= OVRA[axis]= OVRA[SPI(spindle)]= or OVRA[S]=

Explanation of the command

OVR OVRA SPI Feed change in percent for path feed F Feed change in percent for positioning feed FA or for spindle speed S Converts the spindle number into an axis identifier; the transfer parameter must contain a valid spindle number. The spindle identifiers SPI() and S are identical in terms of function. Positioning axes or geometry axes

Axis

Function
You can use the programmable feedrate override to change the velocity/speed of path axes, positioning axes and spindles via a command in the NC program. Example: N10 OVR=25 OVRA[A1]=70 N20 OVRA[SPI(1)]=35 or N20 OVRA[S1]=35 ; Path feed 25%, Positioning feed for A1 70%. ; Spindle speed for spindle 1 35%.

Sequence
The programmed feed change refers to or is combined with the feed override set on the machine control panel. Example: Set feed override 80% Programmed feed override OVR=50 The programmed path feed F1000 is changed to F400 (1000 * 0.8 * 0.5). The feed override also refers to the rapid traverse G0.

7-228

12.98

Feedrate Control and Spindle Motion

7.9 Feedrate with handwheel override, FD, FDA

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Value range 1200%, integers; with path and rapid traverse override, the maximum velocities set in the machine data are not exceeded.

7.9

Feedrate with handwheel override, FD, FDA Programming

FD= FDA[axis]=0 or FDA[axis]=

Explanation of the command

FD= FDA [axis]=0 FDA[axis]= Axis Handwheel travel for path axes with feed override Handwheel travel for positioning axes according to position parameter Handwheel travel for positioning axes with feed override Positioning axes or geometry axes

Function
With these functions, you can use the handwheel to traverse path and positioning axes (position parameter) or change the axis velocities (speed override) during program execution. The handwheel override is frequently used for grinding operations. Example for position parameter: The grinding wheel oscillating in the Z direction is moved to the workpiece in the X direction using the handwheel. The operator can then adjust the position of the tool until the spark generation is constant. When "Delete distance-to-go" is activated, the program goes to the next NC block and machining continues in NC mode.
Z

Only speed override can be used for path axes.

7-229

Feedrate Control and Spindle Motion

12.98

7.9 Feedrate with handwheel override, FD, FDA

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Sequence
Preconditions A handwheel must be assigned to the axes to be traversed for the handwheel override function. Please see the Operators Guide for the procedure. The number of handwheel pulses per graduated position is defined in machine data. Non-modal operation The handwheel override function is non-modal. The function is deactivated in the next NC block and the NC program continues to be executed. Handwheel travel with path default for positioning axes, FDA[axis]=0 In NC blocks with programmed FDA[axis]=0, the feed is set to zero in order that the program does not generate any travel movement. The programmed travel movement to the target position is now controlled exclusively by the operator rotating the handwheel. N20 POS[V]=90 FDA[V]=0 Example: The automatic travel movement is stopped in block N20. The operator can now move the axis manually using the handwheel. Direction of movement, travel velocity The axes accurately follow the path set by the handwheel in the direction of the leading sign. Depending on the direction of rotation, you can travel forwards or backwards the faster you turn the handwheel, the higher the travel velocity. Traversing range The traversing range is limited by the starting position and the end point programmed with the positioning command.

7-230

12.98

Feedrate Control and Spindle Motion

7.9 Feedrate with handwheel override, FD, FDA

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Handwheel travel with speed override, FDA[axis]= Where FDA[]= is programmed in an NC block, the feed from the last programmed FA value is accelerated or reduced to the value programmed at FDA. Starting with the current feed FDA, you can accelerate or reduce the programmed travel to zero by rotating the handwheel. The values defined in the machine data are used for the maximum velocity. N10 POS[U]=10 FDA[U]=100 Example: POSA[V]=20 FDA[V]=150 Traverse path axes with handwheel override, FD The following preconditions apply to handwheel overrides for path axes: In the NC block with the programmed handwheel override an active G1, G2 or G3 motion command must be active, exact stop G60 must be switched on, and the path feedrate must be specified with G94 mm/min or inch/min.

The path feed F and the handwheel override FD may not be programmed in the same NC block.
Feedrate override The feed override acts only on the programmed feed, not on the travel movement generated with the handwheel (except if feed override = 0). Example: N10 G1 X Y F500 N50 X Y FD=700

The feedrate is accelerated to 700 mm/min in block N50. The path velocity can be increased or reduced according to the direction of rotation on the handwheel.

It is not possible to traverse in the opposite direction.

7-231

Feedrate Control and Spindle Motion

12.98

7.10 Percentage acceleration correction: ACC (option)

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Note With velocity override of path axes, you always control the path velocity with the handwheel of the 1st geometry axis. Traversing range The traversing range is limited by the starting position and the programmed end point.

7.10

Percentage acceleration correction: ACC (option) Programming

ACC[axis]= ACC[SPI(spindle)]= or ACC(S)

Explanation of the command

ACC SPI Change in acceleration in percent for the specified path axis or change in speed for the specified spindle Converts the spindle number into an axis identifier; the transfer parameter must contain a valid spindle number. The spindle identifiers SPI() and S are identical in terms of function. Channel axis name of path axis

Axis

Function
In critical program sections, it may be necessary to limit the acceleration to below the maximum values, e.g. to prevent mechanical vibrations from occurring.

Sequence
You can use the programmable acceleration override to change the acceleration for each path axis or spindle via a command in the NC program. The limit is effective for all types of interpolation. The values defined in the machine data determine the 100% acceleration. Example: N50 ACC[X]=80 Meaning: Traverse the axis slide in the X direction with only 80% acceleration. N60 ACC[SPI(1)]=50 or ACC[S1]=50

7-232

12.98

Feedrate Control and Spindle Motion

7.11 Feedrate optimization for curved path sections, CFTCP, CFC, CFIN

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Meaning: Accelerate or decelerate spindle 1 with only 50% of the maximum acceleration. The spindle identifiers SPI() and S are identical in terms of function. Value range: 1200%, integers Deactivate: ACC[axis]=100, program start, reset

Additional notes
Please note that the maximum permissible values of the machine manufacturer can be exceeded with a higher acceleration rate.

7.11

Feedrate optimization for curved path sections, CFTCP, CFC, CFIN Programming
CFTCP CFC CFIN

Explanation of the commands

CFTCP CFC CFIN Constant feed at cutter center path Constant feed at contour (tool edge) Constant feed at tool edge for concave contours only, otherwise on the cutter center path

Function
The programmed feedrate initially refers to the cutter center path when the G41/G42 override is activated for the cutter radius (see Section 6). When you mill a circle the same applies to polynomial and spline interpolation the extent of the change in feedrate at the cutter edge is such that it can have a considerable effect on the quality of the machined part. Example: you are milling a small external radius with a large tool. The distance that the outer side of the cutter has to cover is much larger than the distance along the contour. You therefore work with a very small feed on the contour.
Tool path

Contour

7-233

Feedrate Control and Spindle Motion

12.98

7.11 Feedrate optimization for curved path sections, CFTCP, CFC, CFIN

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

In order to avoid effects like this, you should regulate the feedrate for curved contours accordingly.

Sequence
Constant feedrate on center-point path, deactivate feedrate override, CFTCP The control keeps the feedrate constant, feed overrides are deactivated. Constant feedrate on contour, CFC The feedrate is reduced for inside radii and increased for outside radii. This ensures a constant speed at the tool edge and thus at the contour. This function is set as the default. Constant feed only at inside radii, CFIN The feedrate is reduced for inside radii but not increased for outside radii; the cutter center applies.

constant

reduced increased

7-234

co ns ta nt

12.98

Feedrate Control and Spindle Motion

7.11 Feedrate optimization for curved path sections, CFTCP, CFC, CFIN

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Programming example
In this example, the contour is first machined with a CFC-compensated feed. During finishing, the cutting base is additionally machined with CFIN. This prevents the cutting base from being damaged at outside radii by too high a feedrate.

40 10

X 10 20 55 20 30

N10 N20 N30 N40 N50 N40 N50 N60 N70

G17 G54 G64 T1 M6 S3000 M3 CFC F500 G41 G0 X-10 Y0 Z-10 CONTOUR1 CFIN Z-25 CONTOUR1 Y120 X200 M30 Infeed to first cutting depth Subprogram call Infeed to second cutting depth Subprogram call

7-235

Feedrate Control and Spindle Motion

12.98

7.12 Spindle speed S, direction of spindle rotation M3, M4, M5

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

7.12

Spindle speed S, direction of spindle rotation M3, M4, M5 Programming

M3 or M4 or M5 M1=3 or M1=4 or M1=5 S Sn= SETMS(n) or SETMS

Explanation of the commands

M1=3 M1=4 M1=5 M3 M4 M5 Sn= S SETMS(n) SETMS Spindle rotation clockwise/counterclockwise, spindle stop for spindle 1. Other spindles are defined according to M2= M3= Direction of spindle rotation clockwise for master spindle Direction of spindle rotation counterclockwise for master spindle Spindle stop for master spindle Spindle speed in rev/min for spindle n Spindle speed in rev/min for the master spindle Set spindle specified in n as master spindle Reset to the master spindle defined in machine data

Function
The above functions are used to switch on the spindle, specify the required direction of spindle rotation, and define the counterspindle or an actuated tool as the master spindle, e.g. on turning machines The following programming commands are valid for the master spindle: G95, G96, G97, G33, G331. (see also Section 1, "Main spindle, master spindle").

Machine manufacturer (MH7.2)

Definition as master spindle is also possible via machine data (default).

Sequence
Preset M commands, M3, M4, M5 In a block with axis commands, the abovementioned functions are activated before the axis movements commence (basic settings on the control).

7-236

12.98

Feedrate Control and Spindle Motion

7.12 Spindle speed S, direction of spindle rotation M3, M4, M5

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Example:

N10 G1 F500 X70 Y20 S270 M3 N100 G0 Z150 M5

N10: the spindle accelerates to 270 rev/min, then the movements are performed on X and Y. N100: spindle stop before the retraction movement on Z. A machine data can be set to determine whether the axis motions are delayed until the spindle has run up and reached setpoint speedor stopped, or whether they are executed immediately after the programmed switching operations. Spindle speed S The speed specified with S or S0= applies to the master spindle. You specify the corresponding number for additional spindles: =, S2= Three S values can be programmed per NC block. Working with multiple spindles Up to 5 spindles master spindle plus 4 additional spindles, 2 spindles on the SINUMERIK FM-NC can be configured in the same channel. One of the spindles is defined in machine data as the master spindle. Special functions apply to this spindle, such as thread cutting, tapping, revolutional feed, dwell time. The numbers must be specified with the speed and the direction of rotation/spindle stop for the other spindles, e.g. for a second spindle and actuated tool. Example: N10 S300 M3 S2=780 M2=4

Master spindle 300 rev/min, clockwise rotation 2nd spindle 780 rev/min, counterclockwise rotation

7-237

Feedrate Control and Spindle Motion

12.98

7.12 Spindle speed S, direction of spindle rotation M3, M4, M5

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Programmable switchover of master spindle, SETMS(n) You can define any spindle as the master spindle with a command in the NC program. Example: N10 SETMS(2) ; SETMS must be programmed in a separate block Spindle 2 is now the master spindle.

The speed specified with S and M3, M4, M5 now apply.

Deactivate By issuing SETMS without spindle parameter you can switchback to the master spindle defined in the machine data.

Programming example:
S1 is the master spindle, S2 is the second workspindle. The part is to be machined from 2 sides. To do this, it is necessary to divide the operations into steps. After parting, the synchronous device (S2) takes up the workpiece for machining on the parted side. To do this, this spindle S2 is defined as the master spindle to which G95 then applies.

N10 S300 M3 N20N90 N100 SETMS(2) N110 S400 G95 F N120N150 N160 SETMS

Speed and direction of rotation for drive spindle = preset master spindle Machining of right side of workpiece S2 is now master spindle Speed for new master spindle Machining of left side of workpiece Switch back to master spindle S1

7-238

12.98

Feedrate Control and Spindle Motion

7.13 Constant cutting rate, G96, G97, LIMS

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

7.13

Constant cutting rate, G96, G97, LIMS Programming

G96 S G97 LIMS=

Explanation of the commands

G96 S G97 LIMS Activate constant cutting rate Cutting rate in m/min, always applies to master spindle Deactivate constant cutting rate Speed limitation when G96 is active (applies to master spindle)

Function
When G96 is active, the spindle speed depending on the respective workpiece diameter is automatically modified in order that the cutting rate S in m/min remains constant at the tool edge. This increases the uniformity and thus the surface quality of turned parts.
Reduced spindle speed

Constant cutting rate

Increased spindle speed

Sequence
Value range for cutting rate S The precision can be set in the machine data. The range for the cutting rate can be between 0.1 m/min ... 9999 9999.9 m/min.

For G70/G700: cutting rate in feet/min.

Adjust feed F When G96 is active, G95 feed is automatically activated in mm/rev.

If G95 was not already active, you must specify a new feedrate F when you call G96 (e.g. convert F value from mm/min to mm/rev).

7-239

Feedrate Control and Spindle Motion

12.98

7.13 Constant cutting rate, G96, G97, LIMS

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Upper speed limit LIMS If you machine a workpiece that varies greatly in diameter, it is advisable to specify a speed limit for the spindle. This prevents excessively high speeds with small diameters. LIMS is active with G96 and G97. Example: N10 SETMS(3) N20 G96 S100 LIMS=2500 Limit speed to 2500 rev/min
LIMS

The speed limit programmed with G26 or defined in machine data cannot be exceeded with LIMS. Rapid traverse With rapid traverse G0, there is no change in speed. Exception: if the contour is approached in rapid traverse and the next NC block contains a G1, G2, G3 ... path command, the speed is adjusted in the G0 approach block for the next path command. Constant cutting rate rate, G97 After G97, the control interprets an S word again as a spindle speed in rev/min. If you do not specify a new spindle speed, the last speed set with G96 is retained.

Additional notes
The G96 function can also be deactivated with G94 or G95. In this case, the last programmed speed S is used for further machining operations. In software version 4.2 and higher, G97 can also be programmed without preceding it by G96. The function then has the same effect as G95; LIMS can also be programmed.

The transverse axis must be defined in machine data.

7-240

12.98

Feedrate Control and Spindle Motion

7.14 Constant grinding wheel peripheral speed, GWPSON, GWPSOF

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

7.14

Constant grinding wheel peripheral speed, GWPSON, GWPSOF Programming

GWPSON(T No.) GWPSOF(T No.) S S1

Explanation of the commands and parameters

GWPSON(T No.) Select constant grinding wheel peripheral speed GWPS It is only necessary to specify the T number if the tool with this T number is not active. Deselect GWPS; the T number only need be specified if the tool with this T number is not active Program GWPS; value for peripheral speed in m/s or ft/s S...: GWPS for master spindle; S1...: GWPS for spindle 1

GWPSOF(T No.) S S1

Function
The "Constant grinding wheel peripheral speed" (=GWPS) function can be used to set the speed of a grinding wheel such that, taking account of the current radius, a constant peripheral speed can be maintained. The GWPS can only be selected for grinding tools (types 400-499).

Additional notes
To be able to activate the "Constant peripheral speed" function, the tool-specific grinding data, the tool-specific grinding data $TC_TPG1, $TC_TPG8 and $TC_TPG9 must be set accordingly. When the GWPS is active, the online offset values (= wear parameters; cf. Section 6 PUTFTOC, PUTFTOCF) are also considered for the speed change!

7-241

Feedrate Control and Spindle Motion

12.98

7.14 Constant grinding wheel peripheral speed, GWPSON, GWPSOF

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Select GWPS: GWPSON, program GWPS After activation of GWPSON, each subsequent S value for this spindle is interpreted as a grinding wheel peripheral speed. Selection of grinding wheel peripheral speed with GWPSON does not cause the automatic activation of tool length compensation or tool monitoring. The GWPS can be active for several spindles on a channel with different tool numbers. If GWPS is to be selected for a new tool on a spindle where GWPS is already active, the active GWPS must first be deselected with GWPSOF. Deactivate GWPS: GWPSOF When the GWPS is deselected with GWPSOF, the last speed determined is retained as set speed. GWPS programming is reset at the end of the part program or on RESET. Query active GWPS: $P_GWPS[Spindle No.] This system variable can be used to query from the part program whether the GWPS is active for a specific spindle. TRUE: GWPS is active. FALSE: GWPS is not active.

7-242

12.98

Feedrate Control and Spindle Motion

7.14 Constant grinding wheel peripheral speed, GWPSON, GWPSOF

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Programming example:
A constant grinding wheel peripheral speed is to be used for grinding tools T1 and T5. T1 is the active tool.

Programming
N20 T1 D1 N25 S1=1000 M1=3 N30 S2=1500 M2=3 N40 GWPSON N45 S1 = 60 N50 GWPSON(5) N55 S2 = 40 N60 GWPSOF N65 GWPSOF(5) Deactivate GWPS for active tool Deactivate GWPS for tool 5 (spindle 2) Select GWPS for tool 5 (2nd spindle) Set GWPS for spindle 2 to 40 m/s GWPS selection for active tool T1 Set GWPS for active tool to 60 m/s Select T1 and D1 1000 rev/min for spindle 1 1500 rev/min for spindle 2

7-243

Feedrate Control and Spindle Motion

12.98

7.15 Constant workpiece speed for centerless grinding, CLGON,

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

7.15

Constant workpiece speed for centerless grinding, CLGON, CLGOF Programming

CLGON(set) CLGOF

Explanation of the commands

CLGON(set) CLGOF Activate "Constant workpiece speed for centerless grinding" function; specify speed setpoint (set) for workpiece in rev/min Deactivate function

Function
When the "Constant workpiece speed for centerless grinding" function is active, the speed of the machined part is kept constant. The speed of the regulating wheel reduces as the diameter of the machined part decreases. n1= const
Workpiece

rWorkpiece
Regulating wheel
A

Grinding wheel
R1

Sequence
Preconditions for CLGON The axes of the regulating and grinding wheels and the work blade must be in a position that enables grinding of the workpiece from the initial to the finishing dimension. CLGON acts only if the spindle of the regulating wheel is running in speed mode. An actual position sensor is not required. G functions G94, G95, G96 and G97 can be active at the same time as CLGON. These functions have no effect on the spindle of the regulating wheel. If the regulating wheel is running is a master spindle, G96 and CLGON cancel each other. n2

rRegulating wheel
Work blade

Y X

Q1 Q2

Additional notes
The following are stored in the channel-specific machine data ($MC_TRACLG): The spindle numbers of the regulating and grinding wheels Geometrical parameters (axis numbers, direction vector of the work blade, etc.) Response on reset and end of program

7-244

12.98

Feedrate Control and Spindle Motion

7.15 Constant workpiece speed for centerless grinding, CLGON,

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

Calculation of the regulating wheel speed The speed of the regulating wheel is calculated from the set speed of the workpiece: SRegulating wheel = rWorkpiece/rRegulating wheel Sprog The radius of the workpiece rWorkpiece is calculated as the radius of the circle touching the grinding wheel, regulating wheel and work blade. n2 Offset data for CLGON The radii of the grinding and regulating wheels are taken from the current offset data for T1, D1 (grinding wheel) and T2, D1 (regulating wheel). Changes to the online tool offset (PUTFTOCF, FTOCON, FTOCOF) are included. Response on transition of traversing blocks CLGON is only active in traversing blocks without G0 (traverse with path feed). If a transition takes place from a G0 block to a traversing block without G0, the speed of the regulating wheel during the G0 block is set to the desired starting speed of the next block. If a G0 block follows a traversing block without G0, the speed is frozen at the end of the block before G0. This does not apply if the G0 block is followed by a motion block without G0 in which a new set speed is programmed. Gear stages The gear stages must be selected in such a manner that the regulating wheel can cover the entire speed range required. Monitoring Speed monitoring defined with G25 and G26 is active. The range of the work blade, in which the calculated tangent of the workpiece lies, is monitored. It is defined in machine data.

n1= const
Workpiece

rWorkpiece
Regulating wheel
A

Grinding wheel
R1

rRegulating wheel
Work blade

Y X

Q1 Q2

7-245

Feedrate Control and Spindle Motion

12.98

7.16 Programmable spindle speed limitation, G25, G26

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

7.16

Programmable spindle speed limitation, G25, G26 Programming

G25 S S1= S2= G26 S S1= S2=

Explanation of the commands

G25 G26 S S1= S2=

Lower spindle speed limitation Upper spindle speed limitation Minimum or maximum speed

Function
You can use a command in the NC program to change the minimum and maximum spindle speeds defined in the machine data and setting data.

Sequence
It is possible to program spindle speed limitations for all spindles on the channel. Example: N10 G26 S1400 S2=350 S3=600 Upper speed limitation for master spindle, spindle 2 and spindle 3. Value range Value assignment for the spindle speed can be between 0.1 rev/min ... 9999 9999.9 rev/min.

A spindle speed limitation programmed with G25 or G26 overwrites the speed limitations in the setting data and thus remains stored after the end of the program.

7-246

12.98

Feedrate Control and Spindle Motion

7.17 Several feedrates in one block: F.., FMA..

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

7.17

Several feedrates in one block: F.., FMA.. Programming

F2=... to F7=... ST=... SR=... FMA[2,x]=... to FMA[7,x]=... STA=... SRA=... Several path movements in 1 block

Several axial movements in 1 block

Explanation of the commands

F2=... to F7=... ST=... SR=... FMA[2,x]=... to FMA[7,x]=... STA=... SRA=... In addition to the path feed, you can program up to 6 further feedrates in the block; non modal Dwell time (for technology grinding: sparking out time); non modal Return path; non modal In addition to the path feed, you can program up to 6 further feedrates per axis in the block; non modal Axis-spec. dwell time (for grinding technology: spark-out time); acts nonmodally Axis-spec. return path; acts non-modally

Function
The function "Several feedrates in one block" can be used independent of external analog and/or digital inputs to activate 6 different feedrates of an NC block, 1 dwell time and 1 return in synchronism with the movement. The HW inputs signals are combined in one input byte, see description in: /FB/ A2, Various Interface Signals.

Sequence
Programming the path motion The path feedrate is programmed under the address A, which remains valid provided that no input signal is present. The numerical extension is indicated by the bit number of the input, whose change activates the feedrate:

7-247

Feedrate Control and Spindle Motion

12.98

7.17 Several feedrates in one block: F.., FMA..

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

e.g. F7=1000 F2=20 ST=1 SR=0,5

; 7 corresponds to input bit 7. ; 2 corresponds to input bit 2. ; dwell time (s) input bit 1 ; return path (mm) input bit 0

Programming the axial motion The axial path feedrate is programmed under the address FA, which remains valid provided that no input signal is present. FMA[7,x]=... to FMA[2,x]=... can also be used to program up to 6 further feedrates per axis in the block. The first expression in the square brackets indicate the bit number of the input; the second the axis for which the feedrate is to apply: e.g. FMA[3,y]=1000 Dwell time and return path are programmed under the additional addresses STA[x]=... Dwell time (s) Bit 1 and SRA[x]=... Return path (mm) Bit 0

; axial feedrate with the value 1000 for Y axis, 3 corresponds to input bit 3.

Additional notes
The axial feedrate/path feedrate (F value) corresponds to 100% feedrate. The function "Several feedrates in a block" can be used to implement feedrates which are less than or equal to the axial feedrate/path feedrate. If feedrates, swell time or return path are programmed for an axis on account of an external input, this axis must in this block must not be programmed as POSA axis (positioning axis over multiple blocks). If input bit 1 is activated for the dwell time or bit 0 for the return path, the distance to go for the path axes or the relevant single axes is deleted and the dwell time or return started. The unit for the return path is relative to the currently valid unit of measurement (mm or inch). Look-Ahead is also active for several feedrates in one block. In this way, you can use the lookahead function to restrict the the current feedrate.

7-248

12.98

Feedrate Control and Spindle Motion

7.17 Several feedrates in one block: F.., FMA..

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Programming
N20 T1 D1 F500 G0 X100 Start position

N25 G1 X105 F=20 F7=5 F3=2.5 F2=0.5 ST=1.5 SR= 0.5 ; Standard feedrate with F, roughing with F7, finish cut with F3, smooth-finishing with F2, dwell 1.5 s, return path 0.5 mm N30 ...

7-249

Feedrate Control and Spindle Motion

12.98

7.17 Several feedrates in one block: F.., FMA..

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Notes

7-250

12.98

Tool Offsets

Tool Offsets
8.1 General information.......................................................................................................... 8-252 8.2 List of tool types................................................................................................................ 8-255 8.3 Tool number T .................................................................................................................. 8-259 8.3.1 Turning machine with circular magazine..................................................................... 8-260 8.3.2 Milling machine with chain magazine .......................................................................... 8-261 8.4 Tool offset number D........................................................................................................ 8-263 8.4.1 Turning machine with circular magazine..................................................................... 8-263 8.4.2 Milling machine with chain magazine .......................................................................... 8-266 8.5 Free D number allocation, tool edge number CE (SW 5 and higher)............................... 8-270 8.5.1 Check D number (CHKDNO) ...................................................................................... 8-271 8.5.2 Re-assigning D numbers (GETDNO, SETDNO)......................................................... 8-272 8.5.3 Determine the T number of a defined D number (GETACTTD) ................................. 8-273 8.5.4 Invalidate D numbers .................................................................................................. 8-274 8.6 Additive offsets (SW 5 and higher)................................................................................... 8-275 8.6.1 Select offset (by DL number) ...................................................................................... 8-275 8.6.2 Define wear and setup values ..................................................................................... 8-276 8.6.3 Delete additive offsets (DELDL) .................................................................................. 8-278 8.7 Tool offset special features (SW 5 and higher)............................................................. 8-279 8.7.1 Mirroring of tool lengths............................................................................................... 8-280 8.7.2 Wear sign evaluation................................................................................................... 8-280 8.7.3 Tool length and plane change ..................................................................................... 8-282 8.8 Tools with a relevant tool point direction (SW 5 and higher) ............................................ 8-285 8.9 Tool radius compensation, G40, G41, G42...................................................................... 8-287 8.10 Approach and retract from contour, NORM, KONT, G450, G451.................................. 8-295 8.11 Compensation at outside corners, G450, G451 ............................................................. 8-298 8.12 Smooth approach and retraction .................................................................................... 8-301 8.13 Collision monitoring, CDON, CDOF ............................................................................... 8-309 8.14 2 1/2 D tool offset, CUT2D, CUT2DF............................................................................. 8-311 8.15 Extension of approach/retraction strategy,G461/G462 (SW 5 and later)..................... 8-313 8.16 Tool length compensation for orientable tools, TCARR, TCOABS, TCOFR.................. 8-317 8.17 Grinding-specific tool monitoring in part program TMON, TMOF .................................. 8-320 8.18 Make active tool offset operative immediately................................................................ 8-322

8-251

Tool Offsets

12.98

8.1 General information

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

8.1

General information Why use tool offsets?

Tool path

When writing a program, it is not necessary to specify the cutter diameter, the tool point direction of the turning tool (left/right-handed turning tools) or tool length. You simply program the workpiece dimensions according to the dimensions in the production drawing. When machining a workpiece, the tool paths are controlled according to the tool geometry such that the programmed contour can be machined using any tool.

Contour

The control corrects the traverse path

You enter the tool data separately in the tool table on the control. All you need to do is call the required tool with its offset data in the program. During program execution, the control fetches the offset data from the tool files and corrects the tool path individually for different tools.

Programmed contour

Corrected tool path

8-252

12.98

Tool Offsets

8.1 General information

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Which tool offsets are stored in the control's compensation memory?

In the compensation memory enter the following: Geometrical dimensions: length, radius. They consist of several components (geometry, wear). The control computes the components to a certain dimension (e.g. overall length 1, total radius). The respective overall dimension becomes effective when the compensation memory is activated. These values are calculated in the axes according to the tool type and the current plane G17, G18, G19. Tool type The type determines which geometry axes are needed and how they are calculated (drill or milling tool or turning tool). Tool point direction
P = Tool tip R = Radius S = Cutting edge center L1
R S P

Radius

Length

Tool parameters The following Section List of tool types provides a description of the tool parameters. The input fields with "DP... need to be set with the respective tool parameters. Tool parameters that are not needed, must be given the value "zero.

Caution
Values that have been entered once in the compensation memory are included in the processing for each tool numbered.

8-253

Tool Offsets

12.98

8.1 General information

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Tool length compensation This value compensates for the differences in length between the tools used. The tool length is the distance between the toolholder reference point and the tip of the tool. This length is measured and entered in the control together with definable wear values. From this data, the control calculates the traversing movements in the infeed direction.

Additional notes
The compensation value of the tool length depends on the spatial orientation of the tool. See the section on tool orientation and tool length compensation for more information.

Tool radius compensation The contour and tool path are not identical. The cutter or tool nose radius center must travel on a path that is equidistant from the contour. To do this, the programmed tool center point path is displaced by an amount that depends on the radius and the direction of machining and such that the tool nose travels exactly along the desired contour. The control fetches the required radii during program execution and calculates the tool path from these values.

Equidistant path

The tool radius compensation acts correspondingly to the default CUT2D or CUT2DF. You will find more information later in this section.

8-254

12.98

Tool Offsets

8.2 List of tool types

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

8.2

List of tool types

Coding of tool types for milling tools Group with type 1xy (milling tool): 100 Milling tool according to CLDATA 110 Spherical head cutter 120 End mill (without fillet) 121 End mill (with fillet) 130 Angle head cutter (without fillet) 131 Angle head cutter (with fillet) 140 Facing tool
Entries in tool parameters DP1 DP3 DP6 DP21 1xy Length 1 -Geometry Radius -Geometry Length -Adapter Length 1 Length 1 Total F-Reference point adapter (with tool inserted =toolholder reference point) Effect G17: Set remaining values to 0 G18: Length 1 in Z Radius in X/Y Length 1 Adapter F' F

Wear values as required

Length 1 in Y Radius in Z/X Length 1 in X G19: Radius in Y/Z

F-Toolholder reference point

In SW 5 and higher, a fixed assignment is possible for G17, G18, G19 e.g. length1=X, length2=Z, length3=Y

DP3 DP6 DP21 DP22 DP23

Length 1 - Geometry
F'

Base dimension Length 3

Radius

- Geometry

Length 1 - Base Length 2 - Base Length 3 - Base

F- Toolholder reference point F - Toolholder reference point

Radius

Effect
G17:

Length 1 in Z Length 2 in Y Length 3 in X Radius in Y/Z Length 1 in Y Length 2 in X Length 3 in Z Radius in X/Y Length 1 in X Length 2 in Z Length 3 in Y Radius in Z/X

Base dim. Length 1

145 150 155

Thread cutter Side mill Taper cutter

Entries in tool parameters DP1 1xy

Base dimension Length 2 F

Z Y X Y X Z X Z Y

Wear values as required Set remaining values to 0

G18:

G19:

In SW 5 and higher, a fixed assignment is possible for G17, G18, G19 e.g. radius X/Y for G17, radius Z/X for G18, radius Z/Y for G19

8-255

Tool Offsets

12.98

8.2 List of tool types

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Coding of tool types for drills Group type 2xy (drills): 200 Twist drill 205 Solid drill 210 Boring rod 220 Center drill 230 Countersink 231 Counterbore 240 Tapping regular thread 241 Tapping fine thread 242 Tapping Whitworth thread 250 Reamer

Entries in tool parameters DP1 2xy DP3 Length 1 Length 1 F

Wear values as required Set remaining values to 0

Effect G17: Length 1 in Z G18: G19: Length 1 in Y Length 1 in X F - toolholder reference point

Breakdown of tool types for turning tools Group type 5xy (turning tools): 500 Roughing tool 510 Finishing tool 520 Grooving tool 530 Parting tool 540 Threading tool

Turning tool e.g. G18: Z/X plane F - Toolholder reference point X F Length 1 (X) P R S

R = Radius of the tool nose (tool radius) S 0 Position of the tool nose center Length 2 (Z)

Tool tip P (tool nose 1 = Dn) Z

8-256

12.98

Tool Offsets

8.2 List of tool types

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

The tool parameter DP2 specifies the length of the tool nose. Position value 1 to 9 possible. X Tool nose position DP2 1 2 P Z 3 4 5

X 6 7 8 9 P=S Z Note: The data Length 1, Length 2 refer to the point P for tool nose position 1-8; but S for position 9 (S=P) Entries in tool parameters DP1 5xy DP2 1...9 DP3 Length 1 DP4 Length 2 DP6 Radius Wear values as required Set remaining values to 0. Effect G17: Length 1 in Y Length 2 in X

Length 1 in X G18: Length 2 in Z G19: Length 1 in Z Length 2 in Y

Breakdown of tool types Group type 4xy (grinding tools): 400 Surface grinding wheel 401 Surface grinding wheel with monitoring 403 Surface grinding wheel with monitoring without tool base dimension for grinding wheel peripheral speed GWPS 410 Facing wheel 411 Facing wheel with monitoring 413 Facing wheel with monitoring without tool base dimension for grinding wheel peripheral speed GWPS 490 Dresser

Entries in tool parameters 403 DP1 Position*) DP2 DP3 Length 1 DP4 Length 2 Radius DP6
*) Tool nose position Wear values as required Set remaining values to 0

TPG1 TPG2 TPG3 TPG4 TPG5 TPG6 TPG7 TPG8 TPG9

Spindle number Chaining rule Minimum wheel radius Minimum wheel width Current wheel width Maximum speed Max. peripheral speed Angle of the inclined wheel Parameter no. f. radius calculation

F - Toolholder reference point

Effect G17: Length 1 in Y Length 2 in X Radius in X/Y Length 1 in X Length 2 in Z Radius in Z/X Length 1 in Z Length 2 in Y Radius in Y/Z
Radius F F'

Base Length 1 Base Length 2

G18: G19:

Geometry Length 2

Geometry Length 1

8-257

Tool Offsets

12.98

8.2 List of tool types

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Chaining rule The geometry, wear and base dimension tool length compensations can be chained for the right and left grinding wheel offsets respectively, i.e. the tool length compensations for the left cutting edge are changed such that the values are automatically entered for the right edge and vice versa. Please refer to Description of Functions /FB II/, W4 "Grinding".

Breakdown of tool types for slotting saw Group with type: 700 Slotting saw

Entries in tool parameters DP3 Length 1 - Base dim. DP4 Length 2 - Base dim. DP6 Diameter Geometry

Groove width b Base dim. Length 2 Excess. dim. k

Diameter d

DP7 Groove width-Geometry

Base dim. Length 1

DP8 Excess. dim.- Geometry

Wear values as required Set remaining values to 0

Effect
G17: Half diameter (L1) in X Excess dim. in (L2) Y Saw blade in (R) X/Y G17: Half diameter (L1) in Y Excess dim. in (L2) X Saw blade in (R) Z/X Plane selection 1st-2nd axis (X-Y) Plane selection 1st-2nd axis (X-Z)

L1 = DP3+DP6/2 L2 = DP4+DP7/2 - DP8 R = DP7/2

G17: Half diameter (L1) in Z Excess dim. in (L2) Z Saw blade in (R) Y/Z

Plane selection 1st-2nd axis (Y-Z)

Additional notes
The parameters for the tool types are described in: References: FB, W1 Tool Compensation

8-258

12.98

Tool Offsets

8.3 Tool number T

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

8.3

Tool number T Programming

Tx or T = x or Tx=y T = "WZ"
T0

Tool or magazine location whose tool is to be used for machining (Tx=y, SW 5 and higher). Tool with the tool identifier WZ. Deselect the tool, or no tool is selected. Tool change (only required in certain cases)

Explanation of the parameters

Tx or T = x or Tx=y M6 T="WZ" x or y Call tool Tool change, after which tool T is active The tool with the identifier "WZ" is called Tool/magazine location number, X = 600, in SW 5 and higher: 1200 (depending on the configuration of the machine manufacturer) Spindle number with active tool management/flat D no.

Function
By programming the T word a direct tool change or selection of tool magazine location occurs.

Machine manufacturer (MH 8.1)

The effect of the T number call is defined in machine data. See machine manufacturer's configuration.

8-259

Tool Offsets

12.98

8.3 Tool number T

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Example
A magazine has locations 1 to 20: Location 1 is taken up by drilling tool, duplo no.=1, T15, disabled Location 2 is not occupied Location 3 is taken up by drilling tool, duplo no.=2, T10, enabled Location 4 is taken up by drilling tool, duplo no.=3, T1, active Locations 5 to 20 are not occupied 1. Programming of T1 or T=1: Location number 1 of the magazine associated with the toolholder is selected. 2. The identifier "drill" of the tool located there is determined. The selection procedure is completed. 3. It is followed by the tool change procedure: After the "Take the first available tool from the group" tool search strategy, T10 is loaded, as T15 is disabled. 4. After the "Take the first tool with 'active' status from the group tool search strategy, T1 is loaded.
1 20

5 4

8.3.1 Turning machine with circular magazine

8-260

12.98

Tool Offsets

8.3 Tool number T

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Note: When calling the tool, the tool offset values stored under a D number must be activated. the appropriate working plane (system setting: G18) must be programmed. This ensures that the length compensation is assigned to the correct axis. If the selected magazine location is not occupied in a selected magazine location, the tool command has the same effect as T0. Selection of the unoccupied magazine location can be used for positioning the empty location.

Machine manufacturer (MH 8.2)

Tool management: See machine manufacturer's configuration.

8.3.2 Milling machine with chain magazine

Sequence
The following procedure usually applies: T = "ID" or T = No., tool management with M06. D = offset 1 to nth tool edge no. (n 9, SW 5 and higher:12)) Selection: with integrated tool management relative D no. structure with internal reference to the associated tools (e.g. replacement tool management and monitoring function possible) without integrated tool management flat D no. structure without internal reference to associated tools

Machine manufacturer (MH 8.3)

Tool management: See machine manufacturer's configuration.

8-261

Tool Offsets

12.98

8.3 Tool number T

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Tool magazine The T number preselects the tool, e.g. positioning the magazine to the tool change position. The actual tool change is triggered by M6. The M number for the tool change is set via the machine data. (See also the section on miscellaneous functions M). Only then do the new tool offsets apply. Note: When calling the tool, the tool offset values stored under a D number must be activated. the appropriate working plane (system setting: G17) must be programmed. This ensures that the length compensation is assigned to the correct axis. If the selected magazine location is not occupied in a selected magazine location, the tool command has the same effect as T0. Selection of the unoccupied magazine location can be used for positioning the empty location.

8-262

12.98

Tool Offsets

8.4 Tool offset number D

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

8.4

Tool offset number D Machine manufacturer (MH 8.4)

See machine manufacturer's configuration.

8.4.1 Turning machine with circular magazine

Programming
D... Tool offset number: 1...32000 (max., see machine manufacturer's specifications) D0: no offset active!

Explanation
SW 4 and higher The "flat D number structure" is used if the tool management takes place outside the NC kernel. In this case, the D numbers are created with the corresponding tool compensation blocks without assignment to tools. T can continue to be programmed in the part program. However, this T has no reference to the programmed D number. SW 5 and higher With the function "tool offsets with D numbers only" (flat D no.), a unique D no. is assigned.
T1 D1 T2 D2 T3 D3 T4 D4

Example: Circular magazine with 12 locations and 12 single-edge tools.

Machine manufacturer (MH 8.5)

T can or cannot be programmed in the part program, depending on the setting in MD 18102. T... 1D [8-digit] 2D 3D D32000

8-263

Tool Offsets

12.98

8.4 Tool offset number D

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Sequence
The following procedure usually applies: T = location, tool management without M06. D = offset 1 to n (n 32000) Selection: with integrated tool management unique D no. structure with internal reference to the associated tools (e.g. replacement tool management and monitoring function possible) without integrated tool management flat D no. structure without internal reference to associated tools Creating a new D number Creating a new D number with the associated tool compensation blocks is performed exactly as for the normal D number via tool parameters $TC_DP1 to $TC_DP25. The T number need not be entered any more.

Machine manufacturer (MH 8.6)

The type of D number management is defined in the machine data. There are two settings available for programming D numbers in the "flat D number structure": Flat D number structure with direct programming Flat D number structure with indirect programming (SW5 and higher)

a) Direct, absolute programming

Programming is performed in the same way as with the normal D number structure. The compensation blocks to be used are called directly via their D number. Assignment of the D number to a specific tool does not take place in the NC kernel.

Machine manufacturer (MH 8.7)

Direct programming is defined by MD.

8-264

12.98

Tool Offsets

8.4 Tool offset number D

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Programming example
$MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE=0 ... D92 ... T17 ... D16 ... D32000 ... T29000500 ... D1 Traverse with tool offsets from D1 Select T29000500, traverse with tool offsets from D32000 Traverse with tool offsets from D32000 Traverse with tool offsets from D16 Select T17, traverse with tool offsets from D92 Traverse with tool offsets from D92 MD20270 CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT = 1

b) Indirect programming by parameter (SW5 and higher)

It is possible to assign up to 9 D numbers to each tool in a D number table which is supplied by the PLC. Using the system parameter $A_DNO[i] selects the i-th D number in this D number table. D=$A_DNO[i] Example: i=19

Machine manufacturer (MH8.4)

Indirect programming is defined by MD.

c) Indirect programming by index (SW5 and higher)

It is possible to assign up to 9 D numbers to each tool in a D number table which is supplied by the PLC. With indirect subscripted programming by index, the i-th D number is selected from this D number table. D=i Example: Di i=19

Location in the PLC D number table

Machine manufacturer (MH 8.8)

Indirect programming is defined by MD.

8-265

Tool Offsets

12.98

8.4 Tool offset number D

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Clear D numbers
$TC_DP1[d]=0 clears the tool compensation block with the D number d. $TC_DP1[0]=0 clears all tool compensation blocks in the NCK. Variable for indirect programming $TC_DPx[d] Offset value The data records are displayed without a reference to a T number. X d Parameter number D number 132000

Additional notes
Compensation data blocks in the Flat D number structure" format cannot be used in operation with the normal D number structure, and compensation blocks that were created with the normal D number structure cannot be used in conjunction with the flat D number structure.

8.4.2 Milling machine with chain magazine

Programming
D... Tool offset number: 1... 9 or 12 (SW5 and higher) D0: no offsets active!

Explanation
Assignment of tool offset numbers to the tool, e.g. T1 T2 T3 T6 T9 T... 1D 2D 1D 1D 1D 1D 1D 1D 2D 2D 3D 3D 2D 3D D9 or 12

8-266

12.98

Tool Offsets

8.4 Tool offset number D

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Sequence
The following procedure usually applies: T = location, tool management with M06. D = offset 1 to nth tool edge no. (n 9 or 12, SW 5 and higher) Selection: with integrated tool management unique D no. structure with internal reference to the associated tools (e.g. replacement tool management and monitoring function possible) without integrated tool management flat D no. structure without internal reference to associated tools

Machine manufacturer (MH 8.9)

Tool management: See machine manufacturer's specifications

Function
It is possible to assign between 1 and 9 (12) tool noses with different tool compensation blocks to a specific tool. When D is called, the tool length compensation for a specific tool nose is activated. When D0 is programmed, offsets for the tool are ineffective. If no D word is programmed, the default setting from the machine data is valid for tool change. Tool length compensations take immediate effect if the D number is programmed. A tool radius offset must also be activated by G41/G42.

8-267

Tool Offsets

12.98

8.4 Tool offset number D

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Machine manufacturer (MH 8.10)

Default setting of machine manufacturer, e.g.: D1, i.e. with no D programming, D1 is activated/selected on the tool change. The tools are activated with T programming (see machine manufacturer's specifications). The compensation is performed with the first programmed traversing of the respective tool length compensation axis.

The required D number must always be programmed before the tool length compensation can be selected. The tool length compensation is also effective if the compensation is set in the machine data.
Working without a T or D number In the machine data, a default T and D number can be set; they no longer have to be programmed and become active after Power On / Reset. Example: All machining is performed with the same grinding wheel Machine data MD 20110: RESET_MODE_MASK, bit 2 can be set to keep the current tool active after a Reset; see /PGA/ Programming Guide "Advanced".

Machine manufacturer (MH 8.11)

See machine manufacturer's specifications

8-268

12.98

Tool Offsets

8.4 Tool offset number D

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Working with tool offset blocks You can assign up to 9 (12) offset blocks (D numbers D1D12) to a T number. This allows you to define various cutting edges for one tool, which you can call as required in the NC program. Different offset values could be used, for example, for the left and right cutting edge of a grooving tool.

N10 T2 N20 G0 X35 Z-20 N30 G1 D1 X10 N40...D6 Z-5

-20

-5

Working without tool offsets, D0 D0 is the default setting after start-up of the control. If you do not enter a D number you work without a tool offset.

The modified values do not become active until the T or D number is next programmed.
Programming example N10 T1 N11 G0 X... Z... N50 T4 D2 ... N70 G0 Z... D1 D1 for tool 4 active, only cutting edge changed Tool 1 is activated with the associated D1 Tool length compensation is superimposed here Load tool 4, D2 from T4 is active

8-269

Tool Offsets

12.98

8.5 Free D number allocation, tool edge number CE (SW 5 and higher)

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

8.5

Free D number allocation, tool edge number CE (SW 5 and higher)

In SW 5 and higher, D numbers can be assigned freely. This includes the ability to rename existing D numbers. The originally assigned D number is retained as a tool edge number (CE) and is defined using the system parameter $TC_DPCE. References: FB, W1 (Tool Compensation)

Machine manufacturer (MH 8.12)

The maximum number of D numbers (tool edge numbers) and the maximum number of tool edges per tool are defined by machine data. The following commands are only appropriate if the maximum tool edge number (MD 18105) is greater than the number of tool edges per tool (MD 18106). See machine manufacturer's specifications.

Additional notes
In addition to relative D number assignment, 'flat' or 'absolute' D numbers (1-32000) can be assigned without a reference to a T number ('flat D number structure' within the function).

8-270

12.98

Tool Offsets

8.5 Free D number allocation, tool edge number CE (SW 5 and higher)

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

8.5.1 Check D number (CHKDNO) Programming

state=CHKDNO(Tno1,Tno2,Dno)

Explanation of the parameters

state TRUE: FALSE: Unique D numbers have been assigned for the area checked. There is a D number conflict or the parameters are invalid. The parameters which caused the conflict were passed in Tno1, Tno2 and Dno. These data can be evaluated in the part program.

CHKDNO(Tno1,Tno2) CHKDNO(Tno1) CHKDNO

All D numbers of the specified tools are checked. All D numbers of Tno1 are checked against all other tools. All D numbers of all tools are checked against all other tools.

Function
You can use CKKDNO to check whether the existing D numbers are unique. The D numbers of all tools defined within a TO unit can only occur once. Replacement tools are not checked.

8-271

Tool Offsets

12.98

8.5 Free D number allocation, tool edge number CE (SW 5 and higher)

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

8.5.2 Re-assigning D numbers (GETDNO, SETDNO) Programming

d = GETDNO(t,ce) state = SETDNO(t,ce,d)

Explanation of the parameters

d t ce state D number of the tool edge T number of the tool Tool edge number (CE number) Specifies whether the command was executed without an error (TRUE or FALSE).

Function
GETDNO This command returns the D number of a specific tool edge (ce) of a tool with T number t. If no D number exists for the parameters entered, d=0 is set. If the D number is invalid, a value greater than 32000 is returned. SETDNO This command assigns the value d to the D number of a tool edge ce of tool t. The result of this instruction is returned in state (TRUE or FALSE) If no data record matches the parameters entered, FALSE is returned. Syntax errors generate an alarm. The D number cannot be set explicitly to 0.

Example: (re-assigning a D number) $TC_DP2[1,2] = 120 $TC_DP3[1,2] = 5.5 $TC_DPCE[1,2] = 3; Tool edge number CE ... N10 def int DNrAlt, DNrNeu = 17 N20 DNrAlt = GETDNO(1,3) N30 SETDNO(1,3,DNrNeu)

8-272

12.98

Tool Offsets

8.5 Free D number allocation, tool edge number CE (SW 5 and higher)

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

This assigns the new D value 17 to tool edge CE=3. The data of this tool edge are now addressed via D number 17, both via the system parameters and in programs using the NC address.

Additional notes
Unique D numbers must be assigned. Two different tool edges of a tool cannot have the same D number.

8.5.3 Determine the T number of a defined D number (GETACTTD) Programming

status = GETACTTD(Tno, Dno)

Explanation of the parameters

Dnr Tnr status D number for which the T number is to be searched. T number found 0: -1: -2: -5: The T number was found. Tnr is assigned the value of the T number. No T number exists for the specified D number; Tnr=0. The D number is not absolute. Tnr is assigned the value of the first tool to be found with a D number matching the value in Dnr. The function could not be executed for a different reason.

8-273

Tool Offsets

12.98

8.5 Free D number allocation, tool edge number CE (SW 5 and higher)

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Function
GETACTTD is used to determine the T number associated with an absolute D number. The function does not check that the numbers are unique. If several identical D numbers exist within a TO unit, the T number of the first tool to be found is returned. The command is not appropriate for use with 'flat' D numbers, since a value of 1 is always returned in this case (no T number in database).

8.5.4 Invalidate D numbers Programming

DZERO

Explanation
DZERO Identifies all D numbers of the TO unit as invalid

Function
The command is used for support during setup. Offset data blocks tagged in this way are no longer checked by the language command CHKDNO. To make them accessible again, the D number must be set again with SETDNO.

8-274

12.98

Tool Offsets

8.6 Additive offsets (SW 5 and higher)

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

8.6

Additive offsets (SW 5 and higher)

Additive offsets are essentially process offsets which can be programmed during machining. They refer to the geometrical data of a tool edge and are thus components of the tool edge data. The data of an additive offset are addressed via a DL number (DL: Location-dependent; offsets with reference to the location of use).

8.6.1 Select offset (by DL number) Programming

DLx additive offset selection, x = 1 to 6

Explanation
Up to 6 additive offsets can be activated per D number (saved under the respective DL numbers). You can distinguish between setup and wear values. DL1 is activated when a D number is called.

Function
Setup value: The setup value is defined optionally by the machine manufacturer by MD. Same tool edge: The same tool edge is used for 2 bearing seats (see example). Compensation can be made for a location-dependent measurement error occuring as a result of machining forces, etc. Wear value: Location-dependent allowances can be made for over/under-dimensioning.

Location 2

Location 1 X

D7 DL2

-20

-15

-5

8-275

Tool Offsets

12.98

8.6 Additive offsets (SW 5 and higher)

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Machine manufacturer (MH 8.13)

Machine data are used to activate and define the number of additive offsets. See machine manufacturer's specifications.

Programming example
N110 T7 D7 The tool turret is positioned at location 7. D7 and DL1 are activated and traversed in the next block N120 retracted

N120 G0 X10 Z1 N130 G1 Z-6 N140 G0 DL2 Z-14 N150 G1 Z-21 N160 G0 X200 Z200 ...

Approach tool change position

8.6.2 Define wear and setup values

Wear and setup values can be read and written via system parameters and the corresponding OPI services. The logic is based on the logic of the corresponding system parameters for tools and tool edges.

Programming
$TC_SCPxy[t,d] $TC_ECPxy[t,d] Wear values Setup values

8-276

12.98

Tool Offsets

8.6 Additive offsets (SW 5 and higher)

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Explanation of the parameters

$TC_SCPxy Wear values are assigned to the corresponding geometry parameters via xy, where x is the number of the wear value and y is the reference to the geometry parameter. Setup values are assigned to the corresponding geometry parameters via xy, where x is the number of the setup value and y is the reference to the geometry parameter. T number of the tool D number of the tool edge

$TC_ECPxy

t d

Function
System parameters $TC_DP3 - $TC_DP11 describe the tool geometry. In addition to the parameters for the physical wear ($TC_DP12 - $TC_DP20), up to six wear values ($TC_SCP1y - $TC_SCP6y) and up to six setup values ($TC_ECP1y - $TC_ECP6y) can be assigned to each geometry parameter. Example: Parameters: Wear values: Setup values:

$TC_DP3 (length 3) $TC_SCP13 - $TC_SCP63 $TC_ECP13 - $TC_ECP63

$TC_SCP43 [t, d] = 1.0 The wear value of length 3 is set to the value 1.0 for the tool edge (D number d) of the tool (t).

Note
The defined wear and setup values are added to the geometry parameters and the other offset parameters (D numbers).

8-277

Tool Offsets

12.98

8.6 Additive offsets (SW 5 and higher)

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

8.6.3 Delete additive offsets (DELDL) Programming

status = DELDL[t,d]

Explanation of the parameters

DELDL[t,d] DELDL[t] DELDL status All additive offsets of the tool edge with D number d of tool t are deleted. All additive offsets of all tool edges of tool t are deleted. All additive offsets of the tool edges of all tools of the TO unit are deleted (for the channel in which the command is programmed). 0: Deletion was successful. 1: Deletion could not be performed (if the parameters describe only one tool edge), or deletion was not complete (if the parameters describe several tool edges).

Function
DELDL is used to delete the additive offsets for the tool edge of a tool (in order to release memory). Both the defined wear values and the setup values are deleted.

Additional notes
The wear and setup values of active tools cannot be deleted (similar to deletion of D offsets or tool data).

8-278

12.98

Tool Offsets

8.7 Tool offset special features (SW 5 and higher)

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

8.7

Tool offset special features (SW 5 and higher) Function

Setting data SD 42900 - SD 42940 can be used to control the evaluation of the sign for tool length and wear. The same applies to the behavior of the wear components when mirroring geometry axes or changing the machining plane. References below to wear values refer to the total of the actual wear values ($TC_DP12 to $TC_DP20) and the resulting offsets with the wear values ($SCPX3 to $SCPX11) and setup values ($ECPX3 to $ECPX11). You will find more information on resulting offsets in /FBW/, Description of Functions, Tool Management. See also: /PGA/, Programming Guide Advanced Chapter 8 /PG/, Programming Guide Fundamentals, Chapter 8 Description of Functions, Basic Machine (Part 1), Tool Compensation (W1)

Required setting data

SD42900 MIRROR_TOOL_LENGTH SD42910 MIRROR_TOOL_WEAR SD42920 WEAR_SIGN_CUTPOS SD42930 WEAR_SIGN SD42940 TOOL_LENGTH_CONST Mirroring of tool length components and components of the tool base dimension Mirroring of wear values of the tool length components Sign evaluation of the wear components depending on the tool point direction Inverts the sign of the wear dimensions Assignment of tool length components to geometry axes

8-279

Tool Offsets

12.98

8.7 Tool offset special features (SW 5 and higher)

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

8.7.1 Mirroring of tool lengths

SD 42900 MIRROR_TOOL_LENGTH Setting data not equal to zero: The tool length components ($TC_DP3, $TC_DP4 and $TC_DP5) and the components of the tool base dimensions ($TC_DP21, $TC_DP22 and $TC_DP23), whose associated axes are mirrored, are also mirrored through sign inversion. The wear values are not mirrored. If these are also to be mirrored, setting data $SC_MIRROR_TOOL_WEAR must be enabled.
X X

D13

Z M W

Z W1 M1

WCS 1 D13 with SL3

WCS 2 D13 with SL4

SD 42910 MIRROR_TOOL_WEAR Setting data not equal to zero: The wear values of the tool length components, whose associated axes are mirrored, are also mirrored by sign inversion.

8.7.2 Wear sign evaluation

SD 42920 WEAR_SIGN_CUTPOS Setting data not equal to zero: In the case of tools with a relevant tool point direction (turning and grinding tools tool types 400599), the sign evaluation of the wear components depends on the tool point direction in the machining plane. This setting data has no effect on tool types which do not have a relevant tool point direction. In the following table, the dimensions whose sign is inverted by SD 42920 (not equal to 0) are marked with an X:
Tool point direction 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 X X X X X X Length 1 Length 2

8-280

12.98

Tool Offsets

8.7 Tool offset special features (SW 5 and higher)

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Additional notes
The sign settings of SD 42920 and 42910 are independent. For example, if the sign of a dimensional parameter is changed by both setting data, the resulting sign is unchanged. SD 42930 WEAR_SIGN Setting data not equal to zero: Inverts the sign of all wear dimensions. This affects the tool length as well as other variables such as tool radius, rounding radius etc. If a positive wear dimension is entered, the tool becomes "shorter" and "thinner". Example: see following section "Activation of modified setting data".

8-281

Tool Offsets

12.98

8.7 Tool offset special features (SW 5 and higher)

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

8.7.3 Tool length and plane change

SD 42940 TOOL_LENGTH_CONST Setting data not equal to zero: The assignment between the tool length components (length, wear and tool base dimension) and the geometry axes is not modified when the machining plane is changed (G17G19). The following table shows the assignment between the tool length components and the geometry axes for turning and grinding tools (tool types 400 to 599):
Contents 17 18*) 19 -17 -18 -19
*)

Length 1 Y X Z Z Y X X Z Y X Z Y

Length 2

Length 3 Z Y X Y X Z

Each value not equal to 0 which is not equal to one of

the six listed values is evaluated like value 18.

The following table shows the assignment between the tool length components and the geometry axes for all other tools (tool types < 400 and > 599):
Machining plane 17*) 18 19 -17 -18 -19
*)

Length 1 Z Y X Z Y X Y X Z X Z Y

Length 2

Length 3 X Z Y Y X Z

Each value not equal to 0 which is not equal to one of

the six listed values is evaluated as value 17.

8-282

12.98

Tool Offsets

8.7 Tool offset special features (SW 5 and higher)

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Additional notes
For representation in tables, it is assumed that geometry axes 1 to 3 are named X, Y, Z. The axis order and not the axis identifier determines the assignment between an offset and an axis. Activation of modified setting data

Function
When the setting data described above are modified, the tool components are not re-evaluated until the next time a tool edge is selected. If a tool is already active and the data of this tool are to be reevaluated, the tool must be selected again. The same applies in the event that the resulting tool length is modified due to a change in the mirroring status of an axis. The tool must be selected again after the mirror command, in order to activate the modified tool length components. Orientable toolholders and new setting data

Function
Setting data SD 42900 - SD 42940 have no effect on the components of an active orientable toolholder. However, the calculation with an orientable toolholder always allows for a tool with its total resulting length (tool length + wear + tool base dimension). All modifications initiated by the setting data are included in the calculation of the resulting total length; i.e. vectors of the orientable toolholder are independent of the machining plane.

8-283

Tool Offsets

12.98

8.7 Tool offset special features (SW 5 and higher)

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Additional notes
When orientable toolholders are used, it is frequently practical to define all tools for a non-mirrored basic system, even those which are only used for mirrored machining. When machining with mirrored axes, the toolholder is then rotated such that the actual position of the tool is described correctly. All tool length components then automatically act in the correct direction, dispensing with the need for control of individual component evaluation via setting data, depending on the mirroring status of individual axes. It can also be practical to use the functionality of orientable toolholders if no physical means of rotating tools is provided on the machine, but tools with different orientations are permanently installed. The tool dimensioning can then be performed consistently in a basic orientation, and the dimensions relevant for machining can be determined by rotating a virtual toolholder.

8-284

12.98

Tool Offsets

8.8 Tools with a relevant tool point direction (SW 5 and higher)

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

8.8

Tools with a relevant tool point direction (SW 5 and higher) Function
Up to SW 4.x In the case of tools with a relevant tool point direction (turning and grinding tools tool types 400599; see Section 8.7.2), a change from G40 to G41/G42 or vice-versa is treated as a tool change. If a transformation is active (e.g. TRANSMIT), this leads to a preprocessor stop and hence possibly to deviations from the intended part contour. SW 5 and higher The following changes have been made: 1. A change from G40 to G41 / G42 and vice-versa is no longer treated as a tool change. A preprocessor stop therefore no longer occurs with Transmit. 2. The straight line between the tool edge center points at the block start and block end is used to calculate intersection points with the approach and retraction block. The difference between the tool edge reference point and the tool edge center point is superimposed on this movement. During approach and retraction with KONT (tool travels around the contour point; see Section 8.10), superimposing takes place in the linear subblock of the approach or retraction movement. The geometrical relationships are therefore identical for tools with and without a relevant tool point direction. Differences from the previous behavior occur only in relatively rare situations where the approach or retraction block does not intersect with an adjacent motion block, see diagram below.

8-285

Tool Offsets

12.98

8.8 Tools with a relevant tool point direction (SW 5 and higher)

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Last position of tool edge center point at the contour (SW 5 and higher)

Tool edge center point Programmed retraction block

Tool end position Block without point of intersection with previous block Tool edge reference point Center point path Last position of tool edge center point at the contour (up to SW 4.x)

Tool edge reference point

3. In circle blocks and in motion blocks containing rational polynomials with a denominator degree > 4, it is not permitted to change a tool with active tool radius compensation in cases where the distance between the tool edge center point and the tool edge reference point changes. With other types of interpolation, it is now possible to change when a transformation is active (e.g. Transmit). 4. For tool radius compensation with variable tool orientation, the transformation from the tool edge reference point to the tool edge center point can no longer be performed by means of a simple zero offset. Tools with a relevant tool point direction are therefore not permitted for 3D peripheral milling (an alarm is output).

Additional notes
The above does not apply to face milling, because previously defined tool types without a relevant tool point direction are only permitted in this case (tools which do not have an explicitly approved tool type are treated as a ball end mill with the specified radius. A tool point direction parameter is ignored.)

8-286

12.98

Tool Offsets

8.9 Tool radius compensation, G40, G41, G42

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

8.9

Tool radius compensation, G40, G41, G42 Programming

G40 G41 G42 OFFN=

Explanation of the commands

G40 G41 G42 OFFN= Deactivate tool radius compensation Activate tool radius compensation; tool operates in machining direction to the left of the contour. Activate tool radius compensation, tool operates in machining direction to the right of the contour. Allowance on the programmed contour (normal contour offset)

Function
Equidistant path

When tool radius compensation is active, the control automatically calculates the equidistant tool paths for different tools. You can generate equidistant paths with OFFN, e.g. for rough-finishing.
Equidistant path

8-287

Tool Offsets

12.98

8.9 Tool radius compensation, G40, G41, G42

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Sequence
The control requires the following information in order to calculate the tool paths: 1. Tool number T/edge number D Where appropriate, a tool offset number D is also required. The distance between the tool path and the workpiece contour is calculated from the cutter and tool edge radii and the tool point direction parameters. With flat D number structure it is only necessary to program the D number.
G41

G42

G41

G42

G41

2. Direction of machining G41, G42

From this information, the control detects the direction in which the tool path is to be displaced.

3. Working plane G17 to G19

From this information, the control detects the plane and therefore the axis directions for compensation. Example: Milling cutters N10 G17 G41 The tool radius compensation is performed in the X/Y plane, the tool length compensation is performed in the Z direction.

Milling:

Radius
diu s

+X
Ra

Ra s diu

Note: On 2-axis machines, the tool radius compensation is only possible in "real" planes, in general with G18 (see tool length compensation table).

th ng Le

Le ng th

8-288

12.98

Tool Offsets

8.9 Tool radius compensation, G40, G41, G42

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Turning:
Y

Length

X
Length 1

Radius Length 2
Ra diu s

Le ng th

8-289

Tool Offsets

12.98

8.9 Tool radius compensation, G40, G41, G42

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Activation/deactivation of tool radius compensation A travel command must be programmed with G0 or G1 in an NC block with G40, G41 or G42. This travel command must specify at least one axis in the selected working plane. If you only specify one axis on activation, the last position on the second axis is added automatically and traversed with both axes. Example: N10 G0 X50 T1 D1 N20 G1 G41 Y50 F200 N30 Y100 Only tool length compensation is activated in block N10. X50 is approached without compensation. In block N20, the radius compensation is activated, point X50/Y50 is approached with compensation.

Milling:

Compensation on X

Compensation on Y

0 N2

N10 50 X

Turning: Example: N20 T1 D1 N30 G0 X100 Z20 N40 G42 X20 Z1 N50 G1 Z-20 F0.2 Only tool length compensation is activated in block N20. X100 Z20 is approached without compensation in block N30. In block N40, the radius compensation is activated, point X20/Z1 is approached with compensation.
X

100 Z 20 1

Using NORM and KONT you can determine the tool path for activation/deactivation of compensation mode (see Section 8.10 Contour approach and retraction, NORM, KONT, G450, G451).

8-290

12.98

Tool Offsets

8.9 Tool radius compensation, G40, G41, G42

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Changing the direction of compensation G41/G42, G42/G41 can be programmed without an intermediate G40. Changing the working plane It is not possible to change the working plane G17 to G19 when G41/G42 is active.

G41

G42

Changing the offset number D The offset number D can be changed in compensation mode. A modified tool radius is active with effect from the block in which the new D number is programmed.

The radius change or compensation movement is performed across the entire block and only reaches the new equidistance at the programmed end point.
With linear movements, the tool travels along an inclined path between the starting point and end point; with circular interpolation spiral movements are produced. Changing the tool radius This can be achieved, for example, using system variables. The execution is the same as for changes in the D number.

NC block with modified radius compensation

Traverse path
Programmed path

The modified values only take effect the next time T or D is programmed. The change only applies with effect from the next block.

8-291

Tool Offsets

12.98

8.9 Tool radius compensation, G40, G41, G42

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

During compensation mode Compensation mode may only be interrupted by a certain number of consecutive blocks or M commands which do not contain any travel commands or positional parameters in the compensation plane: Standard 3.

Machine manufacturer (MH 8.14)

The number of consecutive blocks or M commands can be set in machine data 20250 (see machine manufacturer).

A block with a path distance of zero also counts as an interruption!

Programming example
The "conventional" approach: Call tool, load tool, activate working plane and tool radius compensation.

Milling:

70 50
40 20

20 40 80

X 7

N10 G0 Z100 N20 G17 T1 M6 N30 G0 X0 Y0 Z1 M3 S300 D1 N40 Z-7 F500 N50 G41 X20 Y20 N60 Y40 N70 X40 Y70 N80 X80 Y50 N90 Y20 N100 X20 N110 G40 G0 Z100 M30

Retract to tool change point Tool change Call tool offset values, select length compensation Tool infeed Approach tool radius compensation, tool operates on left-hand side of contour Mill contour

Retract tool, end of program

8-292

12.98

Tool Offsets

8.9 Tool radius compensation, G40, G41, G42

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Turning:
45
X R8 R3 R3 R10 16 30 35 50 Z R3

4 12 15 18 20 40 57 60 62 70 80

%_N_1001_MPF N5 N10 N15 N20 N25 N30 N35 N40 N45 N50 N55 N60 N65 N70 G0 G53 X280 Z380 D0 TRANS X0 Z250 LIMS=4000 G96 S250 M3 G90 T1 D1 M8 G0 G42 X-1.5 Z1 G1 X0 Z0 F0.25 G3 X16 Z-4 I0 K-10 G1 Z-12 G2 X22 Z-15 CR=3 G1 X24 G3 X30 Z-18 I0 K-3 G1 Z-20 X35 Z-40

;Program name ;Start point ;Zero offset ;Speed limitation (G96) ;Select constant feed ;Select tool and offset ;Activate tool with tool radius compensation ;Rotate radius 10 ;Rotate radius 3 ;Rotate radius 3

8-293

Tool Offsets

12.98

8.9 Tool radius compensation, G40, G41, G42

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

N75 N80 N85 N90 N95 N100 N105 N110 N115 N120 N125 N130 N135

Z-57 G2 X41 Z-60 CR=3 G1 X46 X52 Z-63 G0 G40 G97 X100 Z50 M9 T2 D2 G96 S210 M3 G0 G42 X50 Z-60 M8 G1 Z-70 F0.12 G2 X50 Z-80 I6.245 K-5 G0 G40 X100 Z50 M9 G0 G53 X280 Z380 D0 M5 M30 ;Deselect tool radius compensation and approach tool change location ;Call up tool and select offset ;Select constant cutting speed ;Activate tool with tool radius compensation ;Rotate diameter 50 ;Rotate radius 8 ;Retract tool and deselect tool radius compensation ;Move to tool change location ;End of program ;Rotate radius 3

8-294

12.98

Tool Offsets

8.10 Approach and retract from contour, NORM, KONT, G450, G451

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

8.10

Approach and retract from contour, NORM, KONT, G450, G451 Programming
NORM KONTG450 KONT G451

Explanation of the parameters

NORM KONT

The tool travels directly in a straight line and is positioned perpendicular to the contour point The tool traverses the contour point according to the programmed corner behavior G450 or G451

Function
You can use these functions to adapt the approach and retraction paths, for example, according to the desired contour or shape of the blanks.

Sequence
Direct approach to perpendicular position, G41, G42, NORM The tool travels in a straight line directly to the contour and is positioned perpendicular to the path tangent at the starting point. Selection of the approach point When NORM is active, the tool travels directly to the compensated starting position irrespective of the approach angle programmed for the travel movement (see diagram).
G42

R s iu ad
Tangent Compensated tool path

Compensated tool path

Machine manufacturer (MH 8.15)

Initial status see machine manufacturer's specifications.

8-295

Tool Offsets

12.98

8.10 Approach and retract from contour, NORM, KONT, G450, G451

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Deactivate compensation mode, G40, NORM The tool is positioned perpendicular to the last compensated path end point and then travels directly in a straight line to the next uncompensated position, e.g. to the tool change location. Choosing the retraction point When NORM is active, the tool travels directly to the uncompensated position irrespective of the approach angle programmed for the travel movement (see diagram).
Tangent
G41

The following applies to approach and retraction movements: You should make allowance for the modified angle of travel when programming in order to avoid collisions.

Travel round contour at starting point, G41, G42, KONT Two cases are distinguished here: Starting point lies in front of the contour The approach strategy is the same as with NORM. The path tangent at the starting point serves as a dividing line between the front and rear of the contour.
Behind contour

Path tangent

In front of contour

Starting point

8-296

G 41

R s iu ad

12.98

Tool Offsets

8.10 Approach and retract from contour, NORM, KONT, G450, G451

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Starting point lies behind the contour The tool travels round the starting point either along a circular path or over the intersection of the equidistant paths depending on the programmed corner behavior G450/G451 The commands G450/G451 apply to the transition from the current block to the next block.

G450

G451

G450

G451

Generation of the approach path In both cases (G450/G451), the following approach path is generated: A straight line is drawn from the uncompensated approach point. This line is a tangent to a circle with circle radius = tool radius. The center point of the circle is on the starting point.

Approach point

Starting point

Approach path

Tool radius

Deactivate compensation mode, G40, KONT If the retraction point is located in front of the contour, the same retraction movement as for NORM applies. If the retraction point is located behind the contour, the retraction movement is the reverse of the approach movement.

8-297

Tool Offsets

12.98

8.11 Compensation at outside corners, G450, G451

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

8.11

Compensation at outside corners, G450, G451 Programming

G450 DISC= G451 Explanation of the parameters G450 DISC= G451 Transition circle: the tool travels around workpiece corners on a circular path with tool radius Flexible programming of the approach and retraction instruction. In steps of 1 from DISC=0 circle to DISC=100 intersection Intersection, the tool backs off from the workpiece corner

Function
G450/G451 defines the following: On the one hand, the approach path for active KONT and the approach point behind the contour (see previous page). On the other hand, the corrected tool path when traveling around outside corners. Corner behavior, Transition circle, G41, G42, G450 The tool center point travels around the workpiece corner across an arc with tool radius.
P*

G450

At intermediate point P*, the control executes instructions such as infeed movements or switching functions. These instructions are programmed in blocks inserted between the two blocks forming the corner. The transition circle belongs to the next travel command with respect to the data.

8-298

12.98

Tool Offsets

8.11 Compensation at outside corners, G450, G451

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Corner behavior, selectable transitions G41, G42, G450 DISC=

DISC 100

DISC distorts the transition circle, thus creating sharp contour corners. The values have the following meanings: DISC=0 transition circle DISC=100 intersection of the equidistant paths (theoretical value) DISC is programmed in steps of 1. When DISC values greater than 0 are specified, intermediate circles are shown with a magnified height the result is transition ellipses or parabolas or hyperbolas. An upper limit can be defined in machine data generally DISC=50. DISC= is active ony when G450 is called; but can be programmed in a previous block without G450. Both commands are modal. Path action, depending on DISC values and contour angle
S/R

DISC 0

Depending on the angle of the contour that is traversed, with acute contour angles and high DISC values the tool is lifted off the contour at the corners. With angles of 120 and more, the contour is traversed evenly (see adjacent table).

1,0 0,8 0,6 0,4 0,2 0 30 60 90 120 150 DISC=100 DISC= 50 40 30 20 10 180

Contour angle (degrees)

R - Tool radius S - Traversed overshoot S/R - Scaled overshoot (with reference to the tool radius)

8-299

Tool Offsets

12.98

8.11 Compensation at outside corners, G450, G451

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Corner behavior, intersection, G41, G42, G451 The tool approaches the intersection of the two equidistant which lie in the distance between the tool radius and the programmed contour. G451 applies only to circles and straight lines. At intermediate point P*, the control executes instructions such as infeed movements or switching functions. These instructions are programmed in blocks inserted between the two blocks forming the corner. Superfluous non-cutting tool paths can result from lift-off movements at acute contour angles. A parameter can be used in the machine data to define automatic switchover to transition circle in such cases.

G451

Programming example
In this example a transition radius is inserted for all outside corners (progr. in block N30). This avoids the necessity of stopping the tool on the change of direction and making no cut.
60
Y Y

30 10

X 50 5

N10 N20 N30 N40 N50 N60 N80 N90 N100

G17 T1 G0 X35 Y0 Z0 F500 G1 Z-5 G41 KONT G450 X10 Y10 Y60 X50 Y30 X10 Y10 G40 X-20 Y50 G0 Y100 X200 M30

Start conditions Tool infeed Activate compensation mode Cut contour

Deactivate compensation mode, retract on transition circle

8-300

12.98

Tool Offsets

8.12 Smooth approach and retraction

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

8.12

Smooth approach and retraction Programming

G140 to G143, G147, G148 G247, G248, G347, G348G340, G341 DISR=..., DISCL=...FAD=... Explanation of the parameters G140 G141 G142 G143 G147 G148 G247 G248 G347 G348 G340 G341 DISR Approach and retraction direction independent of the current compensation side (basic setting) Approach from the left or retraction to the left Approach from the right or retraction to the right Approach and retraction direction depends on the relative position of the start and end point with respect to the tangent direction Approach with a straight line Retraction with a straight line Approach with a quadrant Retraction with a quadrant Approach with a semi-circle Retraction with a semi-circle Approach and retraction in space (basic setting) Approach and retraction in the plane Approach and retraction with straight line (G147/G148) Distance from the mill edge to the start point of the contour Approach and retraction with circles (G247, G347/G248, G348) Radius of the tool center point path Caution: in the case of REPOS with a semi-circle, DISR is the diameter of the circle DISCL Distance from the end point of the fast infeed motion to the machining plane DISCL=AC(...) Specifies the absolute position of the end point of the fast infeed motion DISCL=... Speed of the slow infeed motion FAD=... The programmed value acts according to the G code of group 15 (feedrate; G93, G94, etc.) FAD=PM(...) The programmed value as a linear feedrate independently of the active G code of group 15 (as G94) FAD=PR(...) The programmed value is interpreted as revolutional feedrate independent of the active G code of group 15 (as G95)

FAD

8-301

Tool Offsets

12.98

8.12 Smooth approach and retraction

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Function
The smooth approach and retraction function is used to achieve a tangential approach to the start point of a contour, regardless of the position of the start point.
DISR

G1 G0 Programmed contour

The function is mainly used in conjunction with the tool radius offset, but is not mandatory.

G247

Sequence
The approach and retraction motion consists of a maximum of 4 sub-movements Start point of the motion P0 Intermediate points P1, P2 and P3 End point P4
DISR

P0 P 3 during approach and retraction with straight line (G147) Tool center point path P4

Tool

Contour

The points P0, P3 and P4 are always defined. The intermediate points P1 and P2 may be omitted as appropriate to the parameter settings and geometrical conditions. Selecting the approach and retraction contour Using the appropriate G command, approach/retraction is possible with a straight line (G147, G148), a quadrant (G247, G248) or a semicircle (G347, G348). Selecting the approach and retraction direction Use the tool radius compensation (G140, basic setting) to determine the approach and retraction direction. With positive tool radius: G41 active Approach from the left G42 active Approach from the right G141, G142 and G143 provide further approach options.

P0 P3 during approach and retraction with quadrant (G247) DISR Tool center point path Tool P4 Contour

P0 P3 during approach and retraction with semicircle (G347)

DISR Tool center point path Tool P4 Contour

Approach and retraction motions, represented with intermediate point P3 (tool radius compensation is simultaneously active)

8-302

12.98

Tool Offsets

8.12 Smooth approach and retraction

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

The G codes are only significant when the approach contour is a quadrant or a semi-circle. Motion steps between start point and end point (G340 and G341) The characteristic approach to P0 to P4 is shown in adjacent the figure.
P0 P1

Infeed motion P0 Straight line, circle or helix P1 Straight line or circle P4

In cases which include the position of the active plane G17 to G19 (circular plane, helical axis, infeed motion perpendicular to the active plane), any active rotating FRAME is taken into account.

P2, P3 DISCL P4

P2 DISCL P3

G340

Machining plane

G341

Approach motion depending on G340/G341

Length of the approach straight line or radius for approach circles (DISR) (see figure for sequence) Approach/retraction with straight line DISR indicates the distance between the mill edge and the start point of the contour, i.e. the length of the straight line is obtained from the sum of the tool radius and the programmed value of DISR when the TRC is active. The tool radius is only considered if it is positive. The resulting straight line length must be positive, i.e. negative values are permissible for DISR as long as the value of DISR is smaller than the tool radius. Approach/retraction with circles DISR indicates the radius of the tool center point path. If TRC is activated, a circle is produced with a radius that results in the tool center point path with the programmed radius. Distance between the point and the machining plane (DISCL) (see figure for sequence) If the position of the point P2 is to be specified as an absolute value on the axis perpendicular to the circular plane, the value must be programmed in the form DISCL=AC(...).

8-303

Tool Offsets

12.98

8.12 Smooth approach and retraction

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

The following applies for DISCL=0: With G340: the entire approach motion consists of only two blocks (P1, P2 and P3 are combined). The approach contour is obtained from P1 to P4. With G341: the entire approach motion consists of three blocks (P2 and P3 are combined). If P0 and P4 lie in the same plane, only two blocks are produced (infeed motion of P1 to P3 is omitted). The system monitors that the point defined by DISCL lies between P1 and P3 , i.e. in all movements which have a component perpendicular to the machining plane, this component must have the same leading sign. On detection of a direction reversal, a tolerance defined by the machine data WAB_CLEARANCE_TOLERANCE is permitted. Programming the end point P4 for approach or P0 for retraction The end point is generally programmed with X... Y... Z.... Programming during approach - P4 in the WAB block - P4 is defined by the end point of the next traversing block Further blocks can be inserted between the WAB block and the next traversing block without moving the geometry axes.

8-304

12.98

Tool Offsets

8.12 Smooth approach and retraction

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Example: $TC_DP1[1,1]=120 ;Milling tool T1/D1 $TC_DP6[1,1]=7 ;Tool with 7mm radius N10 G90 G0 X0 Y0 Z30 D1 T1 N20 X10 N30 G41 G147 DISCL=3 DISR=13 Z=0 F1000 N40 G1 X40 Y-10 N50 G1 X50 ... ... N30/N40 can be replaced by: 1. N30 G41 G147 DISCL=3 DISR=13 X40 Y-10 Z0 F1000 or 2. N30 G41 G147 DISCL=3 DISR=13 F1000 N40 G1 X40 Y-10 Z0 Programming during retraction - For a WAB block without programmed geometry axis, the contour ends in P2. The position in the axes that form the machining plane are obtained from the retraction contour. The axes components perpendicular to this are defined by DISCL. If DISCL=0, the entire motion is in the plane. - If only the axis perpendicular to the machining plane is programmed, the contour ends in P1. The position of the other axes is obtained as described previously. If the WAB block is also the deactivation block of the TRC, an aditional path from P1 to P0 is added so that there is no motion at the end of the contour on deactivation of the TRC. - If there is only one machining plane programmed, the missing 2nd axis is added modally taken from its last position in the previous block.

Machining up to this point with GO, after that G1 F1000

Z=3 Z=30
0 10 20 30 40

Z=0

X P4 Contour

-10

DISR=13

Following block (without offset) P0 Tool center point path Tool P1

P4 WAB block (G248 G40 ...) Contour (previous block) Retraction with WAB with TRC simultaneously deactivated

8-305

Tool Offsets

12.98

8.12 Smooth approach and retraction

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Approach and retraction velocities Speed of the previous block (G0): This speed is used to execute all motions P0 up to P2, i.e. the motion parallel to the machining plane and the part of the infeed motion up to the safety clearance. Programming with FAD: Specify the feedrate for - G341: infeed motion perpendicular to the machining plane from P2 to P3 - G340: from point P2 or P3 to P4 If FAD is not programmed, this part of the contour is also traversed at the modally active speed of the previous block, if no F word is programmed in the WAB block. Example: $TC_DP1[1,1]=120 $TC_DP6[1,1]=7

;Milling tool T1/D1 ;Tool with 7mm radius

N10 G90 G0 X0 Y0 Z20 D1 T1 N20 G41 G341 G247 DISCL=AC(5) DISR=13 FAD 500 X40 Y-10 Z=0 F200 N30 X50 N40 X60 ...

0 -10 Z 20

G0 P0 P1 G0 P2 P3 F500 P4 F2000 F2000 X

10 5 0

8-306

12.98

Tool Offsets

8.12 Smooth approach and retraction

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Programmed feedrate F: This feedrate is active from P3 or P2, if FAD is not programmed. If no F word is programmed in the WAB block, the speed of the previous block is active. During retraction, the rolls of the modally active feedrate from the previous block and the programmed feedrate value in the WAB block are changed round, i.e. the actual retraction contour is traversed with the old feedrate value and a new speed programmed with the F word applies from P2 up to P0. Reading positions The points P3 and P4 can be read as system variables in the WCS during approach. $P_APR: $P_AEP: read P3 (start point) read P4 (contour start point)

P2 /P3

No speed programmed Only F programmed Only FAD programmed F and FAD programmed Rapid traverse if GO is active otherwise with the old or new F word Speed of the previous block (old F word) Infeed speed programmed with FAD New modal speed programmed with F Speeds in the WAB sub-blocks during approach with G340

$P_APDV: read whether $P_APR and $P_AEP contain valid data

Speeds in the WAB sub-blocks during approach with G341

No speed programmed Only F programmed Only FAD programmed F and FAD programmed

Rapid traverse if GO is active, otherwise with the old or new F word Speed of the previous block (old F word) Retraction speed programmed with FAD New modal speed programmed with F Speeds in the WAB sub-blocks during retraction

8-307

Tool Offsets

12.98

8.12 Smooth approach and retraction

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Programming example
Smooth approach (block N20 activated) Approach motion with quadrant (G247) Approach direction not programmed, G140, i.e. TRC is active (G41) Contour offset OFFN=5 (N10) Current tool radius=10; thus the effective offset radius for TRC=15, the radius of the WAB contour=25, so that the radius of the tool center point path is then DISR=10 The end point of the circle is obtained from N30, since only the Z position is programmed in N20 Infeed motion - from Z20 to Z7 (DISCL=AC(7)) in rapid traverse - then to Z0 with FAD=200 - approach circle in X-Y plane and following blocks with F1500 (for this speed to be active in the following blocks, the active G0 in N30 must be overwritten with G1; otherwise, the contour would be machined further with G0.) Smooth retraction (block N60 actived) Retraction motion with quadrant (G248) and helix (G340) FAD not programmed, since irrelevant for G340 Z=2 in the start point; Z=8 in the end point, since DISCL=6 When DISR=5, the radius of WAB contour=20; that of the tool center point path=5 Retraction motions from Z8 to Z20 and the motion parallell to X-Y plane to X70 Y0. $TC_DP1[1,1]=120 $TC_DP6[1,1]=10 N10 N20 N30 N40 N50 N60 N70 N80 G0 X0 Y0 Z20 G64 D1 T1 OFFN = 5 G41 G247 G341 Z0 DISCL = AC(7) DISR = 10 F1500 FAD=200 G1 X30 Y-10 X40 Z2 X50 G248 G340 X70 Y0 Z20 DISCL = 6 DISR = 5 G40 F10000 X80 Y0 M 30

Tool center point path Tool P3app Semicircle Helix P3retr

P0app

80 P0retr

P4app

P4retr Contour

Tool definition T1/D1 Radius (P0app) Approach (P3app) (P4app) (P4retr) Retraction (P3retr) (P0retr)

8-308

12.98

Tool Offsets

8.13 Collision monitoring, CDON, CDOF

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

8.13

Collision monitoring, CDON, CDOF Programming

CDON CDOF

Explanation of the commands

CDON CDOF

Activate bottleneck detection Deactivate bottleneck detection

Function
When CDON (Collision Detection ON) and tool radius compensation are active, the control monitors the tool paths with Look Ahead contour calculation. This Look Ahead function allows possible collisions to be detected in advance and permits the control to actively avoid them. When collision detection is off (CDOF), a search is made at inside corners in the previous traversing block (and if necessary in blocks further back) for a common intersection point for the current block. If no intersection is found with this method, an error is generated.

CDOF helps prevent the incorrect detection of bottlenecks, e.g. due to missing information which is not available in the NC program.

Machine manufacturer (MH 8.16)

The number of NC blocks monitored can be defined in the machine data (see machine manufacturer).

Sequence
The following are some examples of critical machining situations which can be detected by the control and compensated for by modifying the tool paths. In order to prevent program stops, you should always select the tool with the widest radius from all of the tools used when testing the program.

8-309

Tool Offsets

12.98

8.13 Collision monitoring, CDON, CDOF

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

In each of the following examples a tool with too wide a radius was selected for machining the contour. Bottleneck detection Since the tool radius selected is too wide to machine this inside contour, the "bottleneck" is bypassed. An alarm is output.
Programmed contour

Tool path

Contour path shorter than tool radius The tool travels round the workpiece corner on a transition circle and then continues to follow the programmed contour exactly.
Tool path

Programmed contour

Tool radius too wide for inside machining

Tool path

In such cases, machining of the contours is performed only as far as is possible without causing damage to the contour.

Programmed contour

8-310

12.98

Tool Offsets

8.14 2 1/2 D tool offset, CUT2D, CUT2DF

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

8.14

2 1/2 D tool offset, CUT2D, CUT2DF Programming

CUT2D CUT2DF

Explanation
CUT2D CUT2DF Activate 2 1/2 D radius compensation (default) Activate 2 1/2 D radius compensation, tool radius compensation relative to the current frame or to inclined planes

Function
With CUT2D or CUT2DF you define how the tool radius compensation is to act or to be interpreted when machining in inclined planes.

Sequence
Tool length compensation Tool length compensation is generally calculated according to the non-rotated working plane fixed in space. Tool radius compensation, CUT2D As for many applications, tool length compensation and tool radius compensation are calculated in the fixed working plane specified with G17 to G19. Example for G17 (X/Y plane): Tool radius compensation is active in the non-rotated X/Y plane, tool length compensation in the Z direction.
X

8-311

Tool Offsets

12.98

8.14 2 1/2 D tool offset, CUT2D, CUT2DF

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

For machining on inclined surfaces, the tool compensation values have to be defined accordingly, or be calculated using the functions for "Tool length compensation for orientable tools". For a more detailed description of this calculation method, please refer to the section on "Tool orientation and tool length compensation". CUT2D is used when the orientation of the tool cannot be changed and the workpiece is rotated for machining on inclined surfaces. CUT2D is generally the standard setting and does not therefore have to be specified explicitly. Tool radius compensation, CUT2DF In this case, it is possible to arrange the tool orientation perpendicular to the inclined working plane on the machine. If a frame containing a rotation is programmed, the compensation plane is also rotated with CUT2DF. The tool radius compensation is calculated in the rotated machining plane.
X

The tool length compensation continues to be active relative to the non-rotated working plane.

8-312

12.98

Tool Offsets

8.15 Extension of approach/retraction strategy, G461/G462

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

8.15

Extension of approach/retraction strategy, G461/G462 (SW 5 and later) Programming

G460 G461 G462

Explanation
G460 G461 As before (activation of collision monitoring for approach and retraction block) Insertion of a circle in the TRC block, if no intersection point is possible, whose center point is at the end point of the uncorrected block and whose radius is equal to the tool radius. Insertion of a straight line in the TRC block if no intersection point is possible; the block is extended by its end tangent (default setting)

G462

Function
In certain special geometrical situations, extended approach and retraction strategies, compared with the previous implementation, are required in order to activate or deactivate tool radius compensation (see figure below). The following example describes only the situation for deactivation of tool radius compensation. The behavior for approach is the same. Example: G42 D1 T1 ; Tool radius 20mm ... G1 X110 Y0 N10 X0 N20 Y10 N30 G40 X50 Y50

N30 Tool radius

Y X Center point path with tool radius compensation

10 N20 10 20 50 N10

Programmed contour 100

Retraction behaviour up to SW 4.x

The last block with active tool radius compensation (N20) is so short that an intersection no longer exists between the offset curve and the preceding block (or

8-313

Tool Offsets

12.98

8.15 Extension of approach/retraction strategy, G461/G462

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

a previous block) for the current tool radius. An attempt is therefore made to find an intersection between the offset curves of the following block and the preceding block, i.e. in the example between N10 and N30. The curve used for the retraction block is not a real offset curve, but is a straight line from the offset point at the end point of block N20 to the programmed end point of N30. If an intersection is found, it is approached. In this case, the shaded area in the figure is not machined, although this would be possible with the tool used. G461 If no intersection is possible between the last TRC block and a preceding block, the offset curve of this block is extended with a circle whose center point lies at the end point of the uncorrected block and whose radius is equal to the tool radius. The control attempts to cut this circle with one of the preceding blocks.

Auxiliary curve

N30

Y XX Center point path with tool radius compensation

10 N20 0 10 20 50

N10

Programmed contour 100

Retraction behaviour for G461 (see example on page 313)

If CDOF is active (see Section 8.13), the search is aborted when an intersection is found, i.e. the system does not check whether further intersections with previous blocks exist. If CDON is active, the search continues for further intersections after the first intersection is found. An intersection point which is found in this way is the new end point of a preceding block and the start point of the deactivation block. The inserted circle is used exclusively to calculate the intersection and does not produce a traversing movement. If no intersection is found, alarm 10751 (collision danger) is output.

8-314

12.98

Tool Offsets

8.15 Extension of approach/retraction strategy, G461/G462

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

G462 If no intersection is possible between the last TRC block and a preceding block, a straight line is inserted, on retraction with G462 (initial setting), at the end point of the last block with tool radius compensation (the block is extended by its end tangent). The search for the intersection is then identical to the procedure for G461.

Auxiliary curve N30 Y X Center point path (compensated path)

10 N20 0 10 20 50 N10

Programmed contour 100

Retraction behaviour for G462 (see example on page 313)

With G462, the corner generated by N10 and N20 in the example program is not machined to the full extent actually possible with the tool used. However, this behavior may be necessary if the part contour (as distinct from the programmed contour), to the left of N20 in the example, is not permitted to be violated even with y values greater than 10 mm. If KONT is active (travel round contour at start or end point), the behavior differs according to whether the end point is in front of or behind the contour. End point in front of contour If the end point is in front of the contour, the retraction behavior is the same as with NORM. This property does not change even if the last contour block for G451 is extended with a straight line or a circle. Additional circumnavigation strategies to avoid a contour violation in the vicinity of the contour end point are therefore not required. End point behind contour If the end point is behind the contour, a circle or straight line is always inserted depending on G450 / G451. In this case, G460 - G462 has no effect. If, in this situation, the last traversing block has no intersection with a preceding block, an intersection with the inserted contour element or with the linear section from the end point of the circumnavigation circle to the programmed end point can result.

8-315

Tool Offsets

12.98

8.15 Extension of approach/retraction strategy, G461/G462

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

If the inserted contour element is a circle (G450), and it intersects with the preceding block, this is the same as the intersection which would be produced with NORM and G461. In general, however, a remaining section of the circle still has to be traversed. An intersection calculation is no longer required for the linear section of the retraction block. In the second case (if no intersection is found between the inserted contour element and the preceding blocks), the intersection between the retraction straight line and a preceding block is approached. Therefore, when G461 or G462 is active, a behavior different to G460 can only arise if NORM is active or if the behavior with KONT is identical to NORM due to the geometrical conditions.

Additional notes
The approach behavior is symmetrical to the retraction behavior. The approach/retraction behavior is determined by the state of the G command in the approach/retraction block. The approach behavior can therefore be set independently of the retraction behavior.

Programming example
G461 for approach N10 $TC_DP1[1,1]=120 N20 $TC_DP6[1,1]=10 N30 X0 Y0 F10000 T1 D1 N40 Y20 N50 G42 X50 Y5 G461 N60 Y0 F600 N70 X30 N80 X20 Y-5 N90 X0 Y0 G40 N100 M30 ; Tool type mill ; Radius

8-316

12.98

Tool Offsets

8.16 Tool length compensation for orientable tools, TCARR, TCOABS,

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

8.16

Tool length compensation for orientable tools, TCARR, TCOABS, TCOFR Programming TCARR=[m] TCOABS TCOFR Explanation
TCARR=[m] TCOABS TCOFR Request toolholder with the number "m" Determine tool length components from the orientation of the current toolholder. Determine tool length components from the orientation of the active frame.
Z

Function
When the spatial orientation of the tool changes, its tool length components also change. After a reset, e.g. through manual setting or change of the toolholder with a fixed spatial orientation, the tool length components also have to be determined again. This is performed using the TCOABS and TCOFR path commands.

a b
l

U Y
X X

Sequence
Request toolholder TCARR With TCARR the toolholder number m is requested with its geometry data (offset memory). With m=0, the active toolholder is deselected.

8-317

Tool Offsets

12.98

8.16 Tool length compensation for orientable tools, TCARR, TCOABS,

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Additional notes
The geometry data of the toolholder only become active after a tool is called. The selected tool remains active after a toolholder change has taken place. The current geometry data for the toolholder can also be defined in the part program via the corresponding system variables. For a definition of toolholder kinematics with system variables, see References: /PGA/, "Programming Guide Advanced", Section "Toolholder Kinematics

Determine tool length compensation from the orientation of the toolholder, TCOABS
TCOABS calculates the tool length compensation from the current orientation angles of the toolholder; stored in system variables $TC_CARR13 and $TC_CARR14. In order to make a new calculation of the tool length compensation when frames are changed, the tool has to be selected again.

Additional notes
The tool orientation must be manually adapted to the active frame. When the tool length compensation is calculated, the angle of rotation of the toolholder is calculated in an intermediate step. With toolholders with two rotary axes, there are generally two sets of rotation angles which can be used to adapt the tool orientation to the active frame; therefore, the rotation angle values stored in the system variables must at least correspond approximately to the mechanically set rotation angles.

8-318

12.98

Tool Offsets

8.16 Tool length compensation for orientable tools, TCARR, TCOABS,

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Additional notes
It is not possible for the control to check whether the rotation angles calculated by means of the frame orientation are settable on the machine. If the rotary axes of the toolholder are arranged such that the tool orientation calculated by means of the frame orientation cannot be reached, then an alarm is output. If there is a switchover between TCOFR and TCABS, the tool length compensation is calculated again. The combination of tool precision compensation and the functions for tool length compensation on movable toolholders is not permissible. If both functions are called simultaneously, an error message is issued.

The TOFRAME function allows a frame to be defined on the basis of the direction of orientation of the selected toolholder. For more detailed information please refer to the Programming Guide Fundamentals section "Frames" . When orientation transformation is active (3, 4 or 5-axis transformation), it is possible to select a toolholder with an orientation deviating from the zero position without causing output of an alarm.

8-319

Tool Offsets

12.98

8.17 Grinding-specific tool monitoring in part program TMON, TMOF

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

8.17

Grinding-specific tool monitoring in part program TMON, TMOF

Assignment of tool-specific parameters Further tool-specific parameters can be set up in the machine data and assigned by the user.
Parameter Meaning Data type

Tool-specific parameters $TC_TPG1 $TC_TPG2 Spindle number Integer

Integer Chaining rule The parameters are automatically kept identical for the left and right side of the wheel. Minimum wheel radius Minimum wheel width Current wheel width Maximum speed Maximum peripheral speed Angle of inclined wheel Parameter number for radius calculation Real Real Real Real Real Real Integer

$TC_TPG3 $TC_TPG4 $TC_TPG5 $TC_TPG6 $TC_TPG7 $TC_TPG8 $TC_TPG9

Programming
TMON (T No.) TMOF (T No.)

Explanation of the commands

TMON (T No.) TMOF (T No.) Activate tool monitoring Deselect tool monitoring T No. = 0: Deactivate monitoring for all tools It is only necessary to specify the T number if the tool with this number is not active.

8-320

12.98

Tool Offsets

8.17 Grinding-specific tool monitoring in part program TMON, TMOF

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

Function
The command TMON is used to activate geometry and speed monitoring for grinding tools (types 400 - 499) in the NC part program. Monitoring remains active until it is deactivated in the part program with TMOF.

Additional notes
You can only activate tool monitoring if the toolspecific grinding data $TC_TPG1 to $TC_TPG9 (see Programming Guide Advanced) are set. According to the machine data settings, tool monitoring for the grinding tools (types 400 - 499) can be automatically activated when the tool selection is activated. Only one monitoring routine can be active at any one time for each spindle. Geometry monitoring The current wheel radius and the current width are monitored. The set speed is monitored against the speed limitation cyclically with allowance for the spindle override. The speed limit is the smaller value resulting from a comparison of the maximum speed with the speed calculated from the maximum wheel peripheral speed and the current wheel radius.

8-321

Tool Offsets

12.98

8.18 Make active tool offset operative immediately

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

8.18

Make active tool offset operative immediately Function

MD $MM_ACTIVATE_SEL_USER_DATA can be used to define that the active tool offset can be activated immediately if the part program is in "stop" mode. /FB/, Description of Functions, Fundamentals, K2 Axes, Coordinate Systems...

Danger
The offset is backed out the next time the part program is started.

8-322

12.98

Special Functions

9-323

Special Functions

12.98

9.1 Auxiliary function outputs

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

9.1

Auxiliary function outputs Function

The auxiliary function output sends information to the PLC indicating when the NC program needs the PLC to perform specific switching operations on the machine tool. The auxiliary functions are output, together with their parameters, to the PLC interface. The values and signals must be processed by the PLC user program. Function outputs The following functions can be downloaded to the programmable controller: Select tool T Tool offset D, DL (SW 5.2 and higher) Feed F / FA Spindle speed S H functions M functions For the above-mentioned functions it is possible to define whether they are to be transferred during the machining sequence, and which reactions are to be activated. For each function group or individual function, machine data define whether the output is initiated before the traversing movement, with the traversing movement or after the traversing movement

The PLC can be programmed to acknowledge auxiliary function outputs in various ways.

9-324

12.98

Special Functions

Programming
Letter[address extension]=Value

Explanation
The letters which can be used for auxiliary functions are: M, S, H, T, D, DL, F. In the following table you will find information about the meaning and value ranges for the address extension and the value in auxiliary function outputs. The maximum number of auxiliary functions of the same type per block is also specified. DL in SW 5.2 and higher

9-325

Special Functions

12.98

9.1 Auxiliary function outputs

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Overview of auxiliary functions, programming Func -tion Address extension (integer) Meaning M Range implicit 0 Range 0-99 Value Explanation Number per block 5

Type INT

Meaning Function The address extension is 0 for the value range between 00 and 99. M0, M1, M2, M17, M30 must be used without an address extension. M3, M4, M5, M70 with address extension for spindle number, e.g. M5 for spindle 2: M2=5. The master spindle is used if no spindle is specified. User M function Without spindle no. for master spindle Functions have no effect in the NCK; only to be implemented on the PLC 3 3

Spindle no.

1-12

1-99

Function

Any S H Spindle no. Any

0-99 1- 12 0-99

100- (max. INT value) 0-3.4028 ex 38 (max. INT value) 3.4028 ex 38 REAL INT (SW 5) REAL

Function Spindle speed Any

Spindle no. (with active tool management)

1-12

0-32000 (or tool names with active tool management) 0-9

INT

Tool selection

Tool names are not passed to the PLC interface.

D DL Locationdependent offset 1-6

INT

Tool offset selection See tool fine offset selection /FBW/ Path... Axis...

D0 deselection, D1 default Refers to previously selected D number

1 1

3.4028 ex 38 REAL

F (FA)

0: path feed, 1-31: axis no.

0.001999 999.999

REAL

feeds

Number of functions output per NC block Up to 10 function outputs can be programmed in one NC block. Auxiliary functions can be output from the action component of synchronized actions. S. /FBSY/

The highest number for a type specified in the table must not be exceeded.

9-326

12.98

Special Functions

Grouping The above-mentioned functions can be grouped together. Group assignment is predefined for some M commands. The Acknowledgment behavior can be defined by the grouping. Acknowledgments High-speed function outputs, QU Functions which have not been programmed as high-speed outputs can be defined as high-speed outputs for individual outputs with the keyword QU. Program execution continues without waiting for the Acknowledgment of the miscellaneous function (the program waits for the transport Acknowledgment). This helps avoid unnecessary stoppages and interruptions to traversing movements.

Machine manufacturer (MH9.1)

The appropriate MD must be set for "high-speed function outputs". (see /FB/, H2, FB Auxiliary Function Output).

Programming
M=QU() H=QU() Examples: N10 H=QU(735) N10 G1 F300 X10 Y20 G64 N20 X8 Y90 M=QU(7) M7 was programmed as a high-speed output, so continuous-path mode (G64) is not interrupted.

;High-speed output for H735

You should only use this function in individual cases, because it can affect the time synchronization as a result of interaction with other function outputs.

9-327

Special Functions

12.98

9.1 Auxiliary function outputs

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Function outputs for travel commands Time is needed to transfer information and wait for a corresponding response, and this has an impact on the travel movements. High-speed Acknowledgment without block change delay In SW 5 and higher, the block change behavior can be controlled by machine data. When the "without block change delay" setting is selected, the system response with respect to high-speed auxiliary functions is as follows: Auxiliary function output Before the movement Behavior The block transition between blocks with high-speed auxiliary functions takes place with no interruption and with no reduction in speed. The auxiliary function output takes place in the first interpolation cycle of the block. The following block is executed with no Acknowledgment delay. The block transition between blocks with high-speed auxiliary functions takes place with no interruption and with no reduction in speed. The auxiliary function output takes place during the block. The following block is executed with no Acknowledgment delay. The movement stops at the end of the block. The auxiliary function output takes place at the end of the block. The following block is executed with no Acknowledgment delay.

During the movement

After the movement

Function outputs in continuous-path mode Function outputs before the traversing movements interrupt continuous-path mode (G64/G641) and generate an exact stop for the previous block.

Function outputs after the traversing movements interrupt continuous-path mode (G64/G641) and generate an exact stop for the current block. A wait for an outstanding Acknowledgment signal from the PLC can also cause an interruption to continuous-path mode, e.g. M command sequences in blocks with extremely short path lengths.

9-328

12.98

Special Functions

9.1.1 M functions Programming

M... Possible values. 0 to 9999 9999, integers (Max. INT value in SW 5 and higher)

Function
M functions initiate, for example, switching operations such as "Coolant ON/OFF" and other operations on the machine. Permanent functions have already been assigned to some of the M functions by the control manufacturer (see following list). List of predefined M functions M0* M1* M2* M30* M17* M3 M4 M5 M6 M70 M40 M41 M42 M43 M44 M45 Programmed stop Optional stop End of main program with return to beginning of program End of program, same effect as M2 End of subprogram Spindle clockwise Spindle counterclockwise Spindle stop Tool change (default setting) Spindle is switched to axis mode Automatic gear change Gear step 1 Gear step 2 Gear step 3 Gear step 4 Gear step 5

Extended address notation cannot be used for the functions marked with *.

9-329

Special Functions

12.98

9.1 Auxiliary function outputs

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Machine manufacturer (MH9.2)

All free M function numbers can be assigned by the machine manufacturer, e.g. with switching functions for controlling clamping fixtures or for activating/deactivating other machine functions, etc.

Machine manufacturer (MH9.3)

See machine manufacturer's specifications

The commands M0, M1, M2, M17 and M30 are always initiated after the traversing movement.

Predefined M commands Certain important M functions for program execution are supplied as standard with the control: Programmed stop, M0 Machining stops in the NC block with M0. Allowing you, for example, to remove chips, check measurements, etc.

9-330

12.98

Special Functions

Optional stop, M1 M1 can be set with MMC/dialog "Program Control" or the VDI interface. End of program, M2, M17, M30 A program is terminated with M2, M17 or M30 and reset to the beginning of the program. f the main program is called from another program (as a subprogram), M2/M30 has the same effect as M17 and vice-versa, i.e. M17 has the same effect in the main program as M2/M30. Spindle functions, M3, M4, M5, M70 The extended address notation with spindle number is used for all spindle functions. Example: M2=3 means CW spindle rotation for the second spindle. If no address extension is programmed, the function applies to the master spindle. Programming example N10 S... N20 X... M3 M function in the block with axis movement, spindle accelerates before the X axis movement Max. 5 M functions in the block

N180 M789 M1767 M100 M102 M376

9-331

Special Functions

12.98

9.1 Auxiliary function outputs

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

9.1.2 H functions Programming

N10 G0 X20 Y50 H3=11.3

Function
H functions are used to transfer information to the PLC (programmable logic controller), in order to activate specific switching operations. H functions are REAL values.

Machine manufacturer (MH9.4)

The meaning of the functions is determined by the manufacturer.

Sequence
Number of functions per NC block Up to 3 H functions can be programmed in one NC block.

9-332

12.98

Arithmetic Parameters and Program Jumps

10-333

Arithmetic Parameters and Program Jumps

12.98

10.1 Arithmetic parameters R

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

10.1

Arithmetic parameters R Programming

Rn=...

Explanation
R n Arithmetic parameter Number of the arithmetic parameter, n= 0 to max. See machine data or machine manufacturer for max.; default setting: max = 0-99

Machine manufacturer (MH10.1)

The number of R parameters is set in the machine data, or see specifications of machine manufacturer.

Function
The arithmetic parameters are used, for example, if an NC program is not only to be valid for values assigned once, or if you need to calculate values. The required values can be set or calculated by the control during program execution. Another possibility consists of setting the arithmetic parameter values through operation. If values have been assigned to the arithmetic parameters, they can be assigned to other NC addresses in the program. The value of these addresses should be flexible. Value assignments You can assign values in the following range to the arithmetic parameters: (0.000 0001 ... 9999 9999) (8 decimal places and sign and decimal point). The decimal point can be omitted for integer values. A positive leading sign can always be omitted.

10-334

12.98

Arithmetic Parameters and Program Jumps

10.1 Arithmetic parameters R

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Example: R0=3.5678 R1=-37.3 R2=2 R3=-7 R4=-45678.1234 It is possible to assign an extended numerical range by using exponential notation: Example: (10 ... 10 ) The value of the exponent is written after the EX characters; maximum total number of characters: 10 (including leading signs and decimal point) Value range of EX: -300 to +300
-300 +300

Example: R0=-0.1EX-5 R1=1.874EX8 Note:

;Meaning: R0 = -0,000 001 ;Meaning: R1 = 187 400 000

There can be several assignments in one block; or assignments of expressions. Value assignment must be in a separate block. Assignments to other addresses The flexibility of an NC program lies in assigning these arithmetic parameters or expressions with arithmetic parameters to other NC addresses. Values, expressions and arithmetic parameters can be assigned to all addresses; Exception: address N, G and L.

10-335

Arithmetic Parameters and Program Jumps

12.98

10.1 Arithmetic parameters R

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

When assigning, write the character " = " after the address character. It is also possible to have an assignment with a negative leading sign. A separate block is required for assignments to axis addresses (traversing instructions). Example: N10 G0 X=R2 ;Assignment to X axis Arithmetic operations and functions When operators/arithmetic functions are used, it is necessary to use the conventional mathematical notation. Machining priorities are set by parentheses. Otherwise, multiplication and division take precedence over addition and subtraction. Degrees are used for the trigonometrical functions.

Programming example: R parameter

N10 R1= R1+1 N20 R1=R2+R3 R4=R5-R6 R10=R11/R12 N30 R13=SIN(25.3) N40 R14=R1*R2+R3 R7=R8* R9 R13 equals sine of 25.3 degrees Multiplication or division takes precedence over addition or subtraction R14=(R1*R2)+R3 Result, the same as block N40 Meaning: R15=square root of R1 +R2
2 2

The new R1 is calculated from the old R1 plus 1

N50 R14=R3+R2R1 N60 R15=SQRT(R1R1+R2*R2)

Programming example: Assignment of axis values

N10 G1 G91 X=R1 Z=R2 F300 N20 Z=R3 N30 X=-R4 N40 Z=-R5 ...

10-336

12.98

Arithmetic Parameters and Program Jumps

10.2 Unconditional program jumps

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

10.2

Unconditional program jumps Programming

Label: GOTOB LABEL or GOTOF LABEL Label:

Explanation
GOTOB GOTOF LABEL LABEL: "Jump instruction" with backward jump destination (towards the start of the program) Jump instruction with forward jump destination (towards the end of the program) Destination (label within the program) Jump destination; the name of the jump destination is followed by a colon

Function
By default, main programs, subprograms, cycles and interrupt routines execute the blocks in the sequence in which they were programmed. Program jumps can be used to modify this sequence.

Sequence
Jump destinations with user-defined names can be programmed in a routine. The command GOTOF or GOTOB can be used to branch to a jump destination from any other point within the same program. The program then resumes execution at the instruction immediately following the jump destination.

10-337

Arithmetic Parameters and Program Jumps

12.98

10.2 Unconditional program jumps

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Programming example:
N10 N20 GOTOF MARKE_0 N30 N40 N50 MARKE_1: R1=R2+R3 N60 N65 GOTOF MARKE_2 N70 N80 N90 MARKE_0: N100 N110 GOTOB MARKE_1 N115 N120 MARKE_2: N130 Backward jump to MARKE_1 Forward jump to MARKE_2 Forward jump to MARKE_0

Additional notes
The unconditional jump must be programmed in a separate block. In programs with unconditional jumps, the end of program M2/M30 does not have to appear at the end of the program.

10-338

12.98

Arithmetic Parameters and Program Jumps

10.3 Conditional program jumps

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

10.3

Conditional program jumps Programming

LABEL: IF expression GOTOB LABEL or IF expression GOTOF LABEL LABEL:

Explanation of the commands

IF GOTOB GOTOF LABEL LABEL: == <> > < >= <= << Keyword for condition Jump instruction with backward jump destination (towards the start of the program) Jump instruction with forward jump destination (towards the end of the program) Destination (label within the program); Jump destination; the name of the jump destination is followed by a colon Equal to Not equal to Greater than Less than Greater than or equal to Less than or equal to Concatenation of strings (not for 810D)

Function
Jump conditions can be formulated using IF instructions. The jump to the programmed jump destination is only performed if the jump condition is fulfilled.

Sequence
The jump condition can be programmed with any comparison or logic operation (result: TRUE or FALSE). The program jump is executed if the result of the operation is TRUE. The jump destination can only be a block with a label which appears within the program. Several conditional jumps can be formulated in the same block.

10-339

Arithmetic Parameters and Program Jumps

12.98

10.3 Conditional program jumps

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Examples of jump conditions IF R1>R2 GOTOF MARKE1 IF R7<=(R8+R9)*743 GOTOB MARKE1 IF R10 GOTOF MARKE1 If R1 is greater than R2, then jump to MARKE1 Complex expression as condition It is also possible to specify a variable (INT, REAL, BOOL or CHAR). If the value of the variable is zero (=FALSE), the condition is not fulfilled; the condition is TRUE for all other values. Several conditions in the same block

IF R1==0 GOTOF MARKE1 IF R1==1 GOTOF MARKE2

Programming example:
N40 R1=30 R2=60 R3=10 R4=11 R5=50 R6=20 N41 MA1: G0 X=R2*COS(R1)+R5 -> -> Y=R2*SIN(R1)+R6 N42 R1=R1+R3 R4=R4-1 N43 IF R4>0 GOTOB MA1 N44 M30 Assignment of initial values Calculation and assignment to axis address Specification of variable Jump statement End of program

10-340

12.98

Subprograms and Repetition of Program Sections

11-341

Subprograms and Repetition of Program Sections

12.98

11.1 Use of subprograms

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

11.1

Use of subprograms
What is a subprogram? In principle, a subprogram has the same structure as a part program. It consists of NC blocks with traversing and switching commands. Basically, there is no difference between a main program and a subprogram. The subprogram contains either machining operations or sequences of operations that are to be performed several times.
p ub ro gr am

M a in p r o g r a m

Use of subprograms Recurring machining sequences are programmed once in a subprogram. Examples include certain contour shapes, which occur repeatedly, and machining cycles. The subprogram can be called and executed in any main program.
Subprogram

Structure of a subprogram The structure of the subprogram is identical to that of the main program (see section on structure and content of an NC program). Subprograms are M17end of program provided. This means a return to the program level where the subprogram was called from.

11-342

12.98

Subprograms and Repetition of Program Sections

11.1 Use of subprograms

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Explanation It is possible to suppress this end of program M17 in the machine data (e.g.: to achieve a better running time). Additional notes A program header with parameter definitions can also be programmed in the subprogram. You will find a more detailed description in the Programming Guide Advanced. End of program with RET The end instruction RET can also be used in subprograms as a substitute for the M17 end of program command. RET must be programmed in a separate block. The RET statement is used when G64 continuouspath mode is not to be interrupted by a return. M17 interrupts G64 and produces an exact stop. Remedy: Do not write M17 in a subprogram block on its own, instead use it with, for example, a traverse path: G1 X=YY M17 must be set in the machine data: "No M17 from PLC". Subprogram name The subprogram is given a name allowing it to be selected from among the others. The name can be freely chosen during program creation, taking the following conventions into account: The first two characters must be letters. The others can be letters, numerals or underscore characters A maximum of 31 characters can be used No separators are to be used (see the section on "Language elements of the programming language") The same rules apply as to the names of main programs.

11-343

Subprograms and Repetition of Program Sections

12.98

11.1 Use of subprograms

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Example: N10 POCKET1 It is also possible to use the address word L... for subprograms. The value can have 7 decimal places (integers only). Note: With address L, leading zeros are meaningful for differentiation. Example: N10 L123 N20 L0123 N30 L00123 ;is not ;or ;!

There are three different subprograms in this example. Nesting depth Subprograms can also be called from a subprogram, not only from a main program. In total, up to 12 program levels are available for this type of nested call, including the main program level. This means: Up to 11 nested subprogram calls can be issued from the main program.
Main program Subprogram Submax.11 program Subprogram

Note: If you are working with SIEMENS machining and measuring cycles, then 3 levels are required. If a cycle is to be called from a subprogram, this call cannot be issued from beyond level 9.

11-344

12.98

Subprograms and Repetition of Program Sections

11.2 Subprogram, call

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

11.2

Subprogram, call
Subprogram call You call the subprogram in the main program either with address L and the subprogram number or by specifying the subprogram name. Example: ... N120 L100

Subprogram call "L100.SPF: N10 MSG (DIN subprogram") N20 G1 G91... ... N60 M17 ;End of subprogram End of main program

N160

M30

Example with transfer of R parameter: N10 G0 X0 Y0 G90 T1 Tool T1 in rapid traverse to the first position, absolute dimension Describe arithmetic parameters R10 and R11 Call the rectangle subprogram "RECTANGLE.SPF with transfer of R parameters: N15 G1 X=R10 G91 F500 N25 Y=R11 N35 X=-R10 N45 Y=-R11 N55 M17 ;End of subprogram Position tool at the next machining position Call the rectangle subprogram "RECTANGLE.SPF with transfer of R parameters: End of main program

N20

R10=10 R11=20

N30

RECTANGLE

N40

G0 X50 Y50 G90

N50

RECTANGLE

N60

M30

11-345

Subprograms and Repetition of Program Sections

12.98

11.2 Subprogram, call

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

810D

Call main program as subprogram A main program can also be called as a subprogram. The program end M30 set in the main program is evaluated as M17 (program end with return to the calling program) in this case. You program the call specifying the program name. Example: N10 MPF739 or N10 SHAFT3

Main program

N10 MPF739 or N10SHAFT3

Further main program

N10... . . . N50 M30

A subprogram can also be started as a main program.

Additional notes Search strategy of the control: 1. Are there any *_MPF ? 2. Are there any *_SPF ? This means: if the name of the subprogram to be called is identical to the name of the main program, the main program that issues the call is called again. This is generally an undesirable effect and must be avoided by assigning unique names to subprograms and main programs.

Call the subprograms with the INI file Subprograms that do not require parameter assignment can be called from an initialization file: Example: N10 MYINISUB1

;Subprogram call without parameters

11-346

12.98

Subprograms and Repetition of Program Sections

11.3 Subprogram with program repetition

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

810D

11.3

Subprogram with program repetition

Program repetition, P If a subprogram is to be executed several times in succession, the desired number of program repetitions can be entered at address P in the block with the subprogram call. Example: N40 FRAME P3 The subprogram FRAME must be executed 3 times in succession. Value range P: 1 9999 The following applies to every subprogram call: The subprogram call must always be programmed in a separate NC block.
Main program

Subprogram N40 FRAME P3

1 2 3

Subprogram call with program repetition and parameter transfer Parameters are transferred only when the program is called, i.e. on the first run. The parameters remain unchanged for the remaining repetitions. If you want to change the parameters during program repetitions, you must make the appropriate provision in the subprogram.

11-347

Subprograms and Repetition of Program Sections

12.98

11.4 Program section repetition (SW 4.3 and later)

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

810D

11.4

Program section repetition (SW 4.3 and later) Function

As compared with subprogram technology, program section repetition allows the repetition of existing program sections in any combination. The block or program sections to be repeated are identified by labels. For more information on labels, please see: References: /PG/, Programming Guide Fundamentals, Section 2.2 /PGA/, Programming Guide Advanced Sections 1.11, 1.12

Explanation
LABEL: REPEAT REPEATB Jump destination; the name of the jump destination is followed by a colon Repeat Repeat block

Programming
Repeat block LABEL: xxx yyy REPEATB LABEL P=n zzz The program line identified by a label is repeated P=n times. If P is not specified, the program section is repeated exactly once. After the last repetition, the program is continued at the line zzz following the REPEATB line. The block identified by the label can appear before or after the REPEATB statement. The search initially commences towards the start of the program. If the label is not found in this direction, the search continues towards the end of the program.

11-348

12.98

Subprograms and Repetition of Program Sections

11.4 Program section repetition (SW 4.3 and later)

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

810D

Programming example:
Repetition of positions N10 POSITION1: X10 Y20 N20 POSITION2: CYCLE(0,,9,8) N30 ... N40 REPEATB POSITION1 P=5 N50 REPEATB POSITION2 N60 ... N70 M30 Execute block N10 five times Execute block N20 once Position cycle

Programming
Repeat area starting at label LABEL: xxx yyy REPEAT LABEL P=n zzz The program section between the label with any name and the REPEAT statement is repeated P=n times. If the block with the label contains further statements, these are executed again on each repetition. If P is not specified, the program section is repeated exactly once. After the last repetition, the program is continued at the line zzz following the REPEAT line. The label must appear before the REPEAT statement. The search is performed towards the start of the program only.

11-349

Subprograms and Repetition of Program Sections

12.98

11.4 Program section repetition (SW 4.3 and later)

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

810D

Programming example:
5 squares with increasing width are to be produced N5 R10=15 N10 Begin: R10=R10+1 N20 Z=10-R10 N30 G1 X=R10 F200 N40 Y=R10 N50 X=-R10 N60 Y=-R10 N70 Z=10+R10 N80 REPEAT BEGIN P=4 N90 Z10 N100 M30 Execute area from N10 to N70 four times Width

Programming
Repeat area between two labels START_LABEL: xxx ooo END_LABEL: yyy ppp REPEAT START_LABEL END_LABEL P=n zzz The area between the two labels is repeated P=n times. User-defined names can be assigned to the labels. The first line of the repetition contains the start label, the last line contains the end label. If the line containing the start or end label contains further statements, these are executed again on each pass. If P is not specified, the program section is repeated once. After the last repetition, the program is continued at the line zzz following the REPEAT line. The program section to be repeated can appear before or after the REPEAT statement. The search initially commences towards the start of the program. If the start label is not found in this direction, the search resumes from the REPEAT statement towards the end of the program.

11-350

12.98

Subprograms and Repetition of Program Sections 12.97

11.4 Program section repetition (SW 4.3 and later)

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

810D

It is not possible to nest the REPEAT statement with the two labels within parentheses. If the start label is found before the REPEAT statement and the end label is not reached before the REPEAT statement, the repetition is performed on the section between the start label and the REPEAT statement.

Programming example:
Repeat program section from BEGIN to END N5 R10=15 N10 Begin: R10=R10+1 N20 Z=10-R10 N30 G1 X=R10 F200 N40 Y=R10 N50 X=-R10 N60 Y=-R10 N70 END:Z=10 N80 Z10 N90 CYCLE(10,20,30) N100 REPEAT BEGIN END P=3 N110 Z10 N120 M30 Execute area from N10 to N70 three times Width

Programming
Repeat an area between a label and the end label LABEL: xxx ooo ENDLABEL: yyy REPEAT LABEL P=n zzz ENDLABEL is a predefined label with a fixed name. ENDLABEL marks the end of a program section and can be used multiple times in the program. The block marked by ENDLABEL can contain further statements.

11-351

Subprograms and Repetition of Program Sections

12.98

11.4 Program section repetition (SW 4.3 and later)

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

810D

The area between a label and the following ENDLABEL is repeated P=n times. Any name can be used to define the start label. If the block with the start label or ENDLABEL contains further statements, these are executed on each repetition. If no ENDLABEL is found between the start label and the block with the REPEAT call, the loop ends before the REPEAT line. The construct therefore has the same effect as described above in "repeat area from label". If P is not specified, the program section is repeated once. After the last repetition, the program is continued at the line zzz following the REPEAT line.

Programming example:
N10 G1 F300 Z-10 N20 BEGIN1: N30 X10 N40 Y10 N50 BEGIN2: N60 X20 N70 Y30 N80 ENDLABEL: Z10 N90 X0 Y0 Z0 N100 Z-10 N110 BEGIN3: X20 N120 Y30 N130 REPEAT BEGIN3 P=3 N140 REPEAT BEGIN2 P=2 N150 M100 N160 REPEAT BEGIN1 P=2 N170 Z10 N180 X0 Y0 N190 M30 Execute area from N110 to N120 three times Execute area from N50 to N80 twice Execute area from N20 to N80 twice

11-352

12.98

Subprograms and Repetition of Program Sections

11.4 Program section repetition (SW 4.3 and later)

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

810D

Preconditions Program section repetitions can be nested. Each call uses a subprogram level. If M17 or RET is programmed during processing of a program section repetition, the repetition is aborted. The program is resumed at the block following the REPEAT line. In the actual program display, the program section repetition is displayed as a separate subprogram level. If the level is canceled during the program section repetition, the program resumes at the point after the program section repetition call. Example: N5 R10=15 N10 BEGIN: R10=R10+1 N20 Z=10-R10 N30 G1 X=R10 F200 N40 Y=R10 N50 X=-R10 N60 Y=-R10 N70 END: Z10 N80 Z10 N90 CYCLE(10,20,30) N100 REPEAT BEGIN END P=3 N120 Z10 N130 M30 Control structures and program section repetitions can be used in combination. There should be no overlap between the two, however. A program section repetition should appear within a control structure branch or a control structure should appear within a program section repetition.

Width

Level cancelation

Resume program processing

11-353

Subprograms and Repetition of Program Sections

12.98

11.4 Program section repetition (SW 4.3 and later)

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

810D

If jumps and program section repetitions are mixed, the blocks are executed purely sequentially. For example, if a jump is performed from a program section repetition, processing continues until the programmed end of the program section is found. Example: N10 G1 F300 Z-10 N20 BEGIN1: N30 X10 N40 Y10 N50 GOTOF BEGIN2 N60 ENDLABEL: N70 BEGIN2: N80 X20 N90 Y30 N100 ENDLABEL: Z10 N110 X0 Y0 Z0 N120 Z-10 N130 REPEAT BEGIN1 P=2 N140 Z10 N150 X0 Y0 N160 M30 Activation Program section repetition is activated by programming.

11-354

12.98

Subprograms and Repetition of Program Sections

11.4 Program section repetition (SW 4.3 and later)

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

810D

Programming example:
Milling: Machine drill position with different technologies N10 CENTER DRILL() N20 POS_1: N30 X1 Y1 N40 X2 N50 Y2 N60 X3 Y3 N70 ENDLABEL: N80 POS_2: N90 X10 Y5 N100 X9 Y-5 N110 X3 Y3 N120 ENDLABEL: N130 DRILL() N140 THREAD(6) N150 REPEAT POS_1 N160 DRILL() N170 THREAD(8) N180 REPEAT POS_2 N190 M30 Change drill and drilling cycle Load tap M6 and threading cycle Repeat program section once from POS_1 up to ENDLABEL Change drill and drilling cycle Load tap M8 and threading cycle Repeat program section once from POS_2 up to ENDLABEL Drill positions 2

Load center drill Drill positions 1

11-355

Subprograms and Repetition of Program Sections

12.98

11.4 Program section repetition (SW 4.3 and later)

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

810D

Notes

11-356

12.98

Tables

12-357

Tables

12.98

12.1 List of statements

840 D NCU 571

840 D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

12.1
Legend:
1 2 3

List of statements

Default setting at beginning of program (factory settings of the control, if nothing else programmed). The groups are numbered according to the table headed "List of G functions/preparatory functions" in Section 12.3

Absolute end points: modal; incremental end points: non-modal; otherwise modal/non-modal (m,s) depending on syntax of G function. As arc centers, IPO parameters act incrementally. They can be programmed in absolute mode with AC. With other meanings (e.g. pitch), the address modification is ignored. The vocabulary word is not valid for SINUMERIK FM-NC/810D The vocabulary word is not valid for SINUMERIK FM-NC/810D/NCU571 The vocabulary word is not valid for SINUMERIK 810D The OEM can add two extra interpolation types. The names can be changed by the OEM. The vocabulary word is only valid for SINUMERIK FM-NC Extended address notation cannot be used for these functions.
2

5 6 7 8 9

Name

Definition

Value Description, assignment comment 0 ... 9999 9999 integers only, without signs

Syntax

Modal/ Group nonmodal

Block number - main block (see N)

Special block e.g.. :20 identification instead of N... ; this block should contain all statements for a complete subsequent machining section m,s s s s s X=AC(100) s m A=ACN(...) B=ACN(...) C=ACN(...) A=ACP(...) B=ACP(...) C=ACP(...) s s m m m AMIRROR X0 Y0 Z0 ; separate block s 3
3

A A2 A3 A4 A5 AC ACC ACN ACP ADIS ADISPOS ALF

5 5 5 5 5

Axis Tool orientation: Euler angles

Real Real

Tool orientation: Direction vector component Real Tool orientation for start of block Tool orientation for end of block; normal vector component Input of absolute dimensions Axial acceleration Absolute dimensions for rotary axes, approach position in negative direction Absolute dimensions for rotary axes, approach position in positive direction Approximate distance for path functions G1, Real, w/o G2, G3, ... signs Approximate distance for rapid traverse G0 Angle tilt fast Real, w/o signs Integer, w/o signs Real Real 0, ..., 359.9999 Real, w/o signs

AMIRROR Programmable mirroring (additive mirror)

12-358

12.98

Tables

12.1 List of statements

840 D NCU 571

840 D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Name

Definition

Value Description, assignment comment

Syntax

Modal/ Group nonmodal s

3 3

ANG AP AR AROT

Contour angle Angle polar Aperture angle (angle circular) Programmable rotation (additive rotation) 0, ..., 360 0, ..., 360 Rotation around 1st geo. axis: o -180 .. 180 2nd geo. axis: -89.999 ... 90 3rd geo. axis: -180 .. 180 AROT X... Y... Z... ;Separate AROT RPL= block

m,s m,s s

ASCALE ASPLINE ATRANS AX

AXCTSWE
7

Programmable scaling (additive scale) Akima spline Additive programmable shift (additive translation) Variable axis identifier Advance container axis Axis Real Real Real Real Real Real

ASCALE X... Y... Z... ; separate block

s m

3 1 3
3

ATRANS X... Y... Z... ; separate block

s m,s

AXCTSWE(CTn,CTn+1,...)

25 m,s s s s s m m m 19 19 21
3

B B2 B3 B4 B5
5

Tool orientation: Euler angles Tool orientation: Direction vector component Tool orientation for start of block Tool orientation for end of block; normal vector component
7

5 5

BAUTO BNAT

Definition of first spline segment by the following 3 points (begin not a knot) Natural transition to first spline block (begin natural) Brisk path acceleration Switch on brisk path acceleration for the programmed axes
7

1,7

BRISK

BRISKA BSPLINE BTAN C C2 C3 C4 C5

5 5 7

B spline Tangential transition to first spline block (begin tangential) Axis Tool orientation: Euler angles Tool orientation: Direction vector component Tool orientation for start of block Tool orientation for end of block; normal vector component Real Real Real Real Real

m m m,s s s s s m m m
3

1 19

5 5

CDOF CDON CFC

Collision detection OFF Collision detection ON Constant feed at contour

23 23 16

12-359

Tables

12.98

12.1 List of statements

840 D NCU 571

840 D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Name

Definition

Value Description, assignment comment

Syntax

Modal/ Group nonmodal m 16

CFTCP

Constant feed in tool edge reference point (center-point path) Constant feed at internal radius, acceleration at external radius Chamfer; value = length of chamfer Chamfer; value = length of chamfer in direction of movement (chamfer) Check for unique D numbers circular interpolation through intermediate point Const. workpiece speed for centerless grinding OFF Const. workpiece speed for centerless grinding ON
1,6 6

CFIN

CHF SW 3.5 and later CHR CHKDNO CIP CLGOF CLGON

COMPOF COMPON

Real, w/o signs

CIP X... Y... Z... I1=... J1=... K1=...

Compressor OFF Compressor ON

m m m m m m Real, w/o signs S m CT X... Y.... Z... m m m

30 30 30 49 39 39

COMPCURV Compressor ON: polynomials with constant curvature CP

1,6

continuous path

CPRECOF Programmable contour precision OFF

CPRECON
6

Programmable contour precision ON Circle radius

CR CSPLINE CT CUT2D
1 7

Cubic spline Circle with tangential transition 2 D cutter compensation type 2-dimensional 2 D cutter compensation type 2-dimensional frame; Tool compensation is effective in relation to the current frame (inclined plane)

1 1 22 22

CUT2DF

CUT3DC CUT3DF
CUT3DFF

3D cutter compensation type 3-dimensional circumference milling 3D cutter compensation type 3-dimensional face milling 3D cutter compensation type 3-dimensional face milling with constant tool orientation dependent on the current frame 3D cutter compensation type 3-dimensional face milling with constant tool orientation independent of the current frame

m m m

22 22 22

5 5

CUT3DFS

CUTCONOF Constant radius compensation OFF

m m Contains offset data for a specific in SW 3.5 tool T... ; D0 and higher offset values for a 1, ... 32 000 tool 1, ..., 9 D...

40 40

CUTCONO N

Constant radius compensation ON Tool offset number

12-360

12.98

Tables

12.1 List of statements

840 D NCU 571

840 D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Name

Definition

Value Description, assignment comment

Syntax

Modal/ Grou 2 p nonmodal s

Absolute dimensions for rotary axes, approach position directly

A=DC(...) B=DC(...) C=DC(...) SPOS=DC(...)

DIAMOF DIAMON DIAM90 DILF DISC DISPR DISR DITE DITS DL DRFOF DRIVE
9 7

Diametral programming: OFF Diametral programming: ON Diametral programming: for G90, radius progr. for G91 Length for lift fast Transition circle overshoot - radius compensation Distance for repositioning Distance for repositioning Thread run-out path Thread run-in path Total tool offset Deactivate the handwheel offsets (DRF) Velocity-dependent path acceleration Definition of last spline section by the last 3 points (end not a knot) Natural transition to next traversing block (end natural) Tangential transition to next traversing block at spline end (end tangential) F=100 G1 ... 0.001, ..., Tool/workpiece Feed value (in conjunction with G4 the dwell time is also 99 999.999 path feedrate; unit of programmed in F) measurement in mm/min or mm/rev dependent on G94 or G95 Axial feed 0.001, ..., 999999.999 mm/min, degrees/min; 0.001, ..., 39999.9999 inch/min FA[X]=100 0, ..., 100 Real, w/o signs Real, w/o signs Real Real INT

m m m m m S S m m m m m m m m

29 29 29

21 20 20 20

EAUTO ENAT ETAN F

1,7

FCUB

Feedrate variable according to cubic spline (feed cubic) Path feed for handwheel override (feed DRF) Axial feed for handwheel override (feed DRF axial)
1

m Real, w/o signs Real, w/o signs S S m m m m

FD FDA FFWOF FFWON FGREF

Feedforward control OFF (feed forward OFF) Feedforward control ON (feed forward ON) Reference radius

24 24

CUTCONON Constant radius compensation ON

12-361

Tables

12.98

12.1 List of statements

840 D NCU 571

840 D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

FGROUP

Definition of axis/axes with path feed

F is valid for all axes specified in FGROUP Real, w/o signs The unit set with G93, G94, G95 is applicable (max. rapid traverse)

FGROUP (axis1, [axis2], ...)

Speed limit for synchronized axes (feed limit)

FL [axis] =...

FLIN

Feed linear variable (feed linear) Feed multiple axial

1,6

m Real, w/o signs m m m m G75 FP=1 FPR (rotary axis) S

FMA
FNORM

Feed normal to DIN 66025 Feed for rotating orientation vector on large circle Feed for rotation superimposed on rotated orientation vector Fixed point: number of fixed point to be approached Identification for rotary axis Deactivate revolutional feedrate Activate revolutional feedrate Feed for radius and chamfer Feed for radius and chamfer, modal Integer, w/o signs 0.001 ... 999999.999

FORI1
FORI2

FP FPR FPRAOF FPRAON FRC FRCM

FTOCOF FTOCON
1,6

s m m m Integer, w/o 1 = select, signs 0 = deselect % Parameter optional m m 33 33

Online fine tool offset OFF Online fine tool offset ON Travel to fixed stop ON Torque limit for travel to fixed stop (fixed stop torque) Monitoring window for travel to fixed stop (fixed stop window)

FXS FXST FXSW G functions G

mm, inches Parameter optional or degrees

Only predefined, The G functions are divided into G groups. integer Only one G function from one group can be values written in one block. A G function can either be modal (until canceled by another function from the same group), or non-modal (only effective for the block it is written in). G function (preparatory function) Linear interpolation with rapid traverse Linear interpolation with feed Circular interpolation clockwise Motion commands
1

G...

G0 G1

G0 X... Z... G1 X... Z... F... G2 X... Z... I... K... F... ; center and end points G2 X... Z... CR=... F... ; radius and end point G2 AR=... I... K... F... ; arc angle and center point G2 AR=... X... Z... F... ; arc angle and end point

m m m

1 1 1

12-362

12.98

Tables

12.1 List of statements

840 D NCU 571

840 D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Name

Definition

Value Description, assignment comment

Syntax

Modal/ Group nonmodal ; otherwise as for m s 1 2

G3 G4

Circular interpolation counterclockwise Predefined dwell time Special motion

G3 ... G2

G4 F... ; Dwell time in s, or G4 S... ;Dwell time in spindle revolutions. ; separate block

G9 G17
1

Exact stop - deceleration Selection of working plane X/Y Selection of working plane Z/X Selection of working plane Y/Z Lower working area limitation Upper working area limitation Thread interpolation with constant pitch 0.001, ..., 2000.00 mm/rev Infeed direction Z Infeed direction Y Infeed direction X Value assignments G25 X.. Y.. Z.. ;separate in block Channel axes Motion command G26 X.. Y.. Z..; separate block G33 Z... K... SF=... ; cylinder thread G33 X... I... SF=... ; cross thread G33 Z... X... K... SF=... ; taper thread (in Z axis path greater than in X axis) G33 Z... X... I... SF=... ; taper thread (in X axis path greater than in Z axis)

s m m m s s m

11 6 6 6 3 3 1

G18 G19 G25 G26 G33

G40 G41 G42 G53 G54 G55 G56 G57 G58 G59 G60 G63 G64 G70 G71 G74 G75

Tool radius compensation OFF Tool radius compensation to left of contour Tool radius compensation to right of contour Suppression of current zero offset (non-modal) 1st settable zero offset 2nd settable zero offset 3rd settable zero offset 4th settable zero offset Axial programmable zero offset, absolute Axial programmable zero offset, additive incl. programmed offsets

m m m s m m m m m m m G63 Z... G1 s m m m G74 X... Z...; separate block Machine axes G75 FP=.. X1=... Z1=...; separate block s s

7 7 7 9 8 8 8 8

Exact stop - deceleration Tapping with compensating chuck Exact stop - continuous-path mode Dimensions in inches

10 2 10 13 13 2 2

Metric dimensions Reference point approach Fixed point approach

12-363

Tables

12.98

12.1 List of statements

840 D NCU 571

840 D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Name

Definition

Value Description, assignment comment

Syntax

Modal/ Group nonmodal m s m s m m 14

G90

Absolute dimensions

G90 X... Y... Z...(...) Y=AC(...) or X=AC Z=AC(...) G91 X... Y... Z... or X=IC(...) Y=IC(...) Z=IC(...)

G91 G94 G95 G96 G97 G110 G111 G112 G140 G141 G142 G143 G147 G148 G153 G247 G248 G331 G332 G340
1 1 1

Incremental dimensions Linear feedrate F in mm/min or inches/min and /min Revolutional feedrate F in mm/rev or inches/rev Constant cutting speed ON Constant cutting speed OFF Polar programming relative to last programmed set position Polar programming relative to origin of current workpiece coordinate system Polar programming relative to last valid pole WAB approach direction defined by G41/G42 WAB approach direction to left of contour WAB approach direction to right of contour WAB approach direction tangent-dependent Soft approach with straight line Soft retraction with straight line Suppress current frame including base frame Soft approach with quadrant Soft retraction with quadrant Tapping Retraction (tapping) Spatial approach block (depth and in plane (helix)) Initial infeed on perpendicular axis (z), then approach in plane Soft approach with semi-circle Soft retraction with semi-circle
1

14 15 15 15 15 3 3 3 43 43 43 43 2 2 9 2 2 1 1 44

G96 S... LIMS=... F...

m m

G110 X.. Y.. Z.. G110 X.. Y.. Z.. G110 X.. Y.. Z..

s s s m m m m s s s s s

0.001, ..., 2000.00 mm/rev

Motion commands Effective during soft approach/retraction Effective during soft approach/retraction

m m m

G341

G347 G348 G450 G451 G460 G461 G462 G500

1 1

s s Tool radius compensation response at corners m m m m m m m

2 2 18 18 48 48 48 8 8

Transition circle Intersection of equidistant paths Approach/retraction response for TRC Approach/retraction response for TRC Approach/retraction response for TRC Deactivate all settable frames if G500 does not contain a value 5. ... 99. Settable zero offset

G505 .... G599

12-364

12.98

Tables

12.1 List of statements

840 D NCU 571

840 D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Name

Definition

Value Description, assignment comment Only effective with active G60 or G9 with programmable

Syntax

Modal/ Group nonmodal m m m m m m m 12 12 12 10 10 13 13 31 32

G601 G602 G603 G641 G642 G700 G710

Block change at stop exact fine Block change at stop exact coarse Block change at IPO - end of block Exact stop - continuous-path mode Corner rounding with axial precision Dimensions in inches and inch/min

transition rounding G641 ADIS=...

Metric dimensions in mm and mm/min

G810 , ..., G group reserved for the OEM G819 G820 , ..., G group reserved for the OEM G829 GOTOF GOTOB Jump forwards (towards the end of the program) Jump backwards (towards the start of the program) GWPSOF(T No.) GWPSON (T No.) Can be set by MD Real/INT (machine Program: manufacturer) REAL : 3.4028ex38 INT: -2147483648 +214748364 8 Display: 999 999 999.9999 Real Real 0, ..., 99999.999 Real Real Real Real Real X=IC(10) H100 or H2=100 s s
1

GWPSOF Deselect constant grinding wheel peripheral speed (GWPS) GWPSON Select constant grinding wheel peripheral speed (GWPS) H... Auxiliary function output to PLC

Interpolation parameters Intermediate point coordinate Input of incremental dimensions

s s s

I1 IC

ISD J
4

Insertion depth Interpolation parameters Intermediate point coordinate Interpolation parameters Intermediate point coordinate Travel round contour on tool offset Subprogram number
5 1

m s s s s m 17

J1 K
4

K1 KONT L LEAD LFOF LFON LFTXT LFWP

Integer, up to 7 places Real

Leading zeros are relevant!

L10

s m m m m m 41 41 46 46

Lead angle Interruption of thread cutting OFF Interruption of thread cutting ON Tangential tool direction on retraction Non-tangential tool direction on retraction

12-365

Tables

12.98

12.1 List of statements

840 D NCU 571

840 D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Name

Definition

Value Description, assignment comment 0.001 ... 99 999.999 INT Display: 0, ..., 999 999 999 Program: 0;...; 2147483647 Up to 5 unassigned M functions can be assigned by the machine manufacturer

Syntax

Modal/ Group nonmodal m

LIMS M...

Spindle speed limitation (Limit Spindle Speed) with G96 Switching operations

M0 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6

10 10 10

Programmed stop Optional stop End of main program with reset to beginning of program Direction of spindle rotation clockwise for master spindle Direction of spindle rotation counterclockwise for master spindle Spindle stop for master spindle Tool change

M17 M30 M40

10 10

End of subprogram End of program, same effect as M2 Automatic gear change

M41... M45 Gear stage 1, ..., 5 M70 MEAC MEAS MEASA MEAW MEAWA MIRROR MOV MSG N Programmable messages Block number - subblock 0, ..., 9999 9999 integers only, w/o signs Can be used to identify blocks by means of a number; written at beginning of block MSG("message") e.g. N20 m Transition to axis mode Continuous measurement without deleting distance-to-go Measure with touch-trigger probe Measurement with deletion of distance-to-go Measure with touch-trigger probe without deleting distance-to-go Measurement without deleting distance-togo Programmable mirror MIRROR X0 Y0 Z0 ; separate block Integer, w/o signs Integer, w/o signs Integer, w/o signs S S s S s s 3

NORM

Standard setting in starting point and end point with tool offset
6,8 6,8

m m m OFFN=5

17 1 1

OEMIPO1 OEMIPO2

OEM interpolation 1 OEM interpolation 2 Allowance on the programmed contour

OFFN OMA1
6

OEM address 1

Real

12-366

12.98

Tables

12.1 List of statements

840 D NCU 571

840 D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Name

Definition

Value Description, assignment comment Real Real Real Real Real

Syntax

Modal/ Group nonmodal m m m m m m 27

OMA2 OMA3 OMA4 OMA5 OFFN

ORIC

6 6 6 6

OEM address 2 OEM address 3 OEM address 4 OEM address 5 Offset - normal

1,6

Orientation changes at outside corners are superimposed on the circle block to be inserted (orientation change continuously) Orientation changes are performed before the circle block (orientation change discontinuously) Orientation angle via Euler angle Linear interpolation of machine axes or orientation axes Tool orientation in the machine coordinate system Tool orientation path Transformation package handling, see /FB/, TE4

ORID

m m m m m

27 50 50 25 51

ORIEULER

ORIAXES ORIMKS
6

ORIPATH

ORIRPY ORIS
5

Orientation angle via RPY angle Orientation modification (orientation smoothing factor) Real Referring to the path

m m m m m m

ORIVIRT1 Orientation angle via virtual orientation axes (definition 1) ORIVIRT2 Orientation angle via virtual orientation axes (definition 1)
ORIVECT ORIWKS
1,6

50 50 50 25

Large circle interpolation Tool orientation in the workpiece coordinate system Oscillation on/off Integer, w/o signs

OS OSC
6

Continuous tool orientation smoothing Axis assignment for oscillation activate oscillation Oscillation control options Oscillating: End point Oscillating: Number of spark-out cycles number spark out cycles) Tool orientation smoothing OFF Oscillating: Left reversal point (oscillating: position 1) Oscillating: Right reversal point (oscillating: position 2) Tool orientation smoothing at end of block
6

m Axis: 1 - 3 infeed axes Integer, w/o signs m M m m m Real Real m m m m m m m m

OSCILL OSCTRL OSE OSNSC OSOF OSP1 OSP2 OSS

6 1,6

34 34

OSSE OST1 OST2 OVR OVRA

Tool orientation smoothing at start and end of block Oscillating: Stop at left reversal point Oscillating: Stop at right reversal point Speed override Axial speed override Real Real 1, ..., 200% 1, ..., 200%

12-367

Tables

12.98

12.1 List of statements

840 D NCU 571

840 D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Name

Definition

Value Description, assignment comment 1 ... 9999, integers w/o signs

Syntax

Modal/ Group nonmodal

Number of subprogram passes

e.g. L781 P... ; separate block m m 36 36

PDELAY6 OF PDELAY1,6 ON PL POLY PON

6 6 5

Punch with delay OFF Punch with delay ON Parameter interval length Polynomial interpolation Punch ON Punch ON in IPO cycle (punch ON slow) Position axis Position axis across block boundary LIFTFAST position An axis identifier is PRESETON(X,10,Y,4.5) programmed with the corresponding value in the next parameter. Up to 8 axes possible POS[X]=20 POSA[Y]=20 Real, w/o signs

S m m m 1 35 35

PONS POS POSA POLF

PRESETON Sets the actual value for programmed axes

PTP

point to point

PUTFTOC PutFineToolCorrection: Fine tool correction for continuous dressing

PUTFTOCF PutFineToolCorrectionFunctionDependent:

Fine tool correction depending on a function defined by FCtDEF for continuous dressing PW R... Point weight Arithmetic parameters SW 5 and higher: also as settable address identifier and with numerical extension Repositioning linear all axes: Linear repositioning with all axes Repositioning semi-circle: Repositioning in semi-circle Real, w/o signs R10=3 ;R parameter 0.0000001, Number of R parameters can be assignment ..., X=R10 ;axis value 9999 9999 set by MD R[R10]=6 ;indirect prog. s s s s s s 2 2 2 2 2 2 S

REPOSA REPOSH

REPOSHA Repositioning semi-circle all axes: Repositioning with all axes; geometry axes in semi-circle REPOSL REPOSQ Repositioning linear: Linear repositioning Repositioning quarter-circle: Return to contour in a quarter-circle

REPOSQA Repositioning quarter-circle all axes: Return to contour linear all axes; geometry axes in quarter-circle RET End of subprogram Used instead of M2 RET - for maintaining continuous path operation

12-368

12.98

Tables

12.1 List of statements

840 D NCU 571

840 D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Name

Definition

Value Description, assignment comment

Syntax

Modal/ Group nonmodal m m m 26 26 26

RMB RME RMI

Repositioning at beginning of block (Repos mode begin of block) Repositioning at end of block (Repos mode end of block) Repositioning at interruption point (Repos mode interrupt) Round contour corner Modal rounding Programmable rotation Real, w/o signs Real, w/o signs Rotation around 1st geometry axis: -180 .. 180 2nd geo. axis: -89.999, ..., 90 3rd geo. axis: -180 .. 180 Real Real, w/o signs REAL Display: 999 999 999.9999 Program: 3.4028ex3 8 S...: Spindle speed in rev/min S1...: G4: dwell time in spindle revolutions G96: cutting speed in m/min speed for master spindle speed for spindle 1 RND=... RNDM=... RNDM=0: deactivate m. r. ROT X... Y... Z... ROT RPL= ; separate block

RND RNDM ROT

s m s 3

RP RPL S

Polar radius Rotation in the plane Spindle speed or (with G4, G96) other meaning

m,s S

m, s

SCALE

Programmable scaling (scale)

SCALE X... Y... Z... ; separate block

SD SETMS

Spline degree

Integer, w/o signs

Reset to the master spindle defined in machine data

SETMS(n) Set spindle n as master spindle SF SOFT SON

6 6 1

Starting point offset for thread cutting (spline 0.0000, ..., offset) 359.999 Soft acceleration with jerk limitation Nibbling ON (stroke ON) Nibbling ON in IPO cycle (stroke ON slow) Path reference for FGROUP axes is arc length Switch master spindle or spindle(s) from speed control to position control Switch master spindle or spindle(s) from position control to speed control Fast NCK inputs/outputs for punching/nibbling byte 1 (stroke/punch interface 1) SPCON SPCON (n) SPCON SPCON (n)

m m m m m 21 35 35 45

SONS

SPATH SPCOF SPCON SPIF1

1,6

12-369

Tables

12.98

12.1 List of statements

840 D NCU 571

840 D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Name

Definition

Value Description, assignment comment

Syntax

Modal/ Group nonmodal m 38

SPIF2

Fast NCK inputs/outputs for punching/nibbling byte 2 (stroke/punch interface 2) Define spline grouping Stroke OFF, punching, nibbling OFF Number of path sections per block (stroke/punch number) Length of path section (stroke/punch path) Spindle position Spindle position accross block boundaries Retraction path (sparking out retract path) Retraction path axial with external input (sparking out retract) Sparking out time Sparking out time axial Position of joints Integer Real, w/o signs Real, w/o signs SRA[Y]=0.2 Integer Integer SPOS=10 or SPOS[n]=10 SPOSA=5 or SPOSA[n]=5 Max. 8 axes

SPLINE7 PATH SPOF SPN SPP

6 1,6

m s m m m S m S m s m m including programmed offsets, handwheel offsets (DRF), external zero offset and PRESET offset 1 ... 32 000 Call via T no.: or via tool identifier: Integer m=0: deselect active toolholder Necessary after reset, e.g. through e.g. T3 or T=3 e.g. T="DRILL" TCARR=1 m m m T no. is only necessary if the tool with this number is not active. T No. = 0: Deactivate monitoring for all tools TMOF (T no.) s

SPOS SPOSA SR SRA ST STA STAT

STARTFIFO Execute; simultaneously fill preprocessing memory

4 4 9

STOPFIFO Stop machining; fill preprocessing memory until STARTFIFO is detected, FIFO full or end of program SUPA Suppression of current zero offset

Call tool (only change if specified in machine data; otherwise M6 command necessary) Request toolholder (number "m)
1

TCARR TCOABS TCOFR TILT

Determine tool length components from the current tool orientation

42 42

Determine tool length components from the orientation of manual setting the active frame Tilt angle Deselect tool monitoring Real

TMOF

TMON

Select tool monitoring

TMON (T no.)

TOFRAME Set current programmable frame to tool coordinate system TRAFOOF Deactivate transformation TRAFOOF( )

12-370

12.98

Tables

12.1 List of statements

840 D NCU 571

840 D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Name

Definition

Value Description, assignment comment

Syntax

Modal/ Group nonmodal s s s m 45 3

TRANS TU TURN UPATH WAITM WAITMC

Programmable translation Axis angle Number of turns for helix Path reference for FGROUP axes is curve parameter Wait for marker in specified channel; end previous block with exact stop Wait for marker in specified channel; exact stop only if the other channels have not yet reached the marker Wait for end of traversing Waiting to reach spindle position Integer 0, ..., 999

TRANS X... Y... Z... ; separate block TU=2

WAITM(1,1,2) WAITMC(1,1,2)

WAITP WAITS

WAITP(X) ; separate block WAITS (main spindle) WAITS (n,n,n) ; separate block ; separate block Real Real Real m m m,s m,s m,s
3 3 3

WALIMOF Working area limitation OFF

WALIMON
1

28 28

Working area limitation ON Axis Axis Axis

X Y Z

Legend:
1 2 3

Default setting at beginning of program (factory settings of the control, if nothing else programmed). The group numbering corresponds to the table "Overview of statements in section 11.3 Absolute end points: modal; incremental end points: non-modal; otherwise modal/non-modal (m,s) depending on syntax of G function. As arc centers, IPO parameters act incrementally. They can be programmed in absolute mode with AC. With other meanings (e.g. pitch), the address modification is ignored. The vocabulary word is not valid for SINUMERIK FM-NC/810D The vocabulary word is not valid for SINUMERIK FM-NC/810D/NCU571 The vocabulary word is not valid for SINUMERIK 810D The OEM can add two extra interpolation types. The names can be changed by the OEM. The vocabulary word is only valid for SINUMERIK FM-NC Extended address notation cannot be used for these functions.

5 6 7 8 9

12-371

Tables

12.98

12.2 List of addresses

840 D NCU 571

840 D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

12.2

List of addresses

12.2.1 Address letters

Letter A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z % : / Definition Settable address identifier Settable address identifier Settable address identifier Selection/deselection of tool length compensation, tool cutting edge Settable address identifier Feed Dwell time is seconds G function H function Settable address identifier Settable address identifier Settable address identifier Subprograms, subprogram call M function Subblock number Not assigned Program pass number Settable address identifier Variable identifier (arithmetic parameter) / variable address identifier without numerical extension Spindle value Dwell time in spindle revolutions Tool number Settable address identifier Settable address identifier Settable address identifier Settable address identifier Settable address identifier Settable address identifier Start character and separator for file transfer Main block number Skip identifier x x x x x x x x x x x x x Numeric extension x x x

x x x x

12-372

12.98

Tables

12.2 List of addresses

840 D NCU 571

840 D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

12.2.2 Fixed addresses

Address identifier Address type Modal/ nonmodal (m/s) s s s S. list of G functions m, s m m, s m m x x x x x x x x x G70/ G700/ G90/ IC G71 G710 G91 AC DC, ACN, ACP CIC, CAC, CDC, CACN, CACP Qu Data type

L P N G

Subprogram number Subprogram pass number Block number G function

Integer without sign Integer without sign Integer without sign Integer without sign Real without sign Real without sign Real without sign Real Real

F OVR S SPOS SPOSA

Feed, dwell time Override Spindle, dwell time Spindle position Spindle position accross block boundaries Tool number Offset number Auxiliary functions

T D M, H,

m m s

x x x

Integer without sign Integer without sign M: Integer without sign H: Real

12-373

Tables

12.98

12.2 List of addresses

840 D NCU 571

840 D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

12.2.3 Fixed addresses with axis extension

Address identifier Address type Modal/ nonmodal (m/s) *) s G70/ G700/ G90/ IC G71 G7100 G91 AC DC, ACN, ACP CIC, CAC, CDC, CACN, CACP Qu Data type

AX: Axis IP: Interpolation Parameter

Variable axis identifier Variable interpolation parameter

x x

Real Real

POS: Positioning axis Positioning axis Positioning axis POSA: Positioning axis across block boundaries above end of block Positioning axis POSP: Positioning axis in parts (oscillation) in parts

m m

x x

Real Real

Real: end position/ Real: partial length Integer: option Real without sign 1 - 8 times x Real without sign Real without sign Real without sign Real without sign

PO: Polynomial
1)

Polynomial coefficient Axial feed Axial feed limit

FA: Feed axial FL: Feed limit

m m m m

x x

OVRA: Override Axial override ACC : Acceleration axial FMA: Feed multiple axial STA: Sparkingout time axial SRA: Sparking out retract
2)

Axial acceleration Synchronized feed axial Sparking out time axial Retraction path on external input axial

m m m x

Real without sign Real without sign

Real without sign Integer without sign Real

OS: Oscillation on/off Oscillating on/off OST1: Oscillating time 1 OST2: Oscillating time 2 OSP1: Oscillating Position 1 OSP2: Oscillating Position 2 Stopping time at left reversal point (oscillation) Stopping time at right reversal point (oscillation) Left reversal point (oscillation) Right reversal point (oscillation)

m m

Real

12-374

12.98

Tables

12.2 List of addresses

840 D NCU 571

840 D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Address identifier

Address type

Modal/ nonmodal (m/s) m m

G70/ G700/ G90/ IC G71 G7100 G91

DC, ACN, ACP

CIC, CAC, CDC, CACN, CACP

Data type

OSE: Oscillating Oscillation end end position position OSNSC: Oscillating: number spark out cycles OSCTRL: Oscillating control Oscillating: number of spark out cycles Oscillation control options

Real Integer without sign

Integer without sign: set options, integer without sign: reset options Axis: 1 - 3 infeed axes

OSCILL: Oscillating

Axis assignment for oscillation, activate oscillation Axis feedrate for handwheel override Reference radius LIFTFAST position Activate travel to fixed stop Torque limit for travel to fixed stop Monitoring window for travel to fixed stop

FDA: Feed DRF axial FGREF POLF FXS: Fixed stop FXST: Fixed stop torque FXSW: Fixed stop window

Real without sign Real without sign Real without sign Integer without sign Real

m m m m

x x

Real

In these addresses, an axis or an expression of axis type is specified in square brackets. The data type in the above column shows the type of value assigned. *) Absolute end points: modal, incremental end points: non-modal, otherwise modal/non-modal depending on syntax of G function. 1) The vocabulary word is not valid for SINUMERIK FM-NC. 2) The vocabulary word is not valid for SINUMERIK FM-NC/810D.

12-375

Tables

12.98

12.2 List of addresses

840 D NCU 571

840 D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

12.2.4 Settable addresses

Address identifier Address type Modal/ G70/ G700/ G90/ IC nonG71 G710 G91 modal (m/s) AC DC, ACN, ACP CIC, Qu CAC, CDC, CACN, CACP Max. no. Data type

Axis values and end points X, Y, Z, A, B, C Axis *) m/s* m/s* x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 8 1 1 Real Real Real without sign

AP: Angle polar Polar angle RP: Polar radius Polar radius Tool orientation A2, B2, C2 A3, B3, C3
1) 1)

Euler angles Direction vector component

s s m

3 3 3

Real Real Real

A4, B4, C4 for Normal vector block beginning component

A5, B5, C5 for 1) end of block LEAD: 1) Lead angle TILT: 1) Tilt angle ORIS: Orientation Smoothing Factor
1)

Normal vector component Lead angle Tilt angle Orientation change (referring to the path)

s m m m

3 1 1 1

Real Real Real Real

Interpolation parameters I, J, K** I1, J1, K1 RPL: Rotation plane CR: Circle Radius AR: Angle circular TURN Interpolation parameter Intermediate point coordinate Rotation in the plane Circle radius Arc angle Number of turns for helix s s s s m m m 1 s s s s x x x x x x x x** x x** x 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Real Real Real Real without sign Real without sign Integer without sign Real without sign Real without sign Integer without sign Integer without sign Integer without sign Real

PL: Parameter - Parameter Interval - Length interval length PW: Point Weight SD: Spline Degree TU: Turn STAT: State SF: Point weight Spline degree Turn State Starting point

12-376

12.98

Tables

12.2 List of addresses

840 D NCU 571

840 D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Address identifier

Address type

Modal/ G70/ G700/ G90/ IC nonG71 G710 G91 modal (m/s)

DC, ACN, ACP

CIC, Qu CAC, CDC, CACN, CACP

Max. no.

Data type

Spindle offset

offset for thread cutting s s x x x x 1 1 Real without sign Real without sign Integer without sign Real Integer without sign

DISR: Distance Distance for for repositioning repositioning Distance for DISPR: Distance path for repositioning repositioning ALF: Angle lift fast Angle for lift fast

m m s x x

1 1 1

DILF: Distance for lift Distance lift fast fast FP Fixed point: Number of fixed point to be approached Modal rounding Non-modal rounding Chamfer nonmodal Chamfer in the original direction of movement Contour angle Insertion depth Transition circle overshoot in tool radius compensation Offset contour normal Thread run-in path Thread run-out path

RNDM: Round modal RND: Round CHF: Chamfer CHR: Chamfer

m s s s

x x x x

1 1 1 1

Real without sign Real without sign Real without sign Real without sign Real Real Real without sign

ANG: Angle ISD: Insertion depth DISC: Distance

s m m x x x x

1 1 1

OFFN DITS DITE

m m m

x x x

1 1 1

Real Real Real

Nibbling/punching SPN: Stroke/Punch 2) Number SPP: Stroke 2) /Punch Path Grinding ST: Sparking out Sparking-out time time SR: Sparking out Retraction path retract path s s x x 1 1 Real without sign Real without sign Number of path sections per block Length of a path section s 1 INT

Real

12-377

Tables

12.98

12.2 List of addresses

840 D NCU 571

840 D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Address identifier

Address type

Modal/ G70/ G700/ G90/ IC nonG71 G710 G91 modal (m/s)

DC, ACN, ACP

CIC, Qu CAC, CDC, CACN, CACP

Max. no.

Data type

Approximate positioning criteria ADIS ADISPOS Approximate distance Approximate distance for rapid traverse m m x x x x 1 1 Real without sign Real without sign

Measurement MEAS: Measure Measure with touch-trigger probe MEAW: Measure without deleting distance-to-go Measure with touch-trigger probe without deleting distance-to-go s 1 Integer without sign Integer without sign

Axis, spindle behavior LIMS: Limit spindle speed Feeds FAD Speed of the slow infeed motion Path feed for handwheel override Feed for rotating orientation vector on large circle Feed for rotation superimposed on rotated orientation vector Feed for radius and chamfer Feed for radius and chamfer, modal s x 1 Real without sign Real without sign Real without sign Spindle speed limitation m 1 Real without sign

FD: Feed DRF FORI1

FORI2

Real without sign

FRC FRCM

s m

x x

Real without sign Real without sign

OEM addresses OMA1: OEM 2) Address 1 OMA2: OEM Address 2 2) OMA3: OEM 2) Address 3 OMA4: OEM 2) Address 4 OEM address 1 OEM address 2 OEM address 3 OEM address 4 m m m m x x x x x x x x x x x x 1 1 1 1 Real Real Real Real

12-378

12.98

Tables

12.2 List of addresses

840 D NCU 571

840 D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Address identifier

Address type

Modal/ G70/ G700/ G90/ IC nonG71 G710 G91 modal (m/s) m x

DC, ACN, ACP

CIC, Qu CAC, CDC, CACN, CACP

Max. no.

Data type

OMA5: OEM 2) Address 5

OEM address 5

Real

*) Absolute end points: modal, incremental end points: non-modal, otherwise modal/non-modal depending on syntax of G function. **) As circle center points, IPO parameters act incrementally. They can be programmed in absolute mode with AC. The address modification is ignored when the parameters have other meanings (e.g. thread pitch). 1) The vocabulary word is not valid for SINUMERIK FM-NC/810 D 2) The vocabulary word is not valid for SINUMERIK FM-NC/810D/NCU571.

12-379

Tables

12.98

12.3 List of G functions/preparatory functions

840 D NCU 571

840 D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

12.3

List of G functions/preparatory functions

Legend for describing the G groups

No.: internal number, for e.g. PLC interface X: No. for GCODE_RESET_VALUES not allowed m: modal s: non-modal F: milling D: turning Std.: default setting MH.: see machine manufacturer's specifications for default setting

Group 1: Modally active motion commands Name G0 G1 G2 G3 CIP/G05 ASPLINE # BSPLINE # CSPLINE # POLY ## G33 G331 G332 No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. Definition Rapid traverse Linear interpolation Circular interpolation clockwise Circular interpolation counterclockwise Circle through points: circular interpolation through intermediate point Akima spline B spline Cubic spline Polynomial: Polynomial interpolation Thread cutting with constant lead Tapping Retraction (tapping) OEM interpolation 1 *) OEM interpolation 2 *) Circle with tangential transition X m/s m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m Default F D MH

OEMIPO1 ### 13. OEMIPO2 ### 14. CT 15.

*) The OEM can incorporate two additional interpolation modes. The names can be changed by the OEM. If no function from the group is programmed with modal G functions, the default setting (which can be changed in the machine data) applies: $MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES # The vocabulary word is not valid for SINUMERIK 810D. ## The vocabulary word is not valid for SINUMERIK FM-NC/810D. ### The vocabulary word is not valid for SINUMERIK FM-NC/810D/NCU571.

Group 2: Non-modally active movements, dwell time G4 G63 G74 G75 REPOSL REPOSQ REPOSH REPOSA REPOSQA REPOSHA G147 G247 G347 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. Predefined dwell time Tapping without synchronization Reference point approach with synchronization Fixed point approach Repositioning linear: Linear repositioning Repositioning quadrant: Repositioning in a quadrant Repositioning semi-circle: Repositioning in semi-circle Repositioning linear all axis: Linear repositioning with all axes Repositioning quadrant all axes: Linear repositioning with all axes, geometry axes in quadrant Repositioning semi-circle all axes: Repositioning with all axes; geometry axes in semi-circle Soft approach with straight line Soft approach with quadrant Soft approach with semi-circle X X X X X X X X X X X X X s s s s s s s s s s s s s

12-380

12.98

Tables

12.3 List of G functions/preparatory functions

840 D NCU 571

840 D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Group 2: Non-modally active movements, dwell time G148 G248 G348 14. 15. 16. Soft retraction with straight line Soft retraction with quadrant Soft retraction with semi-circle X X X s s s

Group 3: Write memory Name TRANS ROT SCALE MIRROR ATRANS AROT ASCALE AMIRROR TOFRAME G25 G26 G110 G111 G112 G58 G59 No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. Definition TRANSLATION: programmable translation ROTATION: programmable rotation SCALE: programmable scale MIRROR: programmable mirror Additive TRANSLATION: programmable additive translation Additive ROTATION: programmable rotation Additive SCALE: programmable scale Additive MIRROR: programmable mirror Set current programmable frame to tool coordinate system Minimum working area limitation/spindle speed limit Maximum working area limitation/spindle Polar programming relative to last programmed set position Polar programming relative to origin of current workpiece coordinate system Polar programming relative to last valid pole Programmable offset, axial substitution Programmable offset, additive axial substitution X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X m/s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s F D MH

Group 4: FIFO STARTFIFO STOPFIFO 1. 2. Start FIFO Execute and simultaneously fill preprocessing memory STOP FIFO Stop machining; fill preprocessing memory until STARTFIFO is detected, FIFO full or end of program m m Default

Group 6: Plane selection G17 G18 G19 1. 2. 3. Plane selection 1st - 2nd geometry axis Plane selection 3rd - 1st geometry axis Plane selection 2nd - 3rd geometry axis m m m Default

Group 7: Tool radius compensation G40 G41 G42 1. 2. 3. No tool radius compensation Tool radius compensation to left of contour Tool radius compensation to right of contour X X m m m Default

12-381

Tables

12.98

12.3 List of G functions/preparatory functions

840 D NCU 571

840 D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Group 8: Settable zero offset Name G500 G54 G55 G56 G57 G505 G5xx G599 No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. n+1 100. Definition Deactivate all settable frames if G500 does not contain a value Settable zero offset 1 Settable zero offset 2 Settable zero offset 3 Settable zero offset 4 settable zero offset 5 n. settable zero offset n Settable zero offset 99 X m/s m m m m m m m m F Default D MH

The G functions of this group activate a settable user frame SP_UIFR[ ]. G54 corresponds to frame SP_UIFR[1], G505 corresponds to frame SP_UIFR[5]. The number of settable user frames and therefore the number of G functions in this group can be configured in the machine data SMC_MM_NUM_USER_FRAMES.

Group 9: Frame suppression G53 SUPA G153 1 2. 3. Suppress current frame Suppress current zero offset, including programmed offsets, handwheel offsets (DRF), external zero offset and PRESET offset Suppress current frame including base frame X X X s s s

Group 10: Exact stop - continuous-path mode G60 G64 G641 G642 1. 2. 3. 4. Deceleration, exact stop Continuous-path mode Continuous-path mode with programmable approximate distance Corner rounding with axial precision m m m m Default

Group 11: Non-modal exact stop G9 1. Deceleration, exact stop X s

Group 12: Block change criterion for exact stop (G60/G09) G601 G602 G603 1. 2. 3. Block change on exact stop fine Block change on exact stop coarse Block change on IPO end of block m m m Default

Group 13: Workpiece dimensions in imperial/metric G70 G71 1. 2. Input system inches Input system metric m m Default

12-382

12.98

Tables

12.3 List of G functions/preparatory functions

840 D NCU 571

840 D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Group 13: Workpiece dimensions in imperial/metric G700 G710 3. 4. Input system inches; inch/min Input system metric; mm; mm/min m m Default Default

Group 14: Workpiece dimensions, absolute/incremental Name G90 G91 No. 1. 2. Definition Absolute dimensions Incremental dimensions m/s m m F Default D MH

Group 15: Feed type G94 G95 G96 G97 1. 2. 3. 4. Linear feedrate in mm/min, inches/min Revolutional feedrate in mm/rev, inches/rev Constant cutting speed ON Constant cutting speed OFF m m Default

# The vocabulary word is not valid for SINUMERIK FM-NC/810D.

Group 16: Feedrate override on inside and outside curvature CFC CFTCP CFIN 1. 2. 3. Constant feed at contour Constant feed in tool center point Constant feed at internal radius, acceleration at external radius m m m Default

Group 17: Approach and retraction response, tool offset NORM KONT 1. 2. Normal position at start and end points Travel around contour at start and end points m m Default

Group 18: Corner behavior, tool offset G450 G451 1. 2. Transition circle Intersection of equidistant paths m m Default

Group 19: Curve transition at beginning of spline BNAT # BTAN # 1. 2. Begin natural: natural transition to first spline block Begin tangential: tangential transition to first spline block m m Default

12-383

Tables

12.98

12.3 List of G functions/preparatory functions

840 D NCU 571

840 D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Group 19: Curve transition at beginning of spline BAUTO # 3. Begin not a knot: definition of first spline section by the following 3 points m

# The vocabulary word is not valid for SINUMERIK 810D, CCU1.

Group 20: Curve transition at end of spline Name ENAT # ETAN # EAUTO # No. 1. 2. 3. Definition End natural: natural transition to next traversing block End tangential: tangential transition to next traversing block at spline begin End not a knot: definition of last spline section by the last 3 points X m/s m m m F Default D MH

# The vocabulary word is not valid for SINUMERIK 810D.

Group 21: Acceleration profile BRISK SOFT DRIVE ## 1. 2. 3. Brisk path acceleration Soft path acceleration Velocity-dependent path acceleration m m m Default

# # The vocabulary word is only valid for SINUMERIK FM-NC.

Group 22: Tool offset types CUT2D CUT2DF 1. 2. Cutter compensation type 2-dimensional 2 1/2D tool compensation Cutter compensation type 2-dimensional frame relative: 2 1/2D tool compensation Tool compensation is effective relative to the current frame (inclined plane) Cutter compensation type 3-dimensional circumference: 3D tool compensation circumference milling Cutter compensation type 3-dimensional face: 3D tool compensation face milling Cutter compensation type 3-dimensional face: 3D tool compensation face milling with constant tool orientation independent of active frame Cutter compensation type 3-dimensional face frame: 3D tool compensation face milling with constant tool orientation dependent on active frame m m Default

CUT3DC # CUT3DF # CUT3DFS # CUT3DFF #

3. 4. 5. 6.

m m m m

# The vocabulary word is not valid for SINUMERIK FM-NC/810D.

Group 23: Collision monitoring on inside contours CDOF CDON 1. 2. Collision detection off: Collision monitoring OFF Collision detection ON Collision monitoring ON m m Default

12-384

12.98

Tables

12.3 List of G functions/preparatory functions

840 D NCU 571

840 D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Group 24: Feedforward control FFWOF FFWON 1. 2. Feed forward ON: Feedforward control OFF Feed forward ON: Feedforward control ON m m Default

Group 25: Tool orientation reference ORIWKS # ORIMKS # 1. 2. Tool orientation in workpiece coordinate system Tool orientation in workpiece coord. system Tool orientation in machine coordinate system Tool orientation in machine coord. system m m Default

# The vocabulary word is not valid for SINUMERIK FM-NC/810D/NCU571.

Group 26: Repositioning point for Repos RMB RMI RME 1. 2. 3. Repos mode beginning of block: reapproach to start of block position Repos mode interrupt: reapproach to interruption point Repos mode end of block: reapproach to end of block position m m m Default

Group 27: Tool offset for change in orientation at outside corners Name ORIC # ORID # No. 1. 2. Definition Orientation change continuously: orientation changes at outside corners are superimposed on the circle block to be inserted Orientation change discontinuously: orientation changes are performed before the circle block X m/s m m F Default D MH

# The vocabulary word is not valid for SINUMERIK FM-NC/810D/NCU571.

Group 28: Working area limitation ON/OFF WALIMON WALIMOF 1. 2. Working area limitation ON Working area limitation ON Working area limitation OFF Working area limitation OFF m m Default

Group 29: Radius - diameter DIAMOF DIAMON DIAM90 1. 2. 3. Diametral programming off Diameter programming OFF Diametral programming on Diameter programming ON Diametral programming G90; Radius programming G91 m m m Default

Group 30: Compressor ON/OFF COMPOF # COMPON # 1. 2. Compressor OFF Compressor ON m m Default

12-385

Tables

12.98

12.3 List of G functions/preparatory functions

840 D NCU 571

840 D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Group 30: Compressor ON/OFF COMPCURV 3. Compressor on: polynomials with constant curvature m

Group 31: OEM G group G810 # G811 # G812 # G813 # G814 # G815 # G816 # G817 # G818 # G819 # 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. OEM G function OEM G function OEM G function OEM G function OEM G function OEM G function OEM G function OEM G function OEM G function OEM G function Default

Two G groups are reserved for the OEM. This enables the OEM to program functions that can be customized. # The vocabulary word is not valid for SINUMERIK FM-NC/810D/NCU571.

Group 32: OEM G group Name G820 # G821 # G822 # G823 # G824 # G825 # G826 # G827 # G828 # G829 # No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Definition OEM G function OEM G function OEM G function OEM G function OEM G function OEM G function OEM G function OEM G function OEM G function OEM G function X m/s F Default D MH

Two G groups are reserved for the OEM. This enables the OEM to provide customized functions.

Group 33: Settable fine tool offset FTOCOF # FTOCON # 1. 2. Fine tool offset compensation OFF: Online fine tool offset OFF Fine tool offset compensation ON: Online fine tool offset ON X m m Default

Group 34: Tool orientation smoothing OSOF # OSC # 1. 2. Tool orientation smoothing OFF Continuous tool orientation smoothing m m Default

12-386

12.98

Tables

12.3 List of G functions/preparatory functions

840 D NCU 571

840 D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Group 34: Tool orientation smoothing OSS # OSSE # 3. 4. Tool orientation smoothing at end of block Tool orientation smoothing at start and end of block m m

Group 35: Punching and nibbling: SPOF # SON # PON # SONS # PONS # 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Stroke/punch OFF: Stroke OFF, nibbling, punching OFF Stroke ON: Nibbling ON Punch ON: Punching ON Stroke ON slow: Nibbling ON in IPO cycle Punch ON slow: Punching ON in IPO cycle X X m m m m m Default

Group 36: Delayed punching PDELAYON # 1. PDELAYOF # 2. Punch with delay ON Punching ON delay Punch with delay OFF Punching OFF delay m m Default

# The vocabulary word is not valid for SINUMERIK FM-NC/810D/NCU571.

Group 37: Feedrate profile: FNORM # FLIN # FCUB # 1. 2. 3. Feed normal: Feed normal (to DIN 66025) Feed linear: Feed linear variable Feed cubic: Feedrate variable according to cubic spline m m m Default

Group 38: Assignment of high-speed inputs/outputs for punching/nibbling: SPIF1 # SPIF2 # 1. 2. Stroke/punch interface 1: fast NCK inputs/outputs for punching/nibbling byte 1 Stroke/punch interface 2: fast NCK inputs/outputs for punching/nibbling byte 2 m m Default

Group 39: Programmable contour accuracy CPRECOF CPRECON 1. 2. Contour precision OFF: Programmable contour precision OFF Contour precision ON: Programmable contour precision ON m m Default

# The vocabulary word is not valid for SINUMERIK FM-NC/NCU571.

Group 40: Tool radius compensation, constant CUTCONOF CUTCONON 1. 2. Constant radius compensation off Constant radius compensation on m m Default

12-387

Tables

12.98

12.3 List of G functions/preparatory functions

840 D NCU 571

840 D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Group 41: Thread cutting interruption LFOF LFON 1. 2. Interrupt thread cutting off Interrupt thread cutting on m m Default

Group 42: Toolholder: TCOABS TCOFR 1. 2. Toolholder orientation absolute Toolholder orientation frame m m Default

Group 43: Approach direction WAB G140 G141 G142 G143 1. 2. 3. 4. WAB approach direction defined by G41/G42 WAB approach direction to left of contour WAB approach direction to right of contour WAB approach direction tangent-dependent m m m m Default

Group 44: Path segmentation WAB: G340 G341 1. 2. Spatial approach block (depth and in plane (helix)) Initial infeed on perpendicular axis (z), then approach in plane m m Default

Group 45: Path reference for FGROUP axes: SPATH UPATH 1. 2. Path reference for FGROUP axes is arc length Path reference for FGROUP axes is curve parameter m m Default

Group 46: Plane definition for rapid lift: LFTXT LFWP LFPOS 1. 2. 3. Tangential tool direction on retraction Non-tangential tool direction on retraction Axial retraction m m m Default

Group 47: Mode switchover for external NC code G290 G291 1. 2. Switch to SINUMERIK mode Switch to FANUC mode m m Default

Group 48: Approach/retraction behavior TRC: G460 G461 1. 2. Collision monitoring for approach and retraction block on Extend border block with arc m m Default

12-388

12.98

Tables

12.3 List of G functions/preparatory functions

840 D NCU 571

840 D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Group 48: Approach/retraction behavior TRC: G462 3. Extend border block with straight line m

Group 49: Point-to-point movement: CP PTP 1. 2. continuous path point to point m m Default

Group 50: Orientation programming: ORIEULER ORIRPY ORIVIRT1 ORIVIRT2 1. 2. 3. 4. Orientation angle via Euler angle Orientation angle via RPY angle Orientation angle via virtual orientation axes (definition 1) Orientation angle via virtual orientation axes (definition 2) m m m m Default

Group 51: Orientation interpolation ORIMACHAX ORIVIRTAX 1. 2. Linear interpolation of machine axes or orientation axes Large circle interpolation m m Default

12-389

Tables

12.98

12.4 List of predefined subprograms

840 D NCU 571

840 D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

12.4

List of predefined subprograms

Some control functions are activated with subprogram call syntax.

1. Coordinate system Vocabulary word/ Parameter 1 function identifier PRESETON AXIS*: Name of machine axis Parameter 2 REAL: Preset offset G700/G7100 context Parameter 3-15 Parameter 3 15 same as 1 ... Parameter 4-16 Description Parameter 4 - 16 Sets the actual value for programmed axes. same One axis identifier is programmed at a as 2 ... time, with its respective value in the next parameter. Preset offsets can be programmed for up to 8 axes with PRESETON. Deletes the DRF offset for all axes assigned to the channel.

DRFOF

*) As a general rule, geometry or special axis identifiers can also be used instead of the machine axis identifier, as long as the reference is unambiguous.

12.4.1 Predefined subprogram calls

2. Axis groups Parameter 1-8 FGROUP Channel axis identifier REAL: Max. speed of regulating wheel Description Variable F value reference: defines the axes to which the path feed refers. Maximum number of axes: 8 The default setting for the F value reference is activated with FGROUP ( ) without parameters. Centerless grinding ON

CLGON #

CLGOF # Parameter 1-8 SPLINEPATH ## INT: spline group (must be 1)

Centerless grinding OFF Parameter 2-9 AXIS: Geometry or special axis identifier Description Definition of the spline group Maximum number of axes: 8

BRISKA SOFTA DRIVEA ### JERKA

AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS

Activate brisk axis acceleration for the programmed axes Activate soft axis acceleration for the programmed axes Activate knee-shaped acceleration characteristic for the programmed axes The acceleration behavior set in machine data $MA_AX_JERK_ENABLE is active for the programmed axes.

# The vocabulary word is not valid for SINUMERIK FM-NC/810D/NCU571. # The vocabulary word is not valid for SINUMERIK 810D. ### The vocabulary word is only valid for SINUMERIK FM-NC.

3. Coupled motion Vocabulary word/ Parameter 1 subprogram identifier TANG # Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Paramet Parameter 5 er 4 REAL: CHAR: Coupling Optional: "B": follow-up in factor basic coordinate Description

REAL: AXIS: AXIS: Axis identifier following Master axis 1 Master axis 2 axis

Preparatory instruction for the definition of a tangential follow-up: The tangent for the follow-up is determined by the two master

12-390

12.98

Tables

12.4 List of predefined subprograms

840 D NCU 571

840 D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

3. Coupled motion Vocabulary word/ Parameter 1 subprogram identifier Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Paramet Parameter 5 er 4 system "W": follow-up in workpiece coordinate system TANGON # REAL: Offset AXIS: Axis identifier following angle axis AXIS: Axis identifier following axis AXIS: Following axis AXIS: Following axis AXIS: Following axis REAL: Distance AXIS: REAL: Leading axis Coupling factor AXIS: Leading axis Description

axes specified. The coupling factor specifies the relationship between a change in the angle of tangent and the following axis. It is usually 1. Tangential follow-up mode ON

TANGOF #

Tangential follow-up mode OFF

TLIFT # TRAILON

Tangential lift: Tangential follow-up mode ON Trailing ON: Asynchronous coupled motion ON Trailing OFF: Asynchronous coupled motion ON

TRAILOF

# The vocabulary word is not valid for SINUMERIK FM-NC/NCU571.

6. Revolutional feedrate Vocabulary word/function identifier FPRAON Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Description

AXIS: Axis for which revolutional feedrate is activated

AXIS: Axis/spindle from which the revolutional feedrate is derived. If no axis has been programmed, the revolutional feedrate is derived from the master spindle.

Feedrate per revolution axial ON: Axial revolutional feedrate ON

FPRAOF

AXIS: Axis for which revolutional feedrate is deactivated

Feedrate per revolution axial OFF: Axial revolutional feedrate OFF The revolutional feedrate can be deactivated for several axes at once. You can program as many axes as are permitted in a block. Feedrate per revolution: Selection of a rotary axis or spindle from which the revolutional feedrate of the path is derived if G95 is programmed. If no axis/spindle has been programmed, the revolutional feedrate is derived from the master spindle. The setting made with FPR is modal.

FPR

AXIS: Axis/spindle from which the revolutional feedrate is derived. If no axis has been programmed, the revolutional feedrate is derived from the master spindle.

It is also possible to program a spindle instead of an axis: FPR(S1) or FPR(SPI(1))

12-391

Tables

12.98

12.4 List of predefined subprograms

840 D NCU 571

840 D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

7. Transformations Vocabulary word/function identifier TRACYL Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Description

REAL: working diameter

INT: number of transformati on

Cylinder: Peripheral surface transformation Several transformations can be set per channel. The transformation number specifies which transformation is to be activated. If the 2nd parameter is omitted, the transformation group defined in the MD is activated. Transmit: Polar transformation Several transformations can be set per channel. The transformation number specifies which transformation is to be activated. If the parameter is omitted, the transformation group defined in the MD is activated.

TRANSMIT

INT: number of transformation

TRAANG #

REAL: angle

INT: number of transformati on

Transformation inclined axis: Several transformations can be set per channel. The transformation number specifies which transformation is to be activated. If the 2nd parameter is omitted, the transformation group defined in the MD is activated. If the angle is not programmed: TRAANG (.2) or TRAANG the last angle is active modally. Transformation oriented: 4, 5-axis transformation Several transformations can be set per channel. The transformation number specifies which transformation is to be activated.

TRAORI #

INT: number of transformation INT: number of transformation

TRACON

Transformation Concentrated: Cascaded transformation; the meaning of the REAL: parameters depends on the type of cascading. Further parameters, MDdependent Deactivate transformation

TRAFOOF

For each transformation type, there is one command for one transformation per channel. If there are several transformations of the same transformation type per channel, the transformation can be selected with the corresponding command and parameters. It is possible to deselect the transformation by a transformation change or an explicit deselection. #)The vocabulary word is not valid for SINUMERIK FM-NC/NCU571.

8. Spindle Vocabulary word/subprogram identifier SPCON SPCOF SETMS Parameter 1 Parameter 2 and Description others INT: spindle number INT: spindle number Spindle position control ON: Switch to position-controlled spindle operation Spindle position control OFF: Switch to speed-controlled spindle operation Set master spindle: declare the spindle master spindle for the current channel. SETMS( ) without parameters activates the default setting in the machine data.

INT: spindle number INT: spindle number INT: spindle number

9. Grinding Vocabulary word/subprogram identifier GWPSON Parameter 1 Description

INT: spindle number

Grinding wheel peripheral speed ON: Constant grinding wheel peripheral speed ON If the spindle number is not programmed, then grinding wheel peripheral speed is selected for the spindle of the active tool.

12-392

12.98

Tables

12.4 List of predefined subprograms

840 D NCU 571

840 D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

9. Grinding Vocabulary word/subprogram identifier GWPSOF Parameter 1 Description

INT: spindle number INT: spindle number INT: T number

Grinding wheel peripheral speed OFF. Constant grinding wheel peripheral speed OFF. If the spindle number is not programmed, grinding wheel peripheral speed is deselected for the spindle of the active tool. Tool monitoring ON: If no T number is programmed, monitoring is activated for the active tool. Tool monitoring OFF: If no T number is programmed, monitoring is deactivated for the active tool.

TMON TMOF

10. Stock removal Vocabulary word/subprogram identifier CONTPRON Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4 Description

REAL [ , 11]: contour table

INT: number of CHAR: Stock removal method relief cuts "L": Longitudinal turning: external machining "P": Face turning: External machining "N": Face turning: inside machining "G": Longitudinal turning: inside machining

INT: Status of calculation 0: as before 1: Calculation forwards and backwards

Contour preparation on: Activate reference point editing The contour programs and NC blocks which are called in the following steps are divided into individual movements and stored in the contour table. The number of relief cuts is returned.

EXECUTE

INT: error status

EXECUTE: Activate program execution. This switches back to normal program execution from reference point editing mode or after setting up a protection zone.

11. Execute table Vocabulary word/subprogram identifier EXECTAB Parameter 1 Description

REAL [ 11]: Element from motion table

Execute table: Execute an element from a motion table.

12-393

Tables

12.98

12.4 List of predefined subprograms

840 D NCU 571

840 D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

12. Protection zones Vocabulary word/function identifier CPROTDEF Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4 Parameter 5 Description

INT: Number of protection zone

BOOL: TRUE: Tool-oriented protection zone

REAL: Limit in INT: 0: Parameters 4 plus direction and 5 are not evaluated 1: Parameter 4 is evaluated 2: Parameter 5 is evaluated 3: Parameters 4 and 5 are evaluated REAL: Limit in INT: 0: Parameters 4 plus direction and 5 are not evaluated 1: Parameter 4 is evaluated 2: Parameter 5 is evaluated 3: Parameters 4 and 5 are evaluated

REAL: Limit in minus direction

Channel-specific protection area definition: Definition of a channel-specific protection zone

NPROTDEF

INT: Number of protection zone

BOOL: TRUE: Tool-oriented protection zone

REAL: Limit in minus direction

NCK-specific protection area definition: Definition of a machine-specific protection zone

CPROT

INT: Number of protection zone

INT: option 0: Protection zone off 1: Preactivate protection zone 2: Protection zone ON INT: option 0: Protection zone off 1: Preactivate protection zone 2: Protection zone on

Channel-specific REAL: Offset of REAL: Offset for REAL: Offset of protection zone on protection zone in protection zone in protection zone 1st channel axis 2nd channel axis 3rd channel axis on/off (= axis on which the geometry axes are mapped) Machine-specific REAL: Offset of REAL: Offset for REAL: Offset of protection zone on protection zone in protection zone in protection zone 1st channel axis 2nd channel axis 3rd channel axis on/off (= axis on which the geometry axes are mapped)

NPROT

INT: Number of protection zone

EXECUTE

VAR INT: error status

EXECUTE: Activate program execution. This switches back to normal program execution from reference point editing mode or after setting up a protection zone.

13. Preprocessing/single block STOPRE Stop processing: Stop preprocessing until all prepared blocks are executed in main run.

14. Interrupts Vocabulary word/function identifier ENABLE # DISABLE # Parameter 1 Description

INT: Number of interrupt input INT: Number of interrupt input

Activate interrupt: Activates the interrupt routine assigned to the hardware input with the specified number. An interrupt is enabled after the SETINT instruction. Deactivate interrupt: Deactivates the interrupt routine assigned to the hardware input with the specified number. Fast retraction is not executed. The assignment between the hardware input and the interrupt routine made with SETINT remains valid and can be reactivated with ENABLE.

12-394

12.98

Tables

12.4 List of predefined subprograms

840 D NCU 571

840 D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

14. Interrupts Vocabulary word/function identifier CLRINT # Parameter 1 Description

INT: Number of interrupt input

Select interrupt: Cancel the assignment of interrupt routines and attributes to an interrupt input. The interrupt routine is deactivated and no reaction occurs when the interrupt is generated.

# The vocabulary word is not valid for SINUMERIK FM-NC/810D.

15. Motion synchronization CANCEL INT: number of synchronized action Aborts the modal motion-synchronous action with the specified ID

16. Function definition Parameter 1 FCTDEF INT: Function number Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4-7 Description Define polynomial. This is evaluated in SYFCT or PUTFTOCF.

REAL: Lower limit REAL: Upper limit REAL: value value Coefficients a0 a3

#) The vocabulary word is not valid for SINUMERIK FM-NC.

17. Communication Vocabulary Parameter 1 word/subprogram identifier MMC # STRING: Command Parameter 2 Description

CHAR: ** Acknowledgment mode "N": without acknowledgment "S": synchronous acknowledgment "A": asynchronous acknowledgment

MMC command: Command ON MMC command interpreter for the configuration of windows via NC program see /AM/ IM1 Start-Up Functions for the MMC

#) The vocabulary word is not valid for SINUMERIK FM-NC/810D. **)Acknowledgment mode: Commands are acknowledged on request from the executing component (channel, NC, ...). Without acknowledgment: Program execution is continued when the command has been transmitted. The sender is not informed if the command cannot be executed successfully.

18. Program coordination Vocabulary word/subprogram identifier INIT # Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4 Paramet Paramet Description er 5 er 6-8

INT: Channel number INT: Channel number

STRING: Path INT: Channel number

CHAR: Acknowledgement mode**

Selection of a module for execution in a channel. Starts selected programs simultaneously on multiple channels from running program. The command has no effect on the existing channel.

START #

12-395

Tables

12.98

12.4 List of predefined subprograms

840 D NCU 571

840 D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

18. Program coordination Vocabulary word/subprogram identifier Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4 Paramet Paramet Description er 5 er 6-8

1 : 1st channel; 2 : 2nd channel. WAITE # INT: Channel number INT: Marker number 0 - 9 INT: Channel number INT: Channel number INT: Channel number INT: Channel number Wait for end of program: Wait for end of program on another channel Wait: Wait for a marker to be reached in other channels. The program waits until the WAITM with the relevant marker has been reached in the other channel. The number of the own channel can also be specified. Wait for positioning axis: Wait for AXIS: AXIS: positioning axis to reach their Axis Axis identifier identifier programmed end point end point. INT: Spindle number Wait for positioning spindle: Wait for programmed spindles previously programmed with SPOSA to reach their programmed end point. End of subprogram with no function output to the PLC. AXIS AXIS AXIS REAL: Offset value AXIS AXIS AXIS INT: Parameter number AXIS AXIS AXIS INT: Channel number INT: Parameter number AXIS AXIS AXIS INT: Spindle number INT: Channel number INT: Spindle number AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS Assign machine axis Assign machine axis directly Release machine axis Put fine tool correction: fine tool compensation Put fine tool correction function dependent: Change online tool compensation according to a function defined with FCTDEF (max. 3rd degree polynomial).

WAITM #

WAITP

AXIS: Axis identifier INT: Spindle number

WAITS

RET GET # GETD# RELEASE # PUTFTOC #

VAR REAL: PUTFTOCF # INT: No. of function Reference value *) The number used here must be specified in FCTDEF.

The SPI function can also be used to program a spindle instead of an axis: GET(SPI(1)) #)The vocabulary word is not valid for SINUMERIK FM-NC/NCU571. **) Acknowledgment mode: Commands are acknowledged on request from the executing component (channel, NC, ...). Without acknowledgment: Program execution is continued when the command has been transmitted. The executing component is not informed if the command cannot be executed successfully. Acknowledgment mode "N" or "n". Synchronous acknowledgment: Program execution is interrupted until the receiving component has acknowledged the command. The next command is executed with positive acknowledgment. An error is output with negative acknowledgment. Acknowledgment mode "S", "s" or omit. The acknowledgment behavior is defined for some commands and programmable for others. The acknowledgment behavior is always synchronous for program coordination commands. If the acknowledgment mode is omitted, synchronous acknowledgment is taken as the default.

12-396

12.98

Tables

12.4 List of predefined subprograms

840 D NCU 571

840 D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

19. Data access Parameter 1 CHANDATA INT: Channel number Description Set channel number for channel data access (only permitted in initialization block); the subsequent accesses refer to the channel set with CHANDATA.

20. Messages Parameter 1 MSG STRING: Message Parameter 2 Description Message modal: the message is active until the next message is queued

22. Alarms Parameter 1 SETAL INT: Alarm number (cycle alarms) Parameter 2 Description Set alarm set alarm

23. Compensation Vocabulary Parameter 1 word/subprog Parameter 4 ram identifier QECLRNON # AXIS: Axis number QECLRNOF #
#) The vocabulary word is not valid for SINUMERIK FM-NC.

Description

Quadrant error compensation learning ON Quadrant error compensation learning ON Quadrant error compensation learning OFF Quadrant error compensation learning OFF

24. Tool management Parameter 1 DELT # GETSELT # STRING [32]: Tool name VAR INT: T number (return value) Parameter 2 INT: Duplo number INT: Spindle number Parameter 3 Description Delete tool. Duplo number can be omitted. Get selected T number. If no spindle number is specified, the command for the master spindle applies. Set number of workpieces for all tools assigned to the spindle. If the spindle number is omitted, the command applies to the master spindle. INT: D no. Set D no. of tool (T) and its tool edge to new Set D numbers of all tools of the TO unit assigned to the channel to invalid INT: Tool no. T INT: Toolholder no. INT: Location no. for positioning INT: No. of the magazine to be moved INT: D no. Delete all additive offsets of the tool edge (or of a tool if D is not specified) Set toolholder no. INT: Location INT: Magazine Position magazine number of the number of the internal internal

SETPIECE #

INT: Workpiece count INT: Spindle number

SETDNO DZERO DELDL SETMTH POSM

INT: Tool no. T

INT: Tool edge no.

12-397

Tables

12.98

12.4 List of predefined subprograms

840 D NCU 571

840 D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

24. Tool management Parameter 1 SETTIA VAR INT: Status=result of operation (return value) VAR INT: Status=result of operation (return value) VAR INT: Status=result of operation (return value) Parameter 2 INT: Magazine no. Parameter 3 magazine INT: Wear group no. magazine Deactivate tool from wear group Description

SETTA

INT: Magazine no.

INT: Wear group no.

Activate tool from wear group

RESETMON

INT: Internal T no.

INT: D no. of tool

Set actual value of tool to setpoint

#) The vocabulary word is not valid for SINUMERIK FM-NC.

25. Synchronous spindle Parameter ParaParameter Parameter Parameter 5 1 meter 2 3 4 COUPDEF # AXIS: Following axis STRING[8]: Block change behavior: REAL: REAL: AXIS: Leading Denominat- Denominat- "NOC": no block change control, block change is enabled immediately, "FINE": or transor transaxis formation formation block change on "synchronism", "COARSE": block change on ratio ratio synchronism coarse and "IPOSTOP": block change in setpoint-dependent termination of overlaid movement. If the block change behavior is not specified, no change takes place in the defined behavior AXIS: Leading axis AXIS: Leading axis Parameter 6 Description STRING[2]: "DV": Setpoint linkage "AV": Actualvalue linkage Couple definition: Definition of synchronous spindle group

COUPDEL #

AXIS: Following axis AXIS: Following axis

Couple delete: Delete synchronous spindle group Couple reset: Reset synchronous spindle group. The programmed values are invalidated. The machine data values are valid.

COUPRES #

For synchronous spindles, the axis parameters are programmed with SPI(1) or S1. #) The vocabulary word is not valid for SINUMERIK FM-NC/810 D.

12-398

12.98

Tables

12.4 List of predefined subprograms

840 D NCU 571

840 D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Vocabulary Parameter 1 word/subprog ram identifier COUPON #

Parameter 2

Parameter 3

Parameter 4

Description

AXIS: AXIS: Leading REAL: Following axis axis Activation position of following axis

Couple on: Activate ELG group/synchronous spindle pair. If no activation positions are specified, the couple is activated as quickly as possible (ramp). If an activation position is specified for the following axis or spindle, this refers absolutely or incrementally to the leading axis/spindle.Only if the 3rd parameter is specified do parameters 4 and 5 have to be programmed. REAL: Deactivation position of following axis (absolute) Couple off: Deactivate ELG group/synchronous spindle pair. The couple parameters are retained. If positions are specified, the couple is only canceled when all the specified positions have been overtraveled. The following spindle continues to revolve at the last speed programmed before deactivation of the couple. Wait for couple condition: Wait until couple block change conditions have been met for the axes/spindles. Up to 2 axes/spindles can be programmed. Block change condition: "NOC": no block change control, block change is enabled immediately, "FINE": block change on "synchronism fine". "COARSE": block change on "synchronism coarse" and "IPOSTOP": block change in setpoint-dependent termination of overlaid movement. If the block change behavior is not specified, the set behavior is applicable and there is no change. Advance container axis

COUPOF #

AXIS: AXIS: Leading REAL: Following axis axis Deactivation position of following axis (absolute)

WAITC #

AXIS: Axis/spindle

STRING[8]: Block change criterion

AXIS: Axis/spindle

STRING[8]: Block change criterion

AXCTSWE

AXIS: Axis/spindle

#) The vocabulary word is not valid for SINUMERIK FM-NC/810D.

12-399

Tables

12.98

12.4 List of predefined subprograms

840 D NCU 571

840 D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

12.4.2 Predefined subprogram calls in motion-synchronous actions

The following predefined subprograms appear exclusively in motion-synchronous actions.

27. Synchronous procedures Vocabulary word/ Parameter 1 function identifier STOPREOF Parameter 2 Parameter 3 to 5 Description Stop preparation OFF: A synchronized action with a STOPREOF command causes a preprocessing stop after the next output block (= block for the main run). The preprocessing stop is canceled with the end of the output block or when the STOPREOF condition is fulfilled. All synchronized action instructions with the STOPREOF command are therefore interpreted as having been executed. Read-in disable read-in disable AXIS: Axis for axial delete distance-to-go (optional). If the axis is omitted, delete distanceto-go is triggered for the path distance INT: Number of polynominal function defined with FCTDEF. INT: Number of polynomial function defined with FCTDEF. VAR REAL: VAR REAL: Result variable *) Input variable **) Delete distance-to-go A synchronized action with the DELDTG command causes a preprocessing stop after the next output block (= block for the main run). The preprocessing stop is canceled with the end of the output block or when the first DELDTG condition is fulfilled. The axial distance to the destination point on an axial delete distance-to-go is stored in $AA_DELT[<axis>]; the distance-to-go is stored in $AC_DELT. If the condition in the motion synchronous action is fulfilled, the polynomial determined by the first expression is evaluated at the input variable. The upper and lower range of the value is limited and the input variable is assigned. Modify tool fine compensation according to a function defined with FCTDEF (polynomial no higher than 3rd degree). The number used here must be specified in FCTDEF.

RDISABLE DELDTG

SYNFCT

FTOC

VAR REAL: Input variable **)

INT: Length 1, 2, 3 INT: Channel number INT: spindle number

*) Only special system variables can be used for the result variable. These are described in the Programming Guide Advanced in the section on "Write main run variable". **)Only special system variables can be used for the result variable. These variables are described in the Programming Guide Advanced in the list of system variables.

12-400

12.98

Tables

12.4 List of predefined subprograms

840 D NCU 571

840 D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

12.4.3 Predefined functions

Predefined functions are invoked by means of a function call. Function calls return a value. They can be included as an operand in an expression.

1. Coordinate system Vocabulary word/ Result function identifier CTRANS FRAME Parameter 1 AXIS Parameter 2 REAL: Offset Parameter 3 15 same as 1 ... Parameter 4 - 16 same as 2 ... Description Translation: Zero offset for multiple axis. One axis identifier is programmed at a time, with its respective value in the next parameter. CTRANS can be used to program offset for up to 8 axes. Rotation: Rotation of the current coordinate system. Maximum number of parameters: 6 (one axis identifier and one value per geometry axis). Scale: Scale factor for multiple axes. The maximum number of parameters is 2 * maximum number of axes (axis identifier and value respectively). One axis identifier is programmed at a time, with its respective value in the next parameter. CSCALE can be used to program scale factors for up to 8 axes. Mirror: Mirror on a coordinate axis Frame calculation from 3 measuring points in space

CROT

FRAME

AXIS

REAL: Rotation

Parameter 3/5 same as 1 ...

Parameter 4/6 same as 2 ...

CSCALE

FRAME

AXIS

REAL: Scale factor

Parameter 3 15 same as 1 ...

Parameter 4 - 16 same as 2 ...

CMIRROR MEAFRAME

FRAME FRAME

AXIS 2-dim. REAL array 2-dim. REAL array

Parameter 2 - 8 same as 1 ... Parameter 3: REAL variable

Frame functions CTRANS, CSCALE, CROT and CMIRROR are used to generate frame expressions.

2. Geometry functions Vocabulary word/ Result function identifier CALCDAT BOOL: Error status Parameter 1 VAR REAL [,2]: Table with input points (abscissa and ordinate for points 1, 2, 3 etc.) VAR REAL [11]: First contour element Parameter 2 INT: Number of input points for calculation (3 or 4) Parameter 3 VAR REAL [3]: Result: Abscissa, ordinate and radius of calculated circle center point VAR REAL [2]: Result vector: intersection coordinate, abscissa and ordinate Description CALCDAT: calculate circle data Calculates radius and center point of a circle from 3 or 4 points (according to parameter 1) which must lie on a circle. The points must be different. Intersection: Calculation of intersection The intersection between two contour elements is calculated. The intersection coordinates are return values. The error status indicates whether an intersection was found.

INTERSEC

BOOL: Error status

VAR REAL [11]: Second contour element

12-401

Tables

12.98

12.4 List of predefined subprograms

840 D NCU 571

840 D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

3. Axis functions Result AXNAME AXIS: Axis identifier Parameter 1 STRING [ ]: Input string Parameter 2 Description AXNAME: Get axis identifier Converts the input string to an axis identifier. An alarm is generated if the input string does not contain a valid axis identifier. SPI: Convert spindle to axis Converts a spindle number to an axis identifier. An alarm is generated if the passed parameter does not contain a valid spindle number. Check whether the geometry axis 1 to 3 specified as parameter exists in accordance with $MC_AXCONF_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB.

SPI

AXIS: Axis identifier

INT: Axis number

ISAXIS

BOOL TRUE: Axis exists: Otherwise: FALSE STRING

INT: Number of the geometry axis (1 to 3) AXIS

AXSTRING

Convert axis identifier into string.

4. Tool management Result NEWT # GETT # GETACTT # INT: T number INT: T number INT: Status Parameter 1 STRING [32]: Tool identifier STRING [32]: Tool identifier INT: T number Parameter 2 INT: Duplo number INT: Duplo number Description Create new tool (prepare tool data). The duplo number can be omitted. Get T number for tool identifier

STRING [32]: tool Get active tool from a group of tools with the same name name

#) The vocabulary word is not valid for SINUMERIK FM-NC.

5. Arithmetic Result SIN ASIN COS ACOS TAN ATAN2 SQRT POT TRUNC ROUND ABS LN EXP REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL Parameter 1 REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL Parameter 2 Description Sine Arcsine Cosine Arccosine Tangent Arctangent 2 Square root Square Truncate decimal places Round decimal places Generate absolute value Natural logarithm Exponential function e
x

12-402

12.98

Tables

12.4 List of predefined subprograms

840 D NCU 571

840 D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

6. String functions Result ISNUMBER BOOL Parameter 1 STRING Parameter 2 to 3 Description Check whether the input string can be converted to a number. Result is TRUE if conversion is possible. Convert the input string into a number. Convert all alphabetic characters in the input string to upper case. Convert all alphabetic characters in the input string to lower case. Result is the length of the input string up to the end of the string (0). CHAR Find the character (2nd parameter) in the input string (1st parameter). The reply gives the place at which the character was first found. The search is from left to right. The 1st character in the string has the index 0. Find the character (2nd parameter) in the input string (1st parameter). The reply gives the place at which the character was first found. The search is from right to left. The 1st character in the string has the index 0. Find one of the characters specified in the 2nd parameter in the input string (1st parameter). The place where one of the characters was first found is output. The search is from left to right. The first character in the string has the index 0. Returns the substring of the input string (1st parameter) defined by the start character (2nd parameter) and number of characters (3rd parameter). Example: SUBSTR("Hello world",1,5) returns "ello"

NUMBER TOUPER TOLOWER STRLEN INDEX

REAL STRING STRING INT INT

STRING STRING STRING STRING STRING

RINDEX

INT

STRING

CHAR

MINDEX

INT

STRING

SUBSTR

STRING

INT

12-403

Tables

12.98

12.4 List of predefined subprograms

840 D NCU 571

840 D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

12.4.4 Data types

Data types Type INT REAL BOOL CHAR STRING AXIS FRAME Comment Integers with sign Value range (2
31

1) ... 10
+300

Real numbers (fractions with decimal point, LONG REAL (10 to IEEE) Boolean value TRUE, FALSE or 1, 0 1 character in ASCII code Character string, number of characters in [...] (max. of 200 characters) Axis identifiers only (axis addresses) Geometrical parameters for translation, rotation, scale, mirror 1, 0

300

0 ... 255 Sequence of values with 0 ... 255 All axis identifiers available on the channel

12-404

12.98

Appendix

Appendix
A Abbreviations ...................................................................................................................... A-407 B Terms.................................................................................................................................. A-415 C References ......................................................................................................................... A-441 D Index ................................................................................................................................... A-453 E Commands, identifiers ........................................................................................................A-461

A-405

Appendix

12.98

A-406

12.98

Appendix

Abbreviations

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Abbreviations
AS ASCII ASUP BA BAG BCD BCS BIN BP C1... C4 CAD CAM CNC COM COR CP CPU CR CRC CSF Automation System American Standard Code for Information Interchange Asynchronous Subprogram Operating Mode Mode Group Binary Coded Decimals Basic Coordinate System Binary Files Basic Program Channel 1 to Channel 4 Computer-Aided Design Computer-Aided Manufacturing Computerized Numerical Control Communication Coordinate Rotation Communication Processor Central Processing Unit Carriage Return Cutter Radius Compensation Control System Flowchart (PLC programming method)

A-407

Appendix

12.98

Abbreviations

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

CTS CUTOM DB DBB DBW DBX DC

Clear To Send (serial data interfaces) Cutter radius compensation Data Block in the PLC Data Block Byte in the PLC Data Block Word in the PLC Data Block bit in the PLC Direct Control: The rotary axis is moved along the shortest path to the absolute position within one revolution. Data Communications Equipment Dynamic Data Exchange Data Input/Output: Data transfer display Directory Dynamic Link Library: Module which can be accessed by the program when running. Often containing program sections required by different programs. Disk Operating System Dual Port Memory Dual-Port RAM Dynamic Random Access Memory Differential Resolver Function Dry Run Decoding Single Block Data Terminal Equipment

DCE DDE DIO DIR DLL

DOS DPM DPR DRAM DRF DRY DSB DTE

A-408

12.98

Appendix

Abbreviations

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

DW EIA code

Data Word Special Tape Format: Number of perforations per character is always odd Encoder Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory Function Block Function Block Diagram (programming method for PLC) Function Call: function block in the PLC Product Database Floppy Disk Drive Feed Drive Flash-EPROM First In First Out: Memory which operates without address specification from which data are read in the same order as they are stored. Function Module Function Module-Numeric Control Floating Point Unit Frame Block Data block (frame) Feed Stop Grinding Wheel Radius Compensation Global User Data Hard Disk Abbreviation for hexadecimal

ENC EPROM FB FBO FC FDB FDD

FEPROM FIFO

FM FM-NC FPU FRA FRAME FST GRC GUD HD HEX

A-409

Appendix

12.98

Abbreviations

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

HHU HW I I/O I/R

Handheld Unit Hardware Input Input/Output Infeed/Regenerative feedback unit (power supply) of the SIMODRIVE 611(D) Implicit Communication (Global Data) Interpolative Compensation Interface Module Interface Module Receive Interface Module Send Incremental Dimension Initializing Data Interpolator Interface Signal International Standard Organization Special tape code, number of perforations per character is always even Jog mode Communication bus Transmission ratio Servo gain factor Ladder Diagram (programming method for PLC)

IK (GD) IKA IM IMR IMS INC INI IPO IS ISO ISO code

JOG K bus K KV LAD

A-410

12.98

Appendix

Abbreviations

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

LEC LF LUD MB MC MCP MCS MD MDA MMC

Leadscrew Error Compensation Line Feed Local User Data Megabyte Measuring Circuit Machine Control Panel Machine Coordinate System Machine Data Manual Data Automatic Man Machine Communication: Operator interface for operating, programming and simulating Main Program File: NC part program Multi-point Interface Main Spindle Drive Numerical Control Numerical Control Kernel (with block preparation, traversing range etc.) Numerical Control Unit: hardware unit of the NCK Non Uniform Rational B-Spline Organization block in the PLC Original Equipment Manufacturer Operator Interface Operator Panel

MPF MPI MSD NC NCK

NCU NURBS OB OEM OI OP

A-411

Appendix

12.98

Abbreviations

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

OPI P bus PC PCIN PCMCIA PG PLC Q RAM REF REPOS ROV RPA

Operator Panel Interface I/O bus Personal Computer Name of the software for data communication with the control Personal Computer Memory Card International Association Programming Device Programmable Logic Controller Output Random Access Memory (read-write memory) Reference Point Approach Function Reposition Function Rapid Override R Parameter Active: Memory area in NCK for R-NCK for R parameter numbers Roll Pitch Yaw: Type of coordinate system rotation Request To Send (serial data interfaces) Single Block Setting Data System Data Block Setting Data Active: Identification (file type) for setting data System Function Block System Function Call

RPY RTS SBL SD SDB SEA SFB SFC

A-412

12.98

Appendix

Abbreviations

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

SK SKP SM SPF SR SRAM SSI STL SW SYF T TC TEA TLC TNRC TO TOA TRC TRANSMIT UFR UI V24

Softkey Skip Block Stepper Motor Subprogram File Subroutine Static RAM (battery-backed) Serial Synchronous Interface Statement List Software System File Tool Tool Change Testing Data Active Tool Length Compensation Tool Nose Radius Compensation Tool Offset Tool Offset Active: Identification (file type) of tool offsets Tool Radius Compensation Transform Milling into Turning User Frame: Zero offset User Interface Serial interface (definition of interchange lines between DTE and DCE)

A-413

Appendix

12.98

Abbreviations

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

WCS WDP WOP ZO ZOA

Workpiece Coordinate System Workpiece Directory Workshop Oriented Programming Zero Offset Zero Offset Active: Identification (file type) of zero offset data

A-414

12.98

Appendix

Terms

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Terms
Important terms are listed below in alphabetical order, accompanied by explanations. Cross-references to other entries in this glossary are indicated by the symbol ->.

A
A spline The A spline progresses tangentially through the programmed nodes (3rd degree polynomial). A destination for an axis movement is defined by a dimension that refers to the origin of the currently active coordinate system. See also -> incremental dimension. To obtain the optimum acceleration gradient for the machine while at the same time minimizing mechanical wear and tear, the machining program offers a choice between instantaneous acceleration and continuous (smooth) acceleration. The CNC program blocks and data are protected by a 7-level system of access restrictions: Three password levels for system manufacturer, machine-tool manufacturer and user, and Four keyswitch positions that can be evaluated by the PLC. AC control (Adaptive Control) It is possible to reapproach a process variable (e.g. a contour position or point of interruption) depending on another measured process variable (e.g. spindle current). An adress is a fixed or user-programmable identifier for axes (X, Y, ...), spindle speed (S), feed (F), circle radius (CR), etc.

Absolute dimension

Acceleration with jerk limitation

Access right

Address

A-415

Appendix

12.98

Terms

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Alarms

All -> messages and alarms are displayed on the control panel in plain-text form and accompanied by date and time and the symbol for the appropriate deletion criterion. Alarms and messages are displayed separately. 1. Alarms and messages in the part program Alarms and messages can be displayed in plain text directly from within the part program. 2. Alarms and messages from PLC Alarms and messages from the machine can be displayed in plain text from within the PLC program. No additional function-block packages are necessary. Analog input/output modules are signal transducers for analog process signals. Analog input modules convert analog measured values into digital values that can be processed in the CPU. Analog output modules convert digital values into manipulated variables. Approach to a predefined -> machine fixed point.

Analog input/output module

Approach machine fixedpoint Archiving Asynchronous subprogram

Exporting files and/or directories to an external storage device. (Up to software package 3): A subprogram which can be started asynchronously (independently) by an interrupt signal (e.g. "rapid NC input" signal) during an active NC program. (Software package 4 and higher): A subprogram which can be started asynchronously (independently) to the current program status by an interrupt signal (e.g. "rapid NC input" signal).

Automatic

Control operating mode (block-sequential operation to DIN): Operating mode of NC systems in which a -> part program is selected and then processed without interruption. Auxiliary functions can be used to pass -> parameters to the -> PLC in the -> part program, triggering reactions there which are defined by the machine manufacturer.

Auxiliary functions

A-416

12.98

Appendix

Terms

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Axes

The CNC axes are categorized by their functional scope as follows: Axes: interpolative path axes Auxiliary axes: non-interpolative infeed and positioning axes with axis-specific feedrates. Auxiliary axes do not participate in workpiece machining as such and include tool feeders, tool magazines, etc.

Axis address Axis identifier

See -> axis identifier In compliance with DIN 66217, axes are identified as X, Y, Z for a right-handed rectangular Cartesian -> coordinate system rotating in the clockwise direction. -> Rotary axes rotating around X, Y, Z are assigned the identifiers A, B, C. Additional axes, which are parallel to those specified, can be identified with other letters. See -> axis identifier An axis/spindle is permanently assigned to a specific channel via machine data. With program commands, it is possible to release an axis/spindle and assign it to another channel.

Axis name Axis/spindle replacement

B
B spline The programmed B-spline positions are not intermediate points but simply "checkpoints". Instead of passing directly through these checkpoints, the curve merely passes in their vicinity (1st, 2nd or 3rd degree polynomials). Compensation for a mechanical slack in the machine, e.g. backlash due to reversal of leadscrews. Backlash compensation can be defined separately for each axis. A copy of the memory contents stored on an external device for data backup and/or archiving. The backup battery ensures that the -> user program in the -> CPU is protected against mains power failure and that the contents of defined data areas and bit memories, timers and counters are retentive.

Backlash compensation

Backup

Backup battery

A-417

Appendix

12.98

Terms

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Base axis

Axis whose setpoint or actual value is employed in calculating a compensatory value. Cartesian system of coordinates, mapped onto the machine coordinate system by transformation. In the -> part program the programmer uses the axis names of the basic coordinate system. The basic coordinate system exists in parallel to the -> machine coordinate system when no -> transformation is active. The difference between the systems relates only to the axis identifiers. Measure of speed in data transfer (bit/s). The unmachined workpiece. All files required for programming and program execution are known as blocks. A section of a -> part program terminated with a line feed. A distinction is made between -> main blocks and -> subblocks. For testing part programs and after an interruption in machining, the block search function can be used to select a point in the part program at which machining is to be started or resumed. Loading of the system program after Power On. A bus connector is an S7-300 accessory supplied along with the -> I/O modules. The bus connector extends the -> S7-300 bus from the ->CPU or an I/O module to the next I/O module.

Basic coordinate system

Baud rate Blank Block

Block

Block search

Booting Bus connector

C
C axis Axis about which the tool spindle describes a controlled rotational and positioning movement. A position offset can be controlled axis-specifically, depending on a measured process variable (e.g. analog input, spindle current, etc.). The function allows a constant clearance required by the machining technology to be maintained automatically.

Clearance control (3D), sensor-guided

A-418

12.98

Appendix

Terms

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

C spline

The C spline is the best known and most widely used spline. The transitions at the intermediate points are tangential and of continuous curvature. 3rd degree polynomials are used. The chassis ground is the totality of all interconnected inactive parts of a device that cannot carry a dangerous contact voltage even in the event of a malfunction. The -> tool is required to travel in a circle between defined points on the contour with a specified feed, while machining the workpiece. -> NC The CNC programming language is based on DIN 66025 with highlevel language expansions. The CNC programming language and -> high-level language expansions support the definition of macros (sequenced statements). Numerical control component for the implementation and coordination of communication. Command axes are started from synchronous actions as a result of an event (command). They can be positioned, started and stopped completely asynchronous to the part program. Axis having a setpoint or input value modified by a compensation value. Table of intermediate (interpolation) points. This table supplies the compensation values of the compensation axes for selected positions of the base axis. Difference between the axis position measured by the position sensor and the desired, programmed axis position. Connecting cables are prefabricated or user-fabricated 2-wire cables with a connector at each end. These cables are used to connect the -> CPU via the -> multipoint interface (MPI) to a -> programming device or to other CPUs. The purpose of continuous-path control mode is to prevent excessive deceleration of the -> path axes at the part program block disjunctions that could endanger the control, machine or other assets of the plant and operator and to effect the transition to the next block at as uniform a path speed as possible.

Chassis ground

Circular interpolation

CNC CNC programming language

COM

Command axis

Compensation axis

Compensation table

Compensation value

Connecting cable

Continuous-path control mode

A-419

Appendix

12.98

Terms

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Contour Contour monitoring

Outline of a -> workpiece. The following error is monitored within a definable tolerance bandwidth as a measure of contour precision. The following error may violate permissible limits for example on account of drive overload. If this happens an alarm is issued and the axes are stopped. See -> Machine coordinate system, -> Workpiece coordinate system. Central processing unit of a -> programmable logic controller Protected subprogram for execution of a recurring machining process on the -> workpiece. In the "Program" operating area, the "Cycles support" menu leads to a list of the available cycles. Once a cycle is selected the parameters required for value assignment are displayed in plain-text form.

Coordinate system CPU Cycle

Cycles support

D
Data block 1. Data unit of the -> PLC, accessible by the -> HIGHSTEP programs. 2. Data unit of the -> NC: Data blocks contain data definitions for global user data. The data can be initialized directly on definition. PCIN is a routine for sending and receiving CNC user data via the serial interface. Typical data includes part programs, tool compensation data, etc. The PCIN program is executable under MS-DOS on industry-standard PCs. A data unit, two bytes in size, within a -> PLC data block. A command in the NC program which stops machining and clears the remaining distance to be traversed. 1. Control operating area 2. The control incorporates a self-diagnosis program and test routines for service: status, alarm and service displays. Digital modules are signal transducers for binary process signals.

Data transfer program PCIN

Data word Delete distance-to-go

Diagnosis

Digital input/output module

A-420

12.98

Appendix

Terms

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Dimensions in metric and inch systems

In the machining program position and lead/pitch values can be entered in inches. The control is set to a base system irrespective of the programmable unit of measure (G70/G71). Differential resolver function: an NC function which generates an incremental zero offset in AUTOMATIC mode in conjunction with an electronic handwheel. When the CNC axes are in the constant motion phase, automatic drift compensation is implemented in the analog speed control. (SINUMERIK FM-NC). SINUMERIK FM-NC has an analog +10V interface to the SIMODRIVE 611A converter system. The SINUMERIK 840D control system is connected to the SIMODRIVE 611D converter system by a high-speed digital parallel bus.

DRF

Drift compensation

Drive

E
Editor The editor allows programs/text/program blocks to be created, modified, appended, moved in blocks and inserted. Electronic handwheels are used to traverse the selected axes simultaneously under manual control. The handwheel clicks are analyzed by the increment analyzer. When an exact stop is programmed, a position specified in the block is approached accurately and, where appropriate, very slowly. In order to reduce the approach time, -> exact stop limits are defined for rapid traverse and feed. When all path axes reach their exact stop limits, the control responds as if it had reached its destination point precisely. The -> part program carries on execution with the next block. Zero offset specified by the -> PLC.

Electronic handwheel

Exact stop

Exact stop limit

External zero offset

A-421

Appendix

12.98

Terms

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

F
Feedrate override The current feedrate setting entered via the control panel or by the PLC is overlaid on the programmed feedrate (0-200 %). The feedrate can also be corrected by a programmable percentage factor (1-200 %) in the machining program. Feedrate correction is also possible, asynchronously to the program in execution, via movement synchronous actions. Contour of the finished workpiece. See also -> blank. Machine tools can execute defined approaches to fixed points so as tool-change points, load points, pallet-change points, etc. The coordinates of these points are stored in the control. The control traverses the axes in question in -> rapid traverse, if possible. A frame is a calculation rule that translates one Cartesian coordinate system into another Cartesian coordinate system. A frame contains the components -> zero offset, -> rotation, -> scale, ->mirror.

Finished-part contour Fixed-point approach

Frame

G
Geometry Geometry axis Description of a -> workpiece in the -> workpiece coordinate system. Geometry axes are used to describe a 2 or 3 dimensional area in the workpiece coordinate system. Each global main program/subprogram can only be stored once under its name in a directory; it is not possible, however, to use the same name in different directories.

Global main program/subprogram

H
Helix interpolation Helix interpolation is particularly suitable as an easy means of cutting internal and external threads with form milling cutters and for milling lubrication grooves. The helix comprises two movements: 1. Rotary movement in a plane 2. Linear movement vertical to that plane.

A-422

12.98

Appendix

Terms

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

High-level language CNC

The high-level language supports: -> user variables, -> predefined user variables, -> system variables, -> indirect programming, -> computation and angle functions, -> comparisons and logical gating, -> program jumps and program branches, -> program coordination (SINUMERIK 840D), -> macro programming. The digital inputs can be used, for example, to start high-speed CNC program routines (interrupt routines). The digital CNC outputs can be used to trigger high-speed, program-driven switching functions (SINUMERIK 840D). Combination of the programming features for the -> PLC in the S7-300/S7-400 range.

High-speed digital inputs/outputs

HIGHSTEP

I
I/O module I/O modules establish the link between the CPU and the process. I/O modules are: ->Digital input/output modules ->Analog input/output modules ->Simulator modules Identifier In accordance with DIN 66025, identifiers (names) for variables (calculation variables, system variables, user variables), for subprograms, for vocabulary words and words can contain several address letters. These letters have the same meaning as the words in the block syntax. Identifiers must be unique. The same identifier may not be used for different objects. System of units in which distances are measured in inches and fractions of inches. Fixed angular interpolation with allowance for an inclined infeed axis or grinding wheel through the input of the angle. The axes are programmed and displayed in the Cartesian coordinate system. A destination for axis traverse is defined by a distance to be covered and a direction referenced to a point already reached. See also -> absolute dimension. Length of the traverse path given by the number of increments. The number of increments can be stored as -> setting data or selected using the corresponding keys 10, 100, 1000, 10 000.

Inch system of units

Inclined axis

Incremental dimension

A-423

Appendix

12.98

Terms

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Initialization block

Initialization blocks are special -> program blocks. They contain value assignments that must be implemented before program execution commences. Initialization blocks are used primarily to initialize predefined data or global user data. An initialization file can be created for each workpiece. In it, the various variable value instructions which apply exclusively to one workpiece can be stored. Movements with tool offset selected (G41/G42) can be interrupted by a limited number of intermediate blocks (blocks without axis movement in offset level) while tool offset can still be computed correctly. The permissible number of intermediate blocks is read in advance by the control and can be defined in the system parameters. The interpolation cycle is a multiple of the basic system cycle. It specifies the cycle time for updating the setpoint interface to the position controllers. The interpolation cycle determines the resolution of the velocity profiles. Interpolative compensation provides a means of compensating for leadscrew errors (LEC) and measuring-system errors resulting from the production process. Logical unit of the -> NCK which determines intermediate values of the movements to be traversed by the individual axes on the basis of destination positions specified in the part program. Interrupt routines are special -> subprograms that the machine process can start by means of events (external signals). A part program block currently being executed is interrupted and the interrupt positions of the axes are automatically stored in memory. See -> asynchronous subprogram. As an alternative to the feedrate for an axis movement, SINUMERIK FM-NC and 840D accept programming of the time required for the path of a block (G93).

Initialization file

Intermediate block

Interpolation cycle

Interpolative compensation

Interpolator

Interrupt routine

Inverse time feedrate

A-424

12.98

Appendix

Terms

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

J
Jog Control mode (setup): The machine can be set up in Jog mode. Individual axes and spindles can be jogged by means of direction keys. Other functions in the Jog mode are -> reference point approach, -> repos and -> preset (set actual value).

K
Keyswitch 1. S7-300: The keyswitch is the operating mode selector switch of the -> CPU. The keyswitch is locked and its setting cannot be changed once the key has been removed. 2. 840D/FM-NC: The keyswitch on the -> machine control panel has 4 positions, each of which is assigned certain functions by the operating system of the control. The keyswitch is accompanied by three keys of different colors; a key can be removed when in the designated position. Transmission ratio Servo gain factor, control variable of a control loop

K Kv

L
Languages The user interface and system messages and alarms are available in five system languages (on disk): English, French, German, Italian and Spanish. Any two of the above languages are installed and selectable in the control. Compensation for the mechanical inaccuracies of a leadscrew participating in the feed. The control uses stored deviation values for the compensation. Max./min. (spindle) speed: The maximum speed of a spindle can be limited by values defined in the machine data, the -> PLC or -> setting data. The linear axis is an axis which, in contrast to a rotary axis, describes a straight line.

Leadscrew error compensation

Limit speed

Linear axis

A-425

Appendix

12.98

Terms

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Linear interpolation

The tool is required to travel to the destination point along a straight line while machining the workpiece. The Look Ahead function is a means of optimizing the machining speed by looking ahead over a parameterizable number of traversing blocks. The control detects and reports the following possible collisions: 1. Path is shorter than tool radius. 2. Width of inside corner is less than the tool diameter.

Look Ahead

Look Ahead detection of contour violations

M
Machine Machine axes Machine control panel Operating area of the control Axes which exist physically on the machine tool. An operator panel on a -> machine tool with operating elements such as keys, rotary switches, etc. and simple indicators such as LEDs. It is used for direct control of the machine tool via the PLC. System of coordinates based on the axes of the machine tool.

Machine coordinate system Machine fixed point

A point uniquely defined by the machine tool, for example the reference point. A fixed point on the machine tool which can be referenced by all (derived) measuring systems. A channel structure provides a means of reducing non-productive times by paralleling operations. For example, a loader can execute its movements during a machining operation. In this respect a CNC channel ranks as an autonomous CNC complete with decoding, block editing and interpolation. Multiple programming language instructions can be combined in a single statement. This abbreviated sequence of instructions is called up in the CNC program under a user-definable name. The macro executes the instructions sequentially.

Machine zero

Machining channel

Macro technology

A-426

12.98

Appendix

Terms

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Main block

A block prefixed by ":" containing all the parameters required to start execution of a -> part program. A -> part program identified by a number or a name in which further main programs, subprograms or -> cycles can be called. NC program blocks which have been decoded and prepared by the preprocessor are executed during the "main run". Control operating mode: Manual Data Automatic. In the MDA mode individual program blocks or block sequences can be entered without reference to a main program or routine and execution immediately initiated by pressing the NC start key. SINUMERIK FM-NC: The requisite measuring loops for axes and spindles are integrated in the control module as standard. An aggregate maximum of 4 axes and spindles can be implemented, with no more than 2 spindles. SINUMERIK 840D: The signals from the sensors are analyzed in the SIMODRIVE 611D drive modules. The maximum aggregate configuration is 8 axes and spindles, with no more than 5 spindles.

Main program

Main run

MDA

Measuring loops

Messages

All messages programmed in the part program and -> alarms detected by the system are displayed on the control panel in plain-text form. Alarms and messages are displayed separately. Standardized system of units: the units of measure for length, for example, are mm (millimeter) and m (meter). Mirroring exchanges the leading signs of the coordinate values of a contour in relation to an axis. Mirroring can be performed simultaneously in relation to several axes. An operating concept on a SINUMERIK control. The modes -> Jog, -> MDA and -> Automatic are defined. All axes/spindles are assigned to one and only one channel at any one time. Each channel is assigned to a mode group. The same -> mode is always assigned to the channels of a mode group.

Metric system Mirroring

Mode

Mode group

A-427

Appendix

12.98

Terms

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Motion-synchronous action

This function allows the initiation of synchronized actions. The starting point of the actions is defined by a condition (e.g. the state of a PLC input or the time elapsed since the start of the block). The start of motion-synchronous actions is not tied to block boundaries. Typical motion-synchronous actions are M and H auxiliary function transfer to PLC or axis-specific delete distance-to-go. The multipoint interface (MPI) is a 9-pin Sub-D port. A parameterizable number of devices can be connected to a multipoint interface for the purpose of communicating with each other: Programming devices (PGs) MMI systems Other automation systems The "Multipoint Interface MPI" parameter block of the CPU contains the -> parameters which define the properties of the MPI.

Multipoint interface

N
NC Numerical control, NC control incorporates all the components of the machine tool control system: -> NCK, -> PLC, -> MMC, -> COM. Note: CNC (computerized numerical control) is a more accurate term for the SINUMERIK 840D and FM-NC controls. Numerical control kernel: Component of the NC control which executes -> part programs and essentially coordinates the movements for the machine tool. A network is the complex of several S7-300 PLCs and other terminal devices such as a programming unit, for example, interlinked by means of -> connecting cables. The networked devices interchange data via the network. The node number is the address of a -> CPU or the -> programming device or some other intelligent I/O module for communication via a -> network. The node number is assigned to the CPU or the programming device by the S7 tool -> "S7 configuration". Numeric Robotic Kernel (operating system of the -> NCK)

NCK

Network

Node number

NRK

A-428

12.98

Appendix

Terms

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

NURBS

Within the NC, motion control and path interpolation is based on NURBS (Non Uniform Rational B-Splines). This is available as a uniform procedure for all interpolation activities of the control (SINUMERIK 840D).

O
Oblique-plane machining The "oblique-plane machining" function provides a convenient means of drilling and milling workpiece surfaces which are oblique to the coordinate planes of the machine. The position of the oblique plane can be defined by inclining the coordinate system (see FRAME programming). The manufacturers of machine tools who prefer to generate their own user interfaces or incorporate their custom, technology-related functions in the control have plenty of scope (OEM applications) using the SINUMERIK 840D. Data area in the control used to store the tool offset data. This function can only be used for grinding tools. The reduction in size resulting from the dressing of the grinding wheel is passed to the current tool as a tool offset and is effective immediately. The operator interface (OPI) is the human-machine interface of a CNC. It takes the form of a display unit with a horizontal and a vertical softkey bar, each comprising eight softkeys. Stops the workpiece spindle with a specified orientation angle, e.g. to perform an additional machining operation at a specific position. RETTOOL: If machining is interrupted (e.g. by tool breakage) a program command can be issued that causes the tool to be retracted a defined distance and with a specific orientation angle. Manual or programmable control feature which enables the operator to overlay programmed feedrates or speeds to adapt them to a specific workpiece or material.

OEM

Offset memory Online tool offset

Operator interface

Oriented spindle stop

Oriented tool retraction

Override

A-429

Appendix

12.98

Terms

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

P
Packaging system The SINUMERIK FM-NC is mounted in the CPU line of the SIMATIC S7-300. The module is 200 mm in width and fully encapsulated; its physical design corresponds to that of the SIMATIC S7-300 modules. The SINUMERIK 840D is a compact module in the SIMODRIVE 611D converter system. The dimensions correspond to the 50 mm wide SIMODRIVE 611D modules. The SINUMERIK 840D module consists of the NCU module and the NCU box. The SINUMERIK 810D has SIMODRIVE 611D design with a width of 150 mm. Integrated: SIMATIC S7-CPU, 5 digital drive controls and 3 SIMODRIVE 611D power modules. Parameters 1. S7-300: A distinction is drawn between two types of parameter: Parameter of a STEP 7 statement A parameter of a STEP 7 statement is the address of the operand to be processed or a constant Parameter of a -> parameter block A parameter of a parameter block determines the behavior of a module 2. 840D/810D/FM-NC: Operating area of the control Computation parameter, can be set any number of times or queried by the programmer for any purpose in the part program. A sequence of instructions to the NC control which combine to produce a specific -> workpiece by performing machining operations on a -> blank. Part program management can be organized by -> workpieces. The size of the user memory and also MD determine the number of programs and data to be managed. Each file (programs and data) can be assigned a name consisting of up to 16 alphanumeric characters. Path axes are all the machining axes of the -> channel which are controlled by the -> interpolator so that they start, stop, accelerate and reach their end points simultaneously. Path feed acts on -> path axes. It is the geometric sum of feeds of the participating -> geometry axes.

Part program

Part program management

Path axis

Path feed

A-430

12.98

Appendix

Terms

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Path speed

The maximum programmable path speed depends on the input precision. If the resolution is 0.1 mm, for example, the maximum programmable path speed is 1000 m/min. Programming device Programmable logic controller: A component of the -> NC control: A control for processing the control logic on a machine tool. -> Programmable Logic Controller SINUMERIK FM-NC: The PLC user memory of the CPU 314 is used to store the PLC application program and the user data together with the PLC basic program. The S7-CPU314 has a user memory of 24 Kbytes for this purpose. SINUMERIK 840D: The PLC user memory is used to store the PLC application program and the user data together with the PLC basic program. The PLC user memory can be expanded to 128 Kbytes by inserting expansion modules. SINUMERIK 810D: The PLC user program and user data are resident in the PLC user memory of the CPU 314 together with the PLC basic program. The basic version the S7 CPU314 has a 64 KB memory which can be expanded to 128 KB.

PG PLC

PLC PLC program memory

PLC programming

The PLC is programmed with the STEP 7 software. The STEP 7 programming software is based on the standard WINDOWS operating system and incorporates the functionality of STEP 5 programming with innovative expansions and developments.

Polar coordinates

A coordinate system which defines the position of a point on a plane in terms of its distance from the origin and the angle formed by the radius vector with a defined axis. Polynomial interpolation provides a means of generating a very wide range of curves, including straight-line, parabolic, exponential functions (SINUMERIK 840D/810D). An axis which performs an auxiliary movement on a machine tool (e.g. tool magazine, pallet transport). Positioning axes are axes that do not interpolate with the -> path axes.

Polynomial interpolation

Positioning axis

A-431

Appendix

12.98

Terms

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Power On Precontrol, dynamic

The action of switching the control off and then on again. Contour inaccuracies due to following errors can be virtually eliminated by dynamic, acceleration-dependent precontrol. This feature leads to excellent precision even at high path speeds. Feedforward control can only be activated and deactivated for all axes at a time in the part program. This is a program command. The next block in an NC program is not executed until all the blocks which have been prepared and stored in the buffer have been executed completely. See also "preprocessor buffer". The Preset function is a means of redefining the control zero in the machine coordinate system. Preset does not trigger movement of the axes: instead, a new position value is entered for the current axis position. 1. Operating area of the control 2. Sequence of statements addressing the control. Programmable -> frames can be used to define new coordinate system starting points dynamically during execution of the part program. A distinction is made between absolute definition using a new frame and additive definition with reference to an existing starting point. Programmable logic controllers (PLCs) are electronic controllers whose functions are stored as a program in the control unit. The physical design and wiring of the unit, therefore, does not depend on the function of the control. A PLC is structured like a computer; it has a CPU (central processing unit) with memory, input/output modules and an internal bus system. The I/Os and the programming language are designed to meet the requirements of the control technology. Limitation of the movement area of the tool within defined limits.

Preprocessor stop

Preset

Program

Programmable frames

Programmable logic controller

Programmable working area limitation Programming key

Characters and character sequences which have a defined meaning in the programming language for -> part programs (see Programming Guide).

A-432

12.98

Appendix

Terms

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Protection zone

Three-dimensional zone within the -> working area in which the tool tip is not allowed to enter.

Q
Quadrant error compensation Quadrant error compensation is a means of largely eliminating contour errors at quadrant transitions caused by the variation in friction at guideways. Quadrant error compensation is parameterized by means of a circularity test.

R
Rail Rapid lift from contour A rail used to mount the S7-300 modules. If an interrupt is received, the CNC machining program can trigger a movement which permits the tool to lift rapidly away from the workpiece contour currently being machined. The angle of retraction and the distance can also be parameterized. The rapid lift from contour can be followed by an interrupt routine. (SINUMERIK FM-NC, 810D, 840D). Highest speed of an axis, used, for example, to bring the tool from an idle position to the -> workpiece contour or move it back from the workpiece contour. A point on the machine tool to which the measurement system of the -> machine axes refers. If the system of position measuring employed is not based on absolute-value encoders, the control must perform a reference point approach in order to ensure that the measured values supplied by the measuring system are in harmony with the machine coordinate values. 1. Reapproach to contour, triggered by operator The Repos function provides a means of returning the tool to the interrupt position with the aid of the direction keys. 2. Programmed contour reapproach Several approach strategies are available using program commands: approach interruption point; approach block start point; approach block end point; approach contour point between start of block and interruption.

Rapid traverse

Reference point

Reference point approach

REPOS

A-433

Appendix

12.98

Terms

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Reset

A reset clears the contents of the following -> CPU memories the -> working memory the write/read area of the -> load memory the -> system memory the -> backup memory

Revolutional feedrate

The feedrate of the axes is controlled according to the speed of the master spindle in the channel (programmed with G95). This function is used to tap holes without the use of a compensating chuck. The spindle is controlled as an interpolative rotary axis and drill axis, with the result that threads are tapped precisely to the final drilling depth, for example in blind tapped holes (precondition: spindle axis mode). Rotary axes cause the tool or workpiece to rotate to a specified angle position. The range of motion of a rotary axis can be limited to an angle less than 360 degrees or defined as continuous in both directions, depending on the application. Continuously turning rotary axes are used, for example for eccentric machining, grinding and winding. Component of a -> frame which defines a rotation of the coordinate system through a specific angle. Rounding axes cause the workpiece or tool to rotate to a specified angle position.

Rigid tapping

Rotary axis

Rotary axis, continuously turning

Rotation

Rounding axis

S
S7 configuration S7 configuration is a tool for parameterizing modules. S7 configuration is used to set a variety of -> parameter blocks of the -> CPU and the I/O modules in the -> programming device. These parameters are uploaded to the CPU. The S7-300 bus is a serial data bus via which the modules communicate and via which they receive their supply voltage. The connections between the modules are established by means of -> bus connectors.

S7-300 bus

A-434

12.98

Appendix

Terms

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Safety functions

The control incorporates monitors which are active at all times and which are designed to detect malfunctions in the -> CNC, the programmable controller (-> PLC) and the machine at an early stage in order to minimize the risk of damage to the tool, workpiece or machine. If a malfunction occurs machining is interrupted and the drives are stopped. The cause of the malfunction is logged and an alarm is issued. At the same time, the PLC is notified that a CNC alarm has been triggered. Effective personnel and machine protection integrated in the control in conformity with EC Directive >>89/392/EEC<< in >>Safety Category 3<< to EN-954-1 (Categories B. 1-4 are defined in this standard) for safe setup and testing. Discrete fail-safety is assured. If an individual fault occurs, the safety function is still effective. Component of a -> frame which causes axis-specific alterations in the scale. For the purposes of data input and output, the MMC module MMC100 has a serial V24 interface (RS232) and the MMC modules MMC101 and MMC102 have two V24 interfaces. Machining programs and manufacturer and user data can be imported and exported via these interfaces.

Safety Integrated

Scale

Serial interface V24

Services Setting data

Operating area in the control. Data which provide the NC with information on the properties of the machine tool in a way defined by the system software. A key whose name appears on an area of the screen. The choice of softkeys displayed is adapted dynamically to the operating situation. The freely assignable function keys (softkeys) are assigned to functions defined in the software. Software limit switches define the limits of the travel range of an axis and prevent the slide contacting the hardware limit switches. Two pairs of values can be assigned per axis and activated separately via the -> PLC.

Softkey

Software limit switches

A-435

Appendix

12.98

Terms

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Spindles

The spindle functionality is a two-level construct: 1. Spindles: speed-controlled or position-controlled spindle drives, analog +10V (SINUMERIK FM-NC) digital (SINUMERIK 840D) 2. Auxiliary spindles: speed controlled spindle drives without position encoder (e.g. for driven tools) "Auxiliary spindle" function package, for example for driven tools. Spline interpolation is a method by which the control can construct a smooth curve from a limited number of intermediate points defined on a target contour. Standard cycles are available for frequently recurring machining processes: for drilling/milling for measuring tools and workpieces for turning (SINUMERIK FM-NC) The cycles available can be viewed in a list called through the "Cycles support" menu in the "Program" operating area. Once the desired machining cycle has been selected the parameters required for value assignment are displayed in plain text.

Spline interpolation

Standard cycles

Subblock

Block introduced by "N" and containing information for a step, e.g. the definition of a position. Sequence of statements in a -> part program that can be called repeatedly with differing initial parameters. A routine is called from within the main program. Each routine can be locked against unauthorized export and viewing (with MMC 102/103). -> Cycles are a type of subprogram. Instructions in -> part programs for coordination of the operations in different -> channels at specific machining points.

Subprogram

Synchronization

A-436

12.98

Appendix

Terms

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Synchronous actions

1. Auxiliary function output When machining is in progress, technological functions (-> auxiliary functions) can be output to the PLC from within the CNC program. These auxiliary programs are used, for example, to control auxiliaries for the machine tool such as center sleeves, grabs, chucks, etc. 2. High-speed auxiliary function output For time-critical switching functions the acknowledgment times for the -> auxiliary functions can be minimized and unnecessary stops in the machining process can be avoided. Synchronous actions can be combined to form programs (technology cycles). Axis programs can be started in the same IPO cycle, for example, by scanning digital inputs.

Synchronized axes

Synchronized axes require the same time for their travel as geometry axes for their path travel. Accurate angular synchronism between a master spindle and one or more slave spindles. Enables flying transfer of a workpiece from spindle 1 to spindle 2 on turning machines. The relative angular position of the spindles in relation to each other can be defined in addition to the speed synchronism, e.g. for positionoriented transfer of inclined workpieces on-the-fly. The application of multiple synchronous spindle pairs is possible. A variable which exists although it has not been programmed by the programmer of the - > part program. It is defined by the data type and the variable name, which is prefixed with $. See also -> User-defined variable.

Synchronous spindle

System variable

T
Teach In Teach In is a means of creating or correcting part programs. The individual program blocks are keyed in via the keyboard and executed immediately. Positions entered with the direction keys or handwheels can also be stored. Additional specifications such as G functions, feedrates and M functions can be entered in the same block. -> Editor

Text editor

A-437

Appendix

12.98

Terms

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Tool

A tool employed to shape the workpiece, for example a turning tool, milling cutter, drill, laser beam, etc. When a contour is programmed, it is assumed that the tool is pointed. Since this is not always the case in practice, the curvature radius of the tool used is specified so that the control can make allowance for it. The curvature center point is guided along an equal distance to the contour at an offset corresponding to the curvature radius. A tool is selected by programming a T function (5 decades, integer) in the block. Up to nine tool edges (D addresses) can be assigned to each T number. The number of tools to be managed by the control is defined in parameterization. The tool length offset is selected by means of D programming. Direct programming of a -> workpiece radius requires the control to be able to travel a path equidistant to the programmed contour, taking the radius of the tool used into account. (G41/G42). Programming in the Cartesian coordinate system, execution in a nonCartesian coordinate system (e.g. with machine axes as rotary axes). Employed with Transmit, Inclined axis, 5-axis transformation. This function allows the milling of external contours on turned parts, e.g. four-sided parts (linear axis with rotary axis). 3D interpolation with two linear axes and one rotary axis is possible. The benefits are simplified programming and improved machine efficiency through complete machining: turning and milling on the same machine without reclamping. The maximum permissible travel range for linear axes is 9 decades. The absolute value depends on the selected precision for input and position control and the unit of measurement (inch or metric system of units). This function allows axes (tailstocks, sleeves) to be traversed to a fixed stop position, e.g. in order to clamp workpieces. The contact pressure can be defined in the NC program.

Tool nose radius compensation

Tool offset

Toolradius compensation

Transformation

Transmit

Travel range

Travel to fixed stop

A-438

12.98

Appendix

Terms

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

U
User memory All programs and data such as part programs, subprograms, comments, tool offsets, zero offsets/frames and channel and programuser data can be stored in the public CNC user memory. -> Part program Users can define variables in the -> part program or data block for their own use (global user data). A definition contains a data type specification and the variable name. See also -> system variable.

User program User-defined variable

V
Variable definition A variable definition includes the specification of a data type and a variable name. The variable name can be used to address the value of the variable. In order to achieve an acceptable travel velocity in movements which call for very small adjustments of position in a block, the control can -> look ahead. Words of a defined notation and having a defined meaning in the programming language for -> part programs.

Velocity control

Vocabulary words

W
Working area limitation Working area limitation is a means of restricting the axis movement over and above the restrictions imposed by the limit switches. A pair of values delimiting the protected zone can be defined for each axis. The working memory is a RAM in the -> CPU which the processor accesses as it executes the application program. Three-dimensional zone into which the tool tip can be moved on account of the physical design of the machine tool. See also -> protection zone. Part to be produced/machined by the machine tool. Setpoint contour of the -> workpiece to be created/machined.

Working memory

Working space

Workpiece Workpiece contour

A-439

Appendix

12.98

Terms

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Workpiece coordinate system

The origin of the workpiece coordinate system is the -> workpiece zero. If the workpiece coordinate system is used for programming, dimensions and directions are referenced to this system. The workpiece zero is the origin for the -> workpiece coordinate system. It is defined by distances from the machine zero.

Workpiece zero

Z
Zero offset Specification of a new reference point for a coordinate system by means of a reference to an existing zero and a -> frame. 1. Settable SINUMERIK FM-NC: Four independent zero offsets can be selected per CNC axis. SINUMERIK 840D: A parameterizable number of zero offsets is available for each CNC axis. Each of the zero offsets can be selected by G functions and selection is exclusive. 2. External All offsets which define the position of the workpiece zero can be overlaid with an external zero offset defined by handwheel (DRF offset) or defined by the PLC. 3. Programmable Zero offsets can be programmed for all path and positioning axes by means of the TRANS instruction.

A-440

12.98

Appendix

References

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

References General Documentation

/BU/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC Ordering Information Catalog NC 60.1 Order No.: E86060-K4460-A101-A6-7600 SIMATIC SIMATIC S7 Programmable Logic Controllers Catalog ST 70 Order No.: E86 060-K4670-A111-A3 SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC Technical Information Catalog NC 60.2 Order No.: E86060-D4460-A201-A4-7600 SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC Brochure SINUMERIK, SIROTEC, SIMODRIVE Accessories and Equipment for Special-Purpose Machines Catalog NC Z Order No.: E86060-K4490-A001-A6-7600

/ST7/

/VS/

/W/

/Z/

Electronic Documentation
/CD4/ The SINUMERIK system (10.99 Edition) DOC ON CD (with all SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC and SIMODRIVE 611D publications) Order No.: 6FC5 298-5CA00-0BG1

A-441

Appendix

12.98

References

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

User Documentation
/AUE/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC AutoTurn Graphic Programming System Part 2: Setup Order No.: 6FC5 298-4AA50-0BP2 SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC Short Guide AutoTurn Operation Order No.: 6FC5 298-4AA30-0BP2 SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC AutoTurn Graphic Programming System Part 1: Programming Order No.: 6FC5 298-4AA40-0BP2 SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC Operator's Guide Order No.: 6FC5 298-5AA00-0BP1 Operator's Guide Operator's Guide Interactive Programming (MMC 102/103) /BAE/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC Operator's Guide Unit Operator Panel Order No.: 6FC5 298-3AA60-0BP1 SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC Short Operating Guide Order No.: 6FC5 298-4AA10-0BP0 SINUMERIK 840D/810D Operator's Guide ManualTurn Order No.: 6FC5 298-2AD00-0BP2 SINUMERIK 840D/810D Short Guide ManualTurn Order No.: 6FC5 298-2AD40-0BP0

(07.99 Edition)

/AUK/

(07.99 Edition)

/AUP/

(07.99 Edition)

/BA/

(08.99 Edition)

(04.96 Edition)

/BAK/

(12.98 Edition)

/BAM/

(09.99 Edition)

/KAM/

(11.98 Edition)

A-442

12.98

Appendix

References

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

/BAS/

SINUMERIK 840D/810D Operator's Guide ShopMill Order No.: 6FC5 298-2AD10-0BP1 SINUMERIK 840D/810D Short Guide ShopMill Order No.: 6FC5 298-2AD30-0BP0 SINUMERIK 840D/810D Operator's Guide Handheld Programming Unit Order No.: 6FC5 298-4AD20-0BP0 SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC User's Guide Measuring Cycles Order No.: 6FC5 298-5AA70-0BP1 SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC Diagnostics Guide Order No.: 6FC5 298-5AA20-0BP1 SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC Programming Guide Fundamentals Order No.: 6FC5 298-5AB00-0BP1 SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC Programming Guide Advanced Order No.: 6FC5 298-5AB10-0BP1 SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC Short Guide Programming Order No.: 6FC5 298-5AB30-0BP0 SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC Programming Guide Cycles Order No.: 6FC5 298-5AB40-0BP1

(08.99 Edition)

/KAS/

(01.98 Edition)

/BAP/

(08.99 Edition)

/BNM/

(08.99 Edition)

/DA/

(08.99 Edition)

/PG/

(08.99 Edition)

/PGA/

(08.99 Edition)

/PGK/

(12.98 Edition)

/PGZ/

(08.99 Edition)

/PI/

PCIN 4.4 Software for Data Transfer to/from MMC Module Order No.: 6FX2 060-4AA00-4XB0 (German, English, French) Order from: WK Frth

A-443

Appendix

12.98

References

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Manufacturer/Service Documentation

/LIS/

SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC SIMODRIVE 611D Lists Order No.: 6FC5 297-5AB70-0BP1 SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC Operator Components Manual Order No.: 6FC5 297-5AA50-0BP1 SIMODRIVE Sensor Absolute Encoder with Profibus-DP User Guide (HW) Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AB10-0BP1 SINUMERIK, SIROTEC, SIMODRIVE EMC Installation Guide Planning Guide (HW) Order No.: 6FC5 297-0AD30-0BP1 SINUMERIK 810D Manual Configuring Order No.: 6FC5 297-3AD10-0BP1 SINUMERIK 840D NCU 571.2-573.2 Manual Order No.: 6FC5 297-5AC10-0BP1 SINUMERIK FM-NC NCU 570 Manual Order No.: 6FC5 297-3AC00-0BP0 SIMODRIVE Sensor Measuring System for Main Spindle Drives Configuring Installation Guide, SIMAG-H (HW) Order No.: 6SN1197-0AB30-0BP0

(08.99 Edition)

/BH/

(08.99 Edition)

/BHA/

(02.99 Edition)

/EMV/

(06.99 Edition)

/PHC/

(08.99 Edition)

/PHD/

(08.99 Edition)

/PHF/

(04.96 Edition)

/PMH/

(05.99 Edition)

A-444

12.98

Appendix

References

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

/FB/

SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC Description of Functions Basic Machine (Part 1) (the various sections are listed below) Order No.: 6FC5 297-5AC20-0BP1 A2 A3 B1 B2 D1 D2 F1 G2 H2 K1 K2 K4 N2 P1 P3 R1 S1 V1 W1

(08.99 Edition)

Various Interface Signals Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones Continuous Path Mode, Exact Stop and Look Ahead Acceleration Diagnostic Tools Interactive Programming Travel to Fixed Stop Velocities, Setpoint/Actual Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control Output of Auxiliary Functions to PLC Mode Group, Channels, Program Operation Mode Coordinate Systems, Frames Actual-Value System for Workpiece, External Zero Offset Communication EMERGENCY STOP Transverse Axes Basic PLC Program Reference Point Approach Spindles Feeds Tool Compensation

/FB/

SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC (08.99 Edition) Description of Functions, Extended Functions (Part 2) including FM-NC: Turning, Stepping Motor (the various sections are listed below) Order No.: 6FC5 297-5AC30-0BP1 A4 B3 B4 F3 H1 K3 K5 L1 M1 M5 Digital and Analog NCK I/Os Several Operator Panels and NCUs Operation via PC/PG Remote Diagnostics Jog with/without Handwheel Compensations Mode Groups, Channels, Axis Replacement FM-NC Local Bus Kinematic Transformation Measurements

A-445

Appendix

12.98

References

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

N3 N4 P2 P5 R2 S3 S5 S6 S7 T1 W3 W4 /FB/

Software Cams, Position Switching Signals Punching and Nibbling Positioning Axes Oscillation Rotary Axes Synchronous Spindles Synchronized Actions (up to and including SW 3) Stepper Motor Control Memory Configuration Indexing Axes Tool Change Grinding

SINUMERIK 840D/FM-NC Description of Functions, Special Functions (Part 3)(08.99 Edition) (the various sections are listed below) Order No.: 6FC5 297-5AC80-0BP1 F2 G1 G3 K6 M3 S8 T3 V2 W5 TE1 TE2 TE3 TE4 TE5 TE6 3-Axis to 5-Axis Transformation Gantry Axes Cycle Times Contour Tunnel Monitoring Coupled Motion and Leading Value Coupling Constant Workpiece Speed for Centerless Grinding Tangential Control Preprocessing 3D Tool Radius Compensation Clearance Control Analog Axis Master-Slave for drives Transformation Package Handling Setpoint Exchange MCS Coupling

A-446

12.98

Appendix

References

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

/FBA/

SIMODRIVE 611D/SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions, Drive Functions (the various sections are listed below) Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AA80-0BP5 DB1 DD1 DD2 DE1 DF1 DG1 DM1 DS1 D1

(08.99 Edition)

Operational Messages/Alarm Reactions Diagnostic Functions Speed Control Loop Extended Drive Functions Enables Commands Encoder Parameterization Calculation of Motor/Power Section Parameters and Controller Data Current Control Loop Monitors/Limitations

/FBD/

SINUMERIK 840D Description of Functions Digitizing Order No.: 6FC5 297-4AC50-0BP0 DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4

(07.99 Edition)

Start-up Scanning with Tactile Sensors (scancad scan) Scanning with Lasers (scancad laser) Milling Program Generation (scancad mill)

/FBFA/

SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ISO Dialects for SINUMERIK Order No.: 6FC5 297-5AE10-0BP0 SIMODRIVE 611D/ SINUMERIK 840D Description of Functions Hydraulics Module Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AB60-0BP1 SINUMERIK 810D Description of Functions ManualTurn Order No.: 6FC5 297-5AD50-0BP0

(08.99 Edition)

/FBHLA/

(08.99 Edition)

/FBMA/

(09.99 Edition)

A-447

Appendix

12.98

References

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

/FBO/

SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC Description of Functions Configuring of Operator Interface OP 030 (the various sections are listed below) Order No.: 6FC5 297-3AC40-0BP0 BA EU PS PSE IK

(03.96 Edition)

Operator's Guide Development Environment (Configuring Package) Online only: Configuring Syntax (Configuring Package) Introduction to Configuring of Operator Interface Screen Kit: Software Update and Configuration

/FBP/

SINUMERIK 840D Description of Functions C-PLC Programming Order No.: 6FC5 297-3AB60-0BP0 SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions SINCOM Computer Link Order No.: 6FC5 297-4AD60-0BP0 NFL NPL Host Computer Interface PLC/NCK Interface

(03.96 Edition)

/FBR/

(06.98 Edition)

/FBSI/

SINUMERIK / SIMODRIVE Description of Functions SINUMERIK Safety Integrated Order No.: 6FC5 297-5AB80-0BP0 SINUMERIK 810D Description of Functions ShopMill Order No.: 6FC5 297-5AD80-0BP1 SIMATIC FM STEPDRIVE/SIMOSTEP Description of Functions Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AA70-0YP3

(03.99 Edition)

/FBSP/

(08.99 Edition)

/FBST/

(01.97 Edition)

A-448

12.98

Appendix

References

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

/FBSY/

SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC Description of Functions Synchronized Actions for Wood, Glass, Ceramics and Presses Order No.: 6FC5 297-5AD40-0BP0 SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions Tool Information SINTDI with Online Help Order No.: 6FC5 297-5AE00-0BP0

(12.98 Edition)

/FBTD/

(04.99 Edition)

/FBU/

SIMODRIVE 611 universal Description of Functions (01.99 Edition) Closed-Loop Control Component for Speed Control and Positioning Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AB20-0BP0 SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions Tool Management Order No.: 6FC5 297-5AC60-0BP1

/FBW/

(08.99 Edition)

/IK/

SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC Screen Kit MMC 100/Unit Operator Panel (06.96 Edition) Description of Functions: Software Update and Configuration Order No.: 6FC5 297-3EA10-0BP1 SIMODRIVE 611 universal Short Description (04.99 Edition) Closed-Loop Control Component for Speed Control Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AB40-0BP1 SIMODRIVE Planning Guide Linear Motors (on request) ALL 1FN1 1FN2 (in preparation)

/KBU/

/PJLM/

General Information about Linear Motors 1FN1 Three-Phase AC Linear Motor 1FN2 Three-Phase AC Linear Motor

A-449

Appendix

12.98

References

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

/PJU/

SIMODRIVE 611-A/611-D Planning Guide Inverters Transistor PWM Inverters for AC Feed Drives and AC Main Spindle Drives Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AA00-0BP4 SIMODRIVE POSMO A User Manual Distributed Positioning Motor on PROFIBUS DP Order No.: 6SN2 197-0AA00-0BP0 SIMODRIVE POSMO A Installation Instructions (enclosed with POSMO A) Order No.: 462 008 0815 00 SIMATIC S7-300 Manual: Assembly; CPU Data Reference Manual: Module Data Order No.: 6ES7 398-8AA03-8BA0 SIMATIC S7-300 Manual: STEP 7, Basic Information, V. 3.1 Order No.: 6ES7 810-4CA02-8BA0 SIMATIC S7-300 Manual: STEP 7, Reference Manuals, V. 3.1 Order No.: 6ES7 810-4CA02-8BR0 SIMATIC S7-300 FM 353 Step Drive Positioning Module Order in conjunction with Configuring Package

(08.98 Edition)

/POS1/

(02.99 Edition)

/POS2/

(12.98 Edition)

/S7H/

(10.98 Edition)

/S7HT/

(03.97 Edition)

/S7HR/

(03.97 Edition)

/S7S/

(04.97 Edition)

A-450

12.98

Appendix

References

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

/S7L/

SIMATIC S7-300 FM 354 Servo Drive Positioning Module Order in conjunction with Configuring Package SIMATIC S7-300 FM 357 Multi-Axis Module for Servo and Stepper Drives Order in conjunction with Configuring Package SIMODRIVE 611 Manual Single-Axis Positioning for MCU 172A Order No.: 6SN 1197-4MA00-0BP0 SIMODRIVE 611-A/611-D SimoPro 3.1 Program for Configuring Machine-Tool Drives Order No.: 6SC6 111-6PC00-0AAJ Order from: WK Frth

(04.97 Edition)

/S7M/

(04.98 Edition)

/SHM/

(01.98 Edition)

/SP/

/IAA/

SIMODRIVE 611A Installation and Start-Up Guide Order No.: 6SN 1197-0AA60-0BP5

(10.99 Edition)

/IAC/

SINUMERIK 810D Installation and Start-Up Guide (08.99 Edition) (incl. description of SIMODRIVE 611D start-up software) Order No.: 6FC5 297-3AD20-0BP1 SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (08.99 Edition) (incl. description of SIMODRIVE 611D start-up software) Order No.: 6FC5 297-5AB10-0BP1 SINUMERIK FM-NC Installation and Start-Up Guide Order No.: 6FC5 297-3AB00-0BP0

/IAD/

/IAF/

(04.96 Edition)

A-451

Appendix

12.98

References

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

/IAM/

SINUMERIK 840D/810D MMC Installation and Start-up Guide Order No.: 6FC5 297-5AE20-0BP1 IM1 Start-up functions for MMC 100.2 IM3 Start-up functions for MMC 103 HE1 Editor help BE1 Supplement operator interface

(08.99 Edition)

A-452

12.98

Appendix

Index

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

D $

Index

$A_DNO 8-265 $P_GWPS 7-241; 7-242 $TC_DP1...25 8-266 $TC_ECPxy 8-276 $TC_SCPxy 8-276 $TC_TPG1, ..., ...9 8-321 $TC_TPG1/...8/...9 7-241

2
2 straight lines 4-129

3
3 straight lines 4-130

A
Absolute dimension 1-24 Absolute dimensioning 3-79 Acceleration Correction 7-232 Pattern 5-170 Activate/deactivate travel to fixed stop 4-149 Additive offsets Delete 8-278 Select 8-275 Address letters 12-372 Address of block number N 2-50 Addresses 2-52 Extended addresses 2-54 Fixed addresses 2-55 Fixed addresses 12-373 Fixed addresses with axis extension 2-56 Modal/non-modal addresses 2-54 Settable addresses 2-56 Value assignments 2-59 With axial extension 2-54 Alarm

Number 2-68 Text 2-68 Aperture angle AC 2-53 Approach and retraction paths 8-295 Approach and retraction velocities 8-306 Approach point/angle 8-295 Approaching a fixed point 4-147 Arithmetic parameter R 2-53 Arithmetic parameters R 10-334 ATRANS 6-181; 6-184; 10-334 Auxiliary function H 2-50; 2-52 Axis Q 2-53 Axis types Channel axes 1-37 Machine axes 1-37 Main spindle 1-37 Path axes 1-38 Positioning axes 1-38 Special axes 1-37 Synchronized axes 1-40 Axis U, V, W, X, Y, Z 2-53

B
Basic coordinate system 1-31 Blank 8-295 Block number 2-51 Block number 2-50 Blocks 2-49 Block format 2-49 Block length 2-49 Block number 2-51 Comments 2-66 Main block/subblock 2-50 Skipping blocks 2-65 Word sequence in blocks 2-50 Bottleneck detection 8-310

C
Centerless grinding 7-244 Constant workpiece speed 7-244 Chamfer 4-156

A-453

Appendix

12.98

Index

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Change of direction 8-300 Channel axes 1-37 Character set 2-47 Circle Radius CR 2-52 Circle radius CR 2-53 Circular interpolation 4-113 Helical interpolation 4-126 Indication of working plane 4-114 Programming a circle With arc angle and center point 4-117 With center point and end point 4-114 With intermediate and end points 4-121 With polar coordinates 4-118 With radius and end point 4-116 With tangential transition 4-123 Circular magazine 8-260 Clamping torque FXST 4-151 Collision Detection ON (CDON)/OFF (CDOF) 8309 Collision monitoring 8-309 Collisions 8-296 Command axes 1-40 Comments 2-66 Compensation plane 8-312 Constant Cutting rate 7-239 Grinding wheel peripheral speed 7-241 Workpiece speed 7-244 Constants 2-63 Binary constants 2-64 Hexadecimal constants 2-64 Integer constants 2-63 Real constants 2-63 Continuous-path mode 5-162; 5-164; 5-165 Look Ahead 5-168 With programmable transition rounding 5-164 Contour Approach, retract 8-295 point 8-295 Roughing 2-67 Violation 8-310 Contour accuracy, programmable 5-174 Contour definitions 4-128

Coordinate systems 1-20 Absolute dimension 1-24 Basic coordinate system 1-31 Incremental dimension 1-25 Machine coordinate system 1-29 Overview 1-27 Plane designations 1-26 Polar coordinates 1-23 Workpiece coordinate system 1-32 Coordinate systems and workpiece machining 1-43 Corner behavior Intersection 8-300 Selectable transitions 8-299 Transition circle 8-298 Cutting rate, constant 7-240 Cylinder surface transformation 7-223 Cylinder thread 4-133 Cylindrical coordinates 4-105

D
D number table 8-265 D numbers Check 8-271 Free allocation 8-270 Get T number 8-273 Re-assign 8-272 Data types 2-62 Constants 2-63 Deactivate compensation mode G40 8-296 G40, KONT 8-297 Definition of workpiece positions 1-21 Dimension Incremental dimensioning 3-82 Dimensioning Absolute dimensioning 3-79 Dimensions Absolute/relative 3-79; 3-82 Incremental dimensioning 3-79 Metric/imperial, G70/G71 3-85 Metric/imperial, G700/G710 3-85 Rotary axes and spindles 3-83

A-454

12.98

Appendix

Index

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

DL number 8-275 Dwell time 5-175

E
End of block LF 2-48 End of program, M2, M17, M30 9-331 End point programming 8-304 Exact positioning Command output 5-163 Exact stop 5-162 End of interpolation 5-163 Positioning window 5-162

Additive instructions 6-180 Programmable mirroring 6-197 Programmable rotation 6-187 Programmable scale factor 6-194 Programmable zero offset 6-181; 6-184 Settable and programmable instructions 6-179 Frame system 1-32; 6-178 Function outputs In continuous-path mode 9-328 Function outputs for travel commands 9-328

G
G function list 12-380 G70 3-85 G700 3-86 G71 3-85 G710 3-86 Geometry axes 1-36 Switchable 1-36 Geometry/speed monitoring 8-321 Grinding wheel peripheral speed 7-241 Grinding wheel peripheral speed, constant 7-241 Grinding-specific tool monitoring 8-320

F
Face thread 4-133 Facing axis Zero points 4-153 Feed Axial feed FA 2-52 Feed F 2-50; 2-52 Feedforward control 5-173 Feedrate 7-204 For path axes, F 7-206 For positioning axes 7-225 For synchronized axes 7-206 FPRAON, FPRAOFF 7-227 G95 FPR() 7-226 Optimization example 7-235 Optimization for curved path sections, CFTCP, CFC, CFIN 7-233 Override 7-231 Per cent acceleration correction ACC 7-232 Units of measurement 7-205 With handwheel override, FD, FDA 7-229 Feedrate override, percentage, OVR,OVRA 7-228 Feedrates in one block 7-247 Fixed stop 4-149 Clamping torque 4-151 Monitoring window 4-151 Travel to fixed stop 4-149 Frame generation according to tool orientation, TOFRAME 6-201 Frame instructions

H
H functions 9-332 High-speed function outputs, QU 9-327 Handwheel override 7-229 Handwheel travel With path default 7-230 With velocity overlay 7-230 Helical interpolation 4-126 Programming the end point 4-127 Sequence of motions 4-127 High-speed function outputs, QU 9-327

I
Identifier For character string 2-48 Identifier for special numerical values 2-48 Identifier for system variables 2-48 Identifiers 2-60

A-455

Appendix

12.98

Index

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Array identifiers 2-62 Identifier name 2-61 Variable identifiers 2-61 Incremental dimension 1-25 Incremental dimensioning 3-82 Infeed movements 8-298 Input of incremental coordinates 3-79 Inside contour 8-310 Internal preprocessor stop 5-176; 7-213 Interpolation parameter IP, J, K 2-52; 2-55

Messages 2-67 Miscellaneous function M 2-50; 2-52 Monitoring window FXSW 4-151 Motion commands 4-102 Programming motion commands 4-102

N
NC program 2-46 Non-cutting tool path 8-300

J
Jerk limitation 5-170 Jump destinations 2-66 Jump instruction 10-337

O
Offset memory 8-317 Operators 2-58 Overview of coordinate systems 1-27

L
LINE FEED 2-49 Linear interpolation 4-110 List Of predefined subprograms 12-390 Of preparatory functions (G functions) 12-380 Of statements 12-358 Lists 12-357 Look Ahead 5-168

P
Path action 5-161 Path action, depending on DISC values 8-299 Path axes Traverse with handwheel override 7-231 Path axes 1-38 Path commands Number of axis values 4-102 Start point - destination point 4-102 Path override OVR 2-52 Path tangent 8-296 Plane designations 1-26 PLC axes 1-40; 1-41 Polar Angle AP 2-53 Radius RP 2-53 Polar coordinates 1-23; 4-104 Cylindrical coordinates 4-105 Defining the pole 4-105 Polar angle AP 4-105 Polar radius RP 4-105; 4-106 Working plane 4-105 Positional data X, Y, Z 2-50 Position-controlled spindle operation 7-215 Positioning axes 1-38 Traverse 7-212 Positioning axis POS 2-53

M
M command sequence 9-328 M functions 9-329 End of program, M2, M17, M30 9-331 Optional stop 9-331 Programmed stop, MO 9-330 M6 8-259 Machine axes 1-37 Machine coordinate system 1-29 Main axes 1-36 Main block 2-50 Main block 2-53 Main spindle 1-37 Make active tool offset operative immediately 8-322 Master spindle 1-37

A-456

12.98

Appendix

Index

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Positioning position-controlled spindles Position a rotating spindle 7-216 Position a spindle from standstill 7-219 Preparatory function G 2-52 Preparatory function, G 2-50 Preprocessor stop 7-213 Program Identifier 2-46 Programming messages 2-67 Setting alarms 2-68 Program end, M2, M17, M30 2-46 Program jumps, conditional 10-339 Program jumps, unconditional 10-337 Program name 2-46 Program passes, number P 2-52 Program repetition 11-347 Program section 2-65 Program section repetition 11-348 Programmable contour accuracy 5-174 Programmable mirroring, MIRROR, AMIRROR 6-197 Programmable rotation Change of plane 6-191 Direction of rotation 6-189 ROT, AROT 6-187 Programmable rotation in space 6-188 Programmable scale factor, SCALE, ASCALE 6-194 Programmable zero offset G58, G59 6-184 TRANS, ATRANS 6-181 Programmed rotation in the plane 6-190 Programmed stop, M0 9-330 Programming language Addresses 2-52 Blocks 2-49 Character set 2-47 Data types 2-62 Identifiers 2-60 Variable name 2-54 Words 2-49

R
Rapid traverse movement 4-108 Reading positions 8-307 Reference point approach 3-98 Retraction direction 4-144 Retraction speed 4-145 Rotary axis A, B, C 2-52 Rounding 4-156 Run-in and run-out paths, programmable 4-137

S
Settable zero offsets 3-88 Setting alarms 2-68 Setting clamping torque 4-149 Setup value 8-276 Several feedrates in one block 7-247 SIEMENS cycles 2-68 Skip block Eight skip levels 2-65 Skip levels 2-65 Smooth approach and retraction 8-302 Special axes 1-37 Special characters 2-48 Speed S 2-50 Spindle 7-236 Directions of spindle rotation 7-236 Position SPOS 2-55 Position-controlled spindle operation 7-215 Positioning spindles for position-controlled axis operation 7-216 Speed S 2-52; 2-55 Spindle speed 7-237 Working with several spindles 7-237 Spindle position across block boundary SPOSA 2-53 Spindle position SPOS 2-53 Spindle speed limitation 7-246; 7-247 Spindle speed S 2-53 Start point offset SF 4-134 Statement list 12-358 Straight line with angle 4-128 Subblock 2-51 Subblock N 2-52

A-457

Appendix

12.98

Index

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

Subprogram Call L 2-52 Subprogram list 12-390 Subprogram,call 11-345 Subprograms 11-342 Program repetition 11-347 Synchronized axes 1-40

T
T0 8-259 Tables 12-357 Taper thread 4-133 Tapping Rigid 4-140 Right-hand/left-hand threads 4-141 With compensating chuck 4-142 Thread chaining 4-135 Thread cutting 4-132; 4-144 Cylinder thread 4-133 Right-hand/left-hand thread 4-134 Start point offset 4-134 Taper thread 4-133 Thread chaining 4-135 With constant lead 4-132 TOFRAME 8-319 Tool Movements 3-77; 4-101 Number T 2-53 Offset number D 2-50 Tool change location 8-296 Tool edge number 8-270 Tool edge number D 2-52 Tool edge reference point 8-285 Tool length Compensation From toolholder orientation, TCOABS 8-318 Components 8-317 Tool lengths Offset 8-317 Tool monitoring Activate/deactivate 8-320 Deactivate 8-320 Tool offset, CUT2D, CUT2DF 8-311

Tool Offsets 8-251 Approach and retract from contour 8-295 Compensation at outside corners 8-298 Smooth approach and retraction (WAB) 8-301 Tool radius compensation 8-254 Tool point direction Relevant 8-285 Tool radius compensation 8-279; 8-287 Changing Offset number D 8-291 Changing the compensation direction 8-291 Corner behavior 8-299 Intersection 8-300 Selectable transitions 8-299 Transition circle 8-298 CUT2D 8-311 CUT2DF 8-312 Tool T 2-50 Tool types 8-320 Tool types 8-255 Toolholder Request 8-317 Toolholder 8-317 Tools with a relevant tool point direction 8-285 TRACYL transformation 7-223 Transformation TRAORI 6-202 Transition Circle 8-298 Circle 8-310 Ellipse/parabola/hyperbola 8-299 Radius 8-300 Transition current/next block 8-297 TRANSMIT transformation 7-221 Transverse axis Dimensions for the transverse axis 4-154 Transverse axis (facing axis) Coordinate system 4-153 Traversing with feedforward control 5-173 Turning functions Chamfer, rounding 4-157 Dimensions for the transverse axis 4-154

A-458

12.98

Appendix

Index

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

V
Value range 2-62 Variable name 2-54 Velocity controls 5-172

W
Wear value 8-276 Window width for fixed stop monitoring 4-149 Words 2-49 Working area limitation Activate/deactivate 3-95 Reference points on the tool 3-96 Working plane, G17 to G19 3-92 Workpiece coordinate system 1-32 Workpiece coordinate system 1-32

Z
Zero offset Activating the zero offset 3-90 Deactivating a zero offset 3-90 G54 to G599 3-88 Setting offset values 3-89 Zero points 1-27

A-459

Appendix

12.98

Index

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

A-460

12.98

Appendix

Commands, identifiers

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

E :
: 2-53

Commands, identifiers

=
= 2-48

A
A 3-83 AC 2-53; 4-105; 7-218 AC 3-79 ACC 7-232 ACN 3-83; 7-218 ACP 3-83; 7-218 ADIS 5-164 ADISPOS 5-164 ALF 4-145 AMIRROR 6-197 ANG 12-359 AP 2-53; 4-104; 4-105; 4-106; 4-126 AR 4-126 AROT 6-187 ASCALE 6-194 ATRANS 6-181; 6-184

CHKDNO 8-271 CHR 4-156 CIP 4-113 CLGOF 7-244 CLGON 7-244 CPRECOF 5-174 CPRECON 5-174 CR 2-53; 3-85; 4-126 CT 4-113 CUT2D 3-93; 8-254; 8-311; 8-317 CUT2DF 3-93; 8-254; 8-311; 8-317

D
D 2-50; 7-223; 8-263; 8-266 D0 8-269 D1...D9 8-269 DC 3-83; 7-218 DELDL 8-278 DIAM90 4-154 DIAMOF 4-154 DIAMON 4-154 DILF 4-144 DISC 8-298; 8-299 DISCL 8-301 DISR 8-301 DITE 4-137 DITS 4-137 DL 8-275 DRFOF 6-202 DRIVE 5-170 DRIVEA 5-170 DZERO 8-274

B
B 3-83 BRISK 5-170 BRISK/BRISKA 5-170 BRISKA 5-170

E C
C 3-83 CDOF 8-309 CDON 8-309 CFC 4-127; 7-233 CFIN 7-233 CFTCP 7-233 CHF 4-156 EX 10-335

F
F 2-50; 2-55; 4-110; 4-132; 4-142; 5-175; 7-204 FA 2-52; 7-212; 7-225 FAD 8-301 FALSE 2-62 FD 7-229

A-461

Appendix

12.98

Commands, identifiers

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

FDA 7-229 FFWOF 5-173 FFWON 5-173 FGREF 7-204 FGROUP 4-114; 7-204 FL 7-204 FMA 7-247; 12-362 FP 4-147 FPR 7-225 FPRAOF 7-225 FPRAON 7-225 FRC 4-156; 12-362 FRCM 4-156; 12-362 FTOCOF 7-245 FTOCON 7-245 FXS 4-149 FXST 4-149 FXSW 4-149

G
G 2-50; 2-52; 10-335 G0 4-107; 4-108; 5-164; 5-168 G1 4-109; 4-110 G110 4-104 G111 4-104 G112 4-104 G140 8-301 G141 8-301 G142 8-301 G143 8-301 G147 8-301 G148 8-301 G153 3-88; 6-202 G17 3-92; 8-253; 8-288; 8-311 G18 3-92; 8-253 G19 3-92; 8-253; 8-288; 8-311 G2 4-113; 4-126; 4-154 G247 8-301 G248 8-301 G25 3-95; 7-246 G26 3-95; 7-246 G3 4-113; 4-126; 4-154

G33 4-132; 4-135 G331 4-140 G332 4-140 G340 8-301 G341 8-301 G347 8-301 G348 8-301 G4 5-175 G40 8-266; 8-279; 8-287; 8-296 G41 3-92; 8-267; 8-268; 8-287; 8-295 G42 3-92; 8-267; 8-268; 8-279; 8-287; 8-295 G450 8-295; 8-298 G451 8-295; 8-298 G460 8-313 G461 8-313 G462 8-313 G500 3-88 G505 3-88; 3-90 G53 3-88 G54 3-88 G55 3-88 G56 3-88 G57 3-88 G58 6-184 G59 6-184 G599 3-88; 3-90 G60 5-162 G601 5-162; 5-168 G602 5-162 G603 5-162 G63 4-142 G64 4-135; 5-162; 5-164; 11-343 G64,G641 9-328 G641 5-164 G641 ADIS 5-164 G641 ADISPOS 5-164 G642 5-164 G70 3-85 G700 3-85 G71 3-85 G710 3-85 G74 3-98

A-462

12.98

Appendix

Commands, identifiers

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

G75 4-147 G9 5-162 G90 3-79; 4-115 G91 3-79; 3-82; 4-115 G93 7-204 G94 7-204 G95 7-204 G96 7-239 G97 7-239 GETACTTD 8-273 GETDNO 8-272 GOTOB 10-337; 10-339 GOTOF 10-337; 10-339 GWPSOF 7-241 GWPSON 7-241

LFOF 4-144 LFON 4-144 LFTXT 4-145 LFWP 4-145 LIFTFAST 4-144 LIMS 7-239

M
M 2-50; 2-52; 2-55 M... 9-329 M0 9-329 M1 7-236; 9-329 M17 9-329; 11-346 M2 9-329; 11-342 M3 4-134; 7-219; 7-236; 9-329 M30 9-329; 11-346 M4 4-134; 7-219; 7-236; 9-329 M40 9-329 M41 7-219; 9-329 M42 9-329 M43 9-329 M44 9-329 M45 7-219; 9-329 M5 7-219; 7-236; 9-329 M6 9-329 M7 9-327 M70 9-329 MEAS 4-154 MEAW 4-154 MIRROR 6-178; 6-197 MSG 2-67

H
H 2-50; 2-52; 2-55

I
I 2-52; 3-80; 3-85; 4-132; 4-133 I1 3-85 IC 3-79; 4-105; 7-218 IF 10-339 IP 2-56

J
J 2-52; 3-80; 3-85; 4-133 J1 3-85 JERKA 5-170

K
K 2-52; 3-85; 4-132; 4-133 K1 3-85 KONT 8-295; 8-298

N
N 2-50; 2-52; 10-335 NORM 8-295

O L
L 2-52; 10-335 L... 11-343; 11-344 LABEL 10-337; 10-339 LF 2-48 OFFN 8-287 ORIPATH 12-367 OVR 2-52; 7-228 OVRA 7-228

A-463

Appendix

12.98

Commands, identifiers

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

P
P 2-52 PM 8-301 POS 2-53; 7-212; 7-227 POSA 2-53; 7-212 POSP 7-212 PR 8-301 PUTFTOC 7-241; 7-245 PUTFTOCF 7-241; 7-245

SPOS 2-53; 3-84; 4-140; 7-216; 7-227 SPOS, SPOSA 2-55 SPOSA 2-53; 4-140; 7-216; 7-218 SR 7-247 SRA 7-247 ST 7-247 STA 7-247 SUG 7-241; 7-242; 7-243; 8-257 SUPA 3-88

Q
Q 2-53 QU 9-327

T
T 2-50; 2-53; 2-55 TCARR 8-317 TCOABS 8-317 TCOFR 8-317 TMOF 8-320 TMON 8-320 TOFRAME 6-201 TRAANG 7-223 TRACYL 7-221; 7-223 TRAFOOF 3-98; 7-221; 7-223 TRANS 3-85; 6-181; 6-184; 10-334 TRANSMIT 7-221 TRUE 2-62 TURN 4-126

R
R 2-53 R... 10-334 REPEAT 11-348 REPEATB 11-348 RET 11-343 RND 4-156 RNDM 4-156 ROT 3-93; 6-187 RP 2-53; 3-85; 4-104; 4-126 RPL 6-187

S
S 2-50; 2-53; 2-55; 4-134; 4-142; 5-175; 7-236; 7239; 7-241 S1 7-236; 7-237; 7-241; 7-246 S2 7-236; 7-237; 7-238; 7-246 SCALE 6-194 SETAL 2-68 SETDNO 8-272 SETMS 7-236 SOFT 5-170 SOFTA 5-170 SPCOF 7-215 SPCON 4-135; 7-215 SPI 7-225 SPINU 2-55

U
U 2-53

V
V 2-53

W
W 2-53 WAITP 7-212 WAITS 7-216 WALIMOF 3-95 WALIMON 3-95

A-464

12.98

Appendix

Commands, identifiers

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

X
X 2-50; 2-53; 3-79; 8-266 X 3-85 X1 3-98; 4-147

Y
Y 2-50; 2-53; 3-79; 3-82; 3-85 Y1 3-98; 4-147

Z
Z 2-50; 2-53; 3-79; 3-82; 3-85

A-465

Appendix

12.98

Commands, identifiers

840D NCU 571

840D NCU 572 NCU 573

FM-NC

810D

A-466

Suggestions

SIEMENS AG A&D MC IS P.O. Box 3180 D-91050 Erlangen/Germany

(Tel. 0180/538-8008 [Hotline] Fax ++49-9131/98-1145 email: [email protected])

Corrections For publication/manual: SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC Fundamentals

User Documentation Programming Guide

Order No.: Edition: 6FC5298-5AB00-0BP1 08.99

From Name Company/Dept. Address:

Should you come across any printing errors when reading this publication, please notify us on this sheet. Suggestions for improvement are also welcome.

Tel.: Fax:

/ /

Suggestions and/or corrections

Siemens AG Automation Group Automation Systems for Machine Tools, Robots and Special-Purpose Machines P.O. Box 3180, D-91050 Erlangen Federal Republic of Germany

Siemens quality for software and training to DIN ISO 9000, Reg. No. 2160-01. This edition was printed on bleached paper using an environmentally-friendly chlorine-free method. Copyright Siemens AG 1999 All Rights Reserved Subject to change without prior notice

Progress in Automation. Siemens

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft

Order No.: 6FC5298-5AB00-0BP1 Printed in the Federal Republic of Germany

Astm E837-08
100% (1)
Astm E837-08
17 pages
Heidenhain TNC 151 155 Operating Manual
100% (2)
Heidenhain TNC 151 155 Operating Manual
316 pages
EN - ONE WinCC 0615 - 2022-10
No ratings yet
EN - ONE WinCC 0615 - 2022-10
184 pages
Sinumerik 828D Basic Fuction
No ratings yet
Sinumerik 828D Basic Fuction
1,852 pages
Setup 5-Axis Transformation TRAORI: Configuration of Machine Data
No ratings yet
Setup 5-Axis Transformation TRAORI: Configuration of Machine Data
11 pages
Machine Tools, Metal Cutting Types World Summary: Market Values & Financials by Country
From Everand
Machine Tools, Metal Cutting Types World Summary: Market Values & Financials by Country
Editorial DataGroup
No ratings yet
Introduction To The Finite Element Method - J.N.REDDY
No ratings yet
Introduction To The Finite Element Method - J.N.REDDY
704 pages
SINUMERIK 840Dsl - 828D Programming Manual
No ratings yet
SINUMERIK 840Dsl - 828D Programming Manual
546 pages
SINUMERIK 2013.03 Basic Functions
No ratings yet
SINUMERIK 2013.03 Basic Functions
1,758 pages
Manual Configuring 810D PDF
100% (1)
Manual Configuring 810D PDF
149 pages
SINUMERIK 840D Description of Functions
No ratings yet
SINUMERIK 840D Description of Functions
79 pages
Measuring Cycles Sinumerik
No ratings yet
Measuring Cycles Sinumerik
276 pages
Sinumerik SINUMERIK 840D SL Type 1B NCU 7x0.3 PN, NCU 7x0.3B PN
No ratings yet
Sinumerik SINUMERIK 840D SL Type 1B NCU 7x0.3 PN, NCU 7x0.3B PN
164 pages
840d Operate Alarm Manual
No ratings yet
840d Operate Alarm Manual
1,460 pages
840D
No ratings yet
840D
818 pages
Siemens 840D
No ratings yet
Siemens 840D
688 pages
Programming Guide Cycles 840D PDF
No ratings yet
Programming Guide Cycles 840D PDF
416 pages
Sinumerik 840D SL Operate OPC UA 4 5
No ratings yet
Sinumerik 840D SL Operate OPC UA 4 5
9 pages
Sinumerik: Sinumerik 810D The Compact Digital Wizard
No ratings yet
Sinumerik: Sinumerik 810D The Compact Digital Wizard
9 pages
840d SL Internal Cooling
No ratings yet
840d SL Internal Cooling
112 pages
Sinumerik: The Powerful CNC Platform For Machine Tools
No ratings yet
Sinumerik: The Powerful CNC Platform For Machine Tools
36 pages
SINUMERIKWinCCenUS en-US PDF
No ratings yet
SINUMERIKWinCCenUS en-US PDF
152 pages
SINUMERIK 840D/810D: Description of Functions 12.2001 Edition
No ratings yet
SINUMERIK 840D/810D: Description of Functions 12.2001 Edition
206 pages
Sinumerik 840d SL
No ratings yet
Sinumerik 840d SL
858 pages
Belotti 5 Axis Post Processor For AlphaCAM
100% (2)
Belotti 5 Axis Post Processor For AlphaCAM
31 pages
Introduction To Post Builder
No ratings yet
Introduction To Post Builder
14 pages
Hur Co Drawings
No ratings yet
Hur Co Drawings
22 pages
07 Start Up Spindle e
No ratings yet
07 Start Up Spindle e
10 pages
DMG MillPlusV521 ProgManual
No ratings yet
DMG MillPlusV521 ProgManual
649 pages
CNC Lectura
No ratings yet
CNC Lectura
157 pages
NX Total Machining
No ratings yet
NX Total Machining
6 pages
CNC Pilot 640: User's Manual
No ratings yet
CNC Pilot 640: User's Manual
619 pages
NX CAM ISV Introduction Training
100% (1)
NX CAM ISV Introduction Training
11 pages
EN - 840D SL - 5-Axis Training Manual - v26
No ratings yet
EN - 840D SL - 5-Axis Training Manual - v26
388 pages
Working With OOTB MACH Simulation Examples
No ratings yet
Working With OOTB MACH Simulation Examples
56 pages
SIN WF5 0913 en
No ratings yet
SIN WF5 0913 en
140 pages
1 Introduction
No ratings yet
1 Introduction
33 pages
Sinumerik 828D Hardware Software
No ratings yet
Sinumerik 828D Hardware Software
218 pages
Delta
100% (1)
Delta
12 pages
PG - 1102 - en (Programming Guide 11 - 2002 Edition)
No ratings yet
PG - 1102 - en (Programming Guide 11 - 2002 Edition)
504 pages
Doosan G76
No ratings yet
Doosan G76
17 pages
Sinumerik One: The CNC For Highest Productivity
No ratings yet
Sinumerik One: The CNC For Highest Productivity
28 pages
Fanuc Focas Ethernet Manual
100% (1)
Fanuc Focas Ethernet Manual
48 pages
828D SF PDF
No ratings yet
828D SF PDF
72 pages
Seimens 840D
100% (1)
Seimens 840D
666 pages
True Mill Training Manual
No ratings yet
True Mill Training Manual
24 pages
SolidCAM Mill Turn
100% (1)
SolidCAM Mill Turn
56 pages
TechSpec For ACM
No ratings yet
TechSpec For ACM
28 pages
SIEMENS 3X - 4X MILL-AppGuide
No ratings yet
SIEMENS 3X - 4X MILL-AppGuide
28 pages
Sinumerik Sinumerik 808D Advanced Service Manual: Legal Information Warning Notice System
No ratings yet
Sinumerik Sinumerik 808D Advanced Service Manual: Legal Information Warning Notice System
50 pages
Fanuc Timeline
100% (2)
Fanuc Timeline
1 page
Multiaxis Roughing-1: The Turn Edge
No ratings yet
Multiaxis Roughing-1: The Turn Edge
47 pages
828D GH 0609 en en-US
100% (1)
828D GH 0609 en en-US
158 pages
2-2 Axes Coordinate Systems: Configuration
No ratings yet
2-2 Axes Coordinate Systems: Configuration
8 pages
PDF Handout PDF
No ratings yet
PDF Handout PDF
37 pages
GROB Siemens840D ISO Manual
100% (1)
GROB Siemens840D ISO Manual
251 pages
SinuCom Service Tools
No ratings yet
SinuCom Service Tools
139 pages
Heidenhain TNC 640
No ratings yet
Heidenhain TNC 640
24 pages
DIN ISO Programming USer Manual 2010
No ratings yet
DIN ISO Programming USer Manual 2010
618 pages
2014 Mazak Nexus QTN SQT Super Quadrex - 1-16-15 Web - 2
No ratings yet
2014 Mazak Nexus QTN SQT Super Quadrex - 1-16-15 Web - 2
52 pages
FANUC GFTE-589-EN - 04 - 101112. Manual Guide I, CNC Turning Made Easy.
100% (6)
FANUC GFTE-589-EN - 04 - 101112. Manual Guide I, CNC Turning Made Easy.
172 pages
Creo Manufacturing 9.0 Black Book
From Everand
Creo Manufacturing 9.0 Black Book
Gaurav Verma
No ratings yet
Computer Numerical Control Programming Tool Reference
From Everand
Computer Numerical Control Programming Tool Reference
Su Tp
No ratings yet
840d Shopmill
No ratings yet
840d Shopmill
15 pages
A Shear Locking Free Six-Node Mindlin Plate Bending Element
No ratings yet
A Shear Locking Free Six-Node Mindlin Plate Bending Element
5 pages
108 Weldox 900 Uk Data Sheet
No ratings yet
108 Weldox 900 Uk Data Sheet
2 pages
840d Shopmill
No ratings yet
840d Shopmill
15 pages
Elasto-Plastic Bending of An Annular Plate at Large Deflection
No ratings yet
Elasto-Plastic Bending of An Annular Plate at Large Deflection
11 pages
Science China: Physics, Mechanics & Astronomy
No ratings yet
Science China: Physics, Mechanics & Astronomy
13 pages
L L W/2 W/2 W: Free Body 1 Q M
No ratings yet
L L W/2 W/2 W: Free Body 1 Q M
8 pages
F F F F F FFFF F F F F FFFFFFFF: Equilibrium of Forces
No ratings yet
F F F F F FFFF F F F F FFFFFFFF: Equilibrium of Forces
14 pages
Measurement of Non-Uniform Residual Stresses Using The Hole-Drilling Method. Part I¡ Stress Calculation Procedures
No ratings yet
Measurement of Non-Uniform Residual Stresses Using The Hole-Drilling Method. Part I¡ Stress Calculation Procedures
6 pages
Astm D1002
No ratings yet
Astm D1002
1 page
Govt. Engineering College Ajmer: PHP With Mysql
No ratings yet
Govt. Engineering College Ajmer: PHP With Mysql
24 pages
Emergence of Software Enginnering
100% (1)
Emergence of Software Enginnering
5 pages
Viva Questions-Cpp-Cbse
100% (1)
Viva Questions-Cpp-Cbse
5 pages
SCE - EN - 032-600 Global Data Blocks - S7-1500 - R1508
No ratings yet
SCE - EN - 032-600 Global Data Blocks - S7-1500 - R1508
39 pages
C Lab Manual JNTUK I BTECH
0% (1)
C Lab Manual JNTUK I BTECH
81 pages
Sequence Control With Expressions
No ratings yet
Sequence Control With Expressions
22 pages
Wipro - Technical Aptitude Questions-T&P Cell MMMEC - Ebook
No ratings yet
Wipro - Technical Aptitude Questions-T&P Cell MMMEC - Ebook
232 pages
Application Binary Interface For The ARM Architecture
No ratings yet
Application Binary Interface For The ARM Architecture
15 pages
Technical Design Document: Template For IDA Project (Project Id) Template For Specific Development (Contract Id)
No ratings yet
Technical Design Document: Template For IDA Project (Project Id) Template For Specific Development (Contract Id)
21 pages
Assignment On Logic and Design: Group Members: Abenezer Girma Fenet Mulugeta Submitted To: Atnafu Jembere
No ratings yet
Assignment On Logic and Design: Group Members: Abenezer Girma Fenet Mulugeta Submitted To: Atnafu Jembere
21 pages
PF - RING User Guide: Linux High Speed Packet Capture
100% (1)
PF - RING User Guide: Linux High Speed Packet Capture
22 pages
Altair Flow Simulator 2021.2 - ReleaseNotes
No ratings yet
Altair Flow Simulator 2021.2 - ReleaseNotes
4 pages
Unit 1 - Digital Information: Master Vocabulary List CSP 20-21
No ratings yet
Unit 1 - Digital Information: Master Vocabulary List CSP 20-21
9 pages
Computer Peripherals and Interfaces: Homework-Ii CAP212
No ratings yet
Computer Peripherals and Interfaces: Homework-Ii CAP212
3 pages
4 DPIOverview
No ratings yet
4 DPIOverview
30 pages
Cbse Question Paper Computer Science 2011
No ratings yet
Cbse Question Paper Computer Science 2011
10 pages
OOP Concepts
100% (1)
OOP Concepts
30 pages
Hampath Manual
No ratings yet
Hampath Manual
29 pages
ABAP Performance Check
100% (1)
ABAP Performance Check
22 pages
Attachment 1
No ratings yet
Attachment 1
9 pages
Computer Science Investigatory Project (LIBRARY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM) CLASS 12 CBSE
No ratings yet
Computer Science Investigatory Project (LIBRARY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM) CLASS 12 CBSE
30 pages
COBOL Interview Questions - Page 4 - Geek Interview
No ratings yet
COBOL Interview Questions - Page 4 - Geek Interview
6 pages
Cambridge Igcse Programming Book - Public
100% (1)
Cambridge Igcse Programming Book - Public
37 pages
Unit 4: Functions and Program Structure 9
No ratings yet
Unit 4: Functions and Program Structure 9
24 pages
Operating Systems Notes
No ratings yet
Operating Systems Notes
61 pages
VSTDGPProgrammersGuide PDF
No ratings yet
VSTDGPProgrammersGuide PDF
85 pages
Mic Project Varpe Mam
No ratings yet
Mic Project Varpe Mam
15 pages
Using Assembler Language in Delphi
100% (2)
Using Assembler Language in Delphi
44 pages
Characteristics of Computer and Other Devices
No ratings yet
Characteristics of Computer and Other Devices
51 pages